Home

QuadroM8L/M26x Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

1. RX Lost Packets lt 1 amp RX Jitter lt 20 good RX Lost Packets lt 5 amp RX Jitter lt 80 satisfactory RX Lost Packets lt 10 amp RX Jitter lt 150 bad RX Lost Packets lt 20 amp RX Jitter lt 200 very bad RX Lost Packets gt 20 or RX Jitter gt 200 The Local and Remote fields indicate the two peers between which the RTP stream is transmitted The characteristics in the table below describes to the piece of RTP stream between these peers Fig Il 140 RTP Statistics page Rx Tx Codec codec for received and transmitted RTP stream respectively Rx Tx Packets number of RTP packets received and transmitted respectively Rx Tx Packet Size size of RTP packet payload received and transmitted respectively Rx Lost Packets number of lost RTP packets for received stream Rx Jitter inter arrival jitter is an estimate of the statistical variance of the RTP data packet inter arrival time measured in timestamp units The inter arrival jitter is defined to be the mean deviation smoothed absolute value of the difference D in packet spacing at the receiver compared to the sender for a pair of packets If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then for two packets i and j D may be expressed as D i j Rj Ri Sj Si Rj Sj Ri Si J i J i 1 D i 1 i J i 1 16 where J i is Rx Jitter for packet i For more detai
2. New Participant Indication chnologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 15 New Participants Configuration Page This page is used to configure the settings of participants dialed out from the handset by the moderator during the active conference Once the handset added participant connects the conference he will automatically appear in the Conference Progress table and remain there unless the conference is terminated This will allow the handset dialed participant to hang up and dial in to the corresponding conference again while it is active The page consists of the following components Participant Type drop down list is used to select the state speaker or listener only of the handset added participants connected to the conference Confirmation Type drop down list is used to select whether the conference is password protected for the handset added users or not When Star selection is chosen the handset added user should accept the conference QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 152 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus invitation by pressing the button Selecting the Participant Indication checkbox will enable a beep indication Mam _ Conference Conference Properties Coepysi during the active conference when a handset added user joins or leaves the i conference _ i i The Allow Duplicated Participation checkbox selection allows several Handset Added Participants Configuration instances of ca
3. Permanent Call Back service allows callers registered in the Authorized Phones Database to create a new trusted caller with Call Back enabled They can also modify the Call Back destination of existing callers in the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller can use the x16 code see Feature Codes to create a new trusted caller as well as to modify the Call Back destination for the already registered callers in the Authorized Phones Database By entering Permanent Call Back reconfiguration menu system asks caller to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in the Call Back settings After passing the login callers should follow the voice instructions for configuring a new entry or reconfiguring existing entries in Authorized Phone database When system accepts the inserted settings the corresponding entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database The caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the caller will be reconnected to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Please Note The detected caller number must correspond to the one applied by the caller In case of PSTN call back at least one PSTN line must be available on the Quadro There must be network conn
4. To create a new Call Routing rule Click on the Call Routing Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Call Routing page Specify the Pattern in the corresponding field Select the Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix if required Select the Destination Type from the drop down list Define the Metric or leave the default Enter a Description if needed Enable the Filter on Source Modify Caller ID checkbox if the route functionality should be limited This is dependent on the source caller information 9 Enable the Set Date Time Period s checkbox if a route should be functional within certain time date intervals 10 Press Next 11 Select the user or attendant extension from the Use Extension Settings drop down list that the call will be placed on 12 Specify the Destination Host and Port Number Username and Password if an IP or IP PSTN call type has been selected For the IP PSTN call type enable Multiple Logons if necessary Enable the Use RTP Proxy checkbox if needed 13 Choose the Authentication and Accounting method from the AAA Required drop down list 14 Choose a Fail Reason from the corresponding drop down list 15 Configure Transport Protocol for SIP messages and SIP Privacy parameters as needed 16 Press the Next button 17 If the Filter on Source Modify Caller ID checkbox has been previously enabled and the destination type is different from the FXO fill in the Source Number Pattern
5. Add IP Policy Route 215 24 IP Chpboars 30 IP Ciipboand swe Back Man Sylicm Users Coelion Feloplney beret tiimit PPTP L2TP Routes a i Polio Raai PPDPLZTP Raas Ente Dares Add Go Dole Sotecae late Stein Fa toon Meo i Fc taal Siae Foams 1a fin Tose Linea imie E a EE L a new af Je amp Fig Il 34 VPN Routing table Mam System Users Conferences Telepleoty Internat Uplink Network Add VPN Route Ceptoard Fig Il 35 Add VPN Route page The Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to activate or to deactivate the selected route s At least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear To Add an IP Static Route Select the IP Static Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the IP Static Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Enter the destination IP address and subnet mask in the Route To text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previously entered IP address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address text fields Press the Save button to make the static route with these settings la ale QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 20 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus To Add an IP Policy Route Select the IP Policy Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on th
6. Attention You should have enough memory allocated to the corresponding extension from General Settings in order to be able to upload audio files otherwise error message prevents uploading new files Play Count indicates the number of times the corresponding audio file will be played continuously in the queue QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 50 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Timeout indicates the timeout in seconds between the end of the previous queue audio file in the scenario if any and the beginning of the current audio file For the first audio file in the list this timeout indicates the interval between the beginning of the queue and the beginning of the current audio file s playback Play Background Music checkbox is used to fill in the timeout intervals between the audio files in the scenario with the background music This option requires you to choose a RIP Channel of broadcast streaming The RTP channels are created from RIP Streaming Channels page fia fem jl 1 3 ACD Agents Table Settings Extensions Management Edit Entry ACO Agent Table HHI This group is used to configure agents in the ACD group and has the following components Eie aiia krai Meee fhe i The ACD Agents Table lists all agents in the corresponding ACD group and their statuses Add opens the Add Entry page where a new agent may be added to the group The Add Entry page contains the following com
7. Automatically Download page The File Format drop down list is used to select the format in which call statistics will be saved This list offers to choose between Tab Deliminated Text log and Comma Separated Values cvs file formats The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you to select whether the call statistics files will be delivered by email or stored in some location on the server e The Send via Email radio button is used to send the call statistics files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email address of the administrating person to receive the call statistics files e The Send to Server radio button is used to store the call statistics files on a remote server This selection enables the following fields to be inserted The Server Name requires the IP address or the host name of the remote server The Server Port requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the call statistics files in The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FTP In case of FTP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Download Now bution is used to perform a manually immediate download of the call statistics QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 73 QuadroM8L M
8. NOW ae ge el eyo gies C Onora O a E AEA EAT EEE AEE cee 152 Handset Added Participants Configuration ici canxcaennenncaweanenienaesmensaeaunieeeaneriaadaas EEEE EEEE EEEE 152 Yl 0 lco 0 SEER 153 AEDE a E E E E E E E N ETE ee EE ee 154 Appendix Software License Agreement s ssrssrsrrsrrsrrsrrrrerrerrrrorerrrrrrrrrrrerrerrrrrrrrrirrrrrrnrenrerrnrrrrerrnrrerene 155 Manual Ill see Extension User s Guide Describes detailed the menus available for extension users and includes further all call codes at a glance QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide The Quadro Manual is divided into three parts e Manual l Installation Guide gives step by step instructions to provision the Quadro IP PBX and configure the phone extensions with the Epygi SIP Server After successfully configuring the Quadro IP PBX users will be able to make SIP phone calls to remote Quadro devices make local calls to the PSTN and access the Internet from devices connected to the LAN e Manual ll Administrator s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for administrators only It includes a list of all System Default Values e Manual lll Extension User s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for extension users A list of all call codes can be found there too This guide contains many example screen illustrations Since Quadro IP PBXs offer a wide variety of
9. The Confirm Secret Key field is used to verify the secret key If the entered Secret Key does not correspond to the one in the Confirm Secret Key field the error message The Secret Key does not match Please try again will appear Retry Count allows you to select the number of attempts authorized before canceling the registration Receive Timeout allows you to select the timeout in seconds between two attempts to register Encoding Type allows you to select the encoding type PAP or CHAP that should be unique on both the client and the server sides for the establishment of a successful connection Encoding Main System Users Cement Telephon iernii UHink Mebwark RADIUS Client Settings E Events RADIUS ghant Ragin ation Settings Paman Sanar Bahondarys Sarvar HAT sation IF Sect Key Contin Saiil Kr Rote tour Recah Timeo aac 5 Enpodirsy Typa Auorizabiin port ALbouning gol Audlreriication Sellinas CI Enable comman login tor all ugers in tine of by Phone autventication Usemarer Passowted AYR cation on Cesinaion RADU Sore germane Faea Confen Password nee Aonig Seins Administrator s Menus C Jy r Use his User Mame H acioun onh is nequindd type should also be requested from the Radius Server administrator The Authorization Port text field requires the port number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the authentication requests The Accounting Port text field requires the por
10. ama Alias 1 IP Address text fields require the IP address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Tik Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in the Quadro s LAN Eat cy S000 008 Ken Tests A Ap ate Alias text fields are used to enter up to 5 alias names by which bo a Fig Il 237 DNS Server Settings Add Host page the device in the Quadro s LAN will be resolved QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 128 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface The DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface page provides the option of enabling a DHCP server and controlling the Quadro user s LAN settings Therefore Quadro LAN users will automatically be provided with the following settings using the configured parameters e P addresses NTP corresponds to the Quadro s IP address WINS server Nameserver corresponds to the Quadro s IP address Domain name The DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface page offers the following input options Man System lisse Conferences Tal phony brvfeen net Uplink Metwionk Enable DHCP Server checkbox activates the DHCP server DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface on Quadro With this checkbox enabled Quadro will be able to assign dynamic IP addresses to the devices in its LAN Give leases only to hosts listed in the static MAC ese Range ttom 172 oo Cipnoara J wm ir 3 2 iF cipom address binding table checkbox e
11. e Call Recording activates the e Call Recording feature which is used to record PBX SIP or PSTN calls on the Quadro and save the recordings into the local recording box or upload to the remote server To enter a Feature Key click Add A page with the Feature Key text field is opened Enter the key and press Save The status of the selected feature entry will change to Reboot needed Reboot the Quadro and the feature will receive the status Activated To receive a Feature Key register the Quadro device and send a corresponding request to Epygi s Technical Support This request must include the Unique ID that is displayed in the Features page above the features list Upload Language Pack The Upload Language Pack page allows you to upload a custom language for GUI and Voice Messages of the Quadro The language of voice messages can be switched to the custom Language Pack language from the GUI setting page in the System Configuration Wizard The language of GUI session can be changed to the custom Language Pack language from the radio buttons on the login page Uploading a language pack will also change the language of some supported IP phones Aastra snom v 6 x Grandstream GXP2000 After a custom Language Pack is uploaded onto the system reboot the IP phone to load a matching language onto the phone Uploading a Language Pack will cause the loss of the following data l frie isan im Tere e All voice mails and custom voice mes
12. lf a user dials the pickup extension when several extensions of the pickup group are ringing the first oldest in time call will be picked up When the user dials the pickup extension and no extensions of the pickup group are ringing the No call is available to pickup message will be played to the user When the user that is not listed in the Access List dials the pickup extension password authorization of the pickup extension will be required to answer the call When a denied user dials the pickup extension the Party does not accept your call message will be played to the user For Pickup Group extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for regular extensions see User Extension Settings described above The General Settings page has a different content as follows 1 General Settings for pickup group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Man System Users Conferences Telephmy Mermet Uplink Network Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s Extensions Management Edit Entry phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent General Settings 30 Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may
13. 1 12 31 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 a tK Step 1 The list is split into two groups separating the patterns with from those without Criterion 1 The patterns with form a group with a lower priority and are pushed back to the end of the list QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 105 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Criterion 1 The list split into two subgroups 221 123 1 3 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 a lial 123 11 15 3 1 3 12 31 Or Administrator s Menus Step 2 The two groups of patterns are arranged separately from each other by the total number of matching digits inside and outside the braces brackets in the descending order Criterion 2 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Criterion 2 The list of patterns Matching digits 2 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 L123 d T r 123 3 11 15 3 3 1 37 1 12 31 4 24 2 i 0 Al BR 0 The list of patterns 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 100 150 asd 1 123 2271 1 3 12 31 123 11 15 3 4 sa lal 1 3 Matching digits NIO AAA oO N WwW A Step 3 The new sub lists are arranged separately from each other by the number of matching digits outside the braces brackets Criterion 3 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Criterion 3 The
14. 135 Appendix Conference Services for Moderators and Participants cccccc cece eee eee eee eee seed dE EEE Ee dD EEE E EE EES DEE EEE ESSERE EEE EES 136 Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page ccc cece eee c cece eee ene D DEED DEEDS EEE EE EERE EEE E EE nese ESSE ESE SSEE SESE 137 Appendix System Default N IMCS prar asn E EE ctcdebesantennicanadersaecustiganiases E 138 POMMMISEraLOl SeEUNGS cesrseusery n A E ER EERE R 138 E O NO a E ee 143 Appendix Moderators Men s esiisa eni Enne eA Ee A TE KEE anad aen Esie 145 Conference Moderator s Main Page ssssssssrrrresrrrsrrrrerrrrrsrrrrstrrrstrrrr trti orr DDE EEE EE EDDA SEES SESS DEES SESS GEESE ES SSE EEE ESS G EEE EEEn Enne 145 Ort 0S De MU ee aani kde EAE EE EAEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEI EEEE E EEEE E a a i 145 Conran e PrOD CSS aaner aces cususesusue caus sucocaneunosesesonesoneneeasesoseneses 146 PTI OMS CS ress a ce ot ae eee te cneuuaenee S EEEE E AA 147 Send INOUMIC ATION Wall ieee pedaceretcsadetadcacdcenesasesueseustecuseusccscuceassuseemracseaseanccosesaqsseasesaaressse cine cucaeeeewuaesucucesasusesuesen 147 Recorded I X0 A 8 C rrr rnnr errre rr rro rnnr P AESP EENSRAEEORAEETPAEEEOEAEESEOEAEOPAEENSEEENORNEEOE NEER E EEn 147 CC SIS CS a E ce TEE cee EEEN E EE AEA A A E E EE AEEA 148 Conor SCS PODE GE PIE eerdre E E E S 149 cenetta Se INGE aea E E EEEE E E E E A 149 POCO S E e ne E EE 149 CU TON O T T E E E ee 150 Par a E S sa goes con saeseoseeseguces 151
15. Authentic ation Creryation Fig Il 216 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard for PPTP connection Page 2 yay Man Sten Uses Conferences Telephony ibea eet Uplink CACT Ps Sl Pia dis ae PPTPILZTP Connection Wizard LTF Connection Properties QuadroConnection Pop hame guaim Passo e r F 1 55 I caipboard Fig Il 217 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard for L2TP connection Page 2 The Start functional button initiates the selected connection s If it is a client connection then this button initiates a client activity of reaching the server The Start option is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time The Stop functional button is used to stop the selected connection s Stopping the server connection will disconnect all connected clients and close the PPTP L2TP tunnel The Stop option is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 119 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The PPTP Server Configuration page is used to configure the PPTP server settings and offers the following components The PPTP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address range for the PPTP server and clients within the PPTP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict the possible number of clients for the PPTP connection Man System Users Conferences Telephony inben mei UHink Helo epygi La EET d
16. Keep alive interval 120 seconds NAT IP checking interval 300 seconds No entries in NAT Exclusion table Call Statistics NAT Traversal Settings Onboard Lines Configuration CallerID Standard 2 FSK for all lines Ringer type Type A for all lines Busy Tone and Power Disconnect indications disabled for all lines Line Settings Off hook caller ID disabled for all lines for QuadroM8L Hot Desking Capability disabled for all lines IP Lines Configuration Enable PnP for IP lines enabled Enable firmware version control enabled Configure IP phones from WAN Phones Default Template systemdefault QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 8 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Parameter Line Settings for QuadroM26x FXO Settings ISDN Settings External PSTN Gateways Gain Control Settings SIP Tunnel Settings Call Routing RADIUS Settings Voice Mail Common Settings QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x System Default Value IP Phone Templates no custom templates IP Phone Logo disabled no custom logos uploaded FXS Gateway Management undefined IP Lines 1 32 enabled IP Lines 33 96 disabled 1 96 IP Lines attached to 103 198 extensions All IP lines are in inactive mode Disabled IP lines displayed FXS Lines Loopback Settings Loopback is disabled for all FXS lines Loopback timeout is 30 Onboard Lines Configuration Caller
17. New Password ee Ggits only Corfirrn New Password ess gits only Duck n val Tactoofosies Lig All rights seserved Fig Il 66 Change Password page The password can consist of numerical values only Up to 20 digits are allowed A corresponding warning appears if any other symbols are inserted The Enable User and Disabled User functional buttons are used to enable or disable the Local Administrator s account Please Note The Administrators account cannot be disabled The Roles page contains a table where the Local Administrator and Extensions users are listed This page allows you to set the permissions to the GUI pages for each user in the table The Edit functional button leads to the Change Access Rights page where a list of user specific GUI pages is displayed Select the user in the table and press Edit to manage the permission for the corresponding user On the Change Access Rights page Grant Access Deny Access functional buttons are used to grant or deny access to certain GUI page s for the selected user When access to a certain GUI page is denied for a user the You are not authorized to access this page warning message will be displayed QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Main Syste Weera Confeaicas Daedegdl cary kaerat Liplink Bar aoa bi User Rights Management O Local Aominishators Rack x Coppi 0 Jg pagi Tachictincian Lig All right nerd Fig Il 67 Roles page at User
18. QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ACD Group Extension Settings For ACD Group extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages The SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions described above The General Settings page is described below 1 General Settings for ACD Group extension Maes Sere Short Kaname Ne Extensions Management Edit Entry This group requires ACD group extension s information and has the following components Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the ACD a oe Group Usually the display name appears on the called party s ee phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent This information is also displayed in the ACD Management Groups table Fig Il 95 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings page for ACD Group extension Password requires a password for the ACD Group extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered the Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the
19. Remote Gateway selection is not possible if this Gateway is positioned behind NAT since the IP address of the remote gateway is not reachable directly in this case Priidu Nit e Capri hl Eh 2000 010 Erri Teoh le get bhi All rights iriiri d Fig Il 212 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties Quadro lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from the local Quadro to the remote VPN gateway local subnet and remote subnet are not included This includes management access The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer or Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer the is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Local Subnet lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from all stations connected to the local network to the remote VPN gateway device local Quadro and remote subnet are not included The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Quadro lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from the local Quadro to all stations of the remote LAN local subnet and remote VPN gateway devices are not included The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Conne
20. Remove Info file Hold Music File parameters group allows updating the hold music played when Copyright C 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved you are alone in the conference downloading it to the PC or removing the custom welcome message The group offers the following components Fig Il 11 System Messages page Upload new hold music file indicates the file name used to upload a new hold music file The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding conference and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new hold music file The Download Hold Music File and Remove Hold Music File links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Hold Music File link is used to download the hold music file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Hold Music File link is used to restore the default hold music Info File parameters group allows you to upload a text file with some conference related announcement advertisement or any other information to be displayed on the Conference Progress page The group offers the following components QuadroM8L
21. SW Version 5 2 x 148 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Conference Properties Menu ee Main Conference Conference Properties Ccp gl G Setti quadro enara mas fh Refresh in 27 seconds Recording Settings Conference customization Participants Conference ID 5thed4ule AGC Settings Conference Properties 7 quadro Cep y gl Conference ID 308 Feature Codes Conference Conference Properties o General Settings o Recording Settings o Customization o Participants o Schedule o AGC Settings Description Discussion of weekly issues SIP Address 11307 sip epygi loc 5060 Conference Status Not Active Participants Active J All 0 0 Name SIP Address Participant Type Dial Out Trigger Participant Indication Nested Conference Duplication No items in list Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 7 Moderator Settings Dynamo Menu Fig Il 8 Moderator s Settings Tree Menu General Settings The General Settings page is used to configure the basic conference settings The page contains the following components Main Conference Conference Properties Cepygi Conference ID indicates the unique ID of the conference QuadreM32x82 Description indicates any descriptive information about the General Settings conference Conference ID 500 Moderator Password text field requires a password for the moderator Description Daily confer
22. The Symmetric NAT checkbox should be selected when the slave Quadro is located behind the symmetrical NAT The Enable Tunnels to Master Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a slave device and allows connecting to the master Quadro via SIP tunnel When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Master Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Master Devices moves you to the page where a list of master devices needs to be defined Mean Sete Users Conferences lelepininy hibearved Uplink Helwak SIP Tunnel Settings E Emable Tunnels fo Skipt Dices Tunes io iira praag E Crable Tmn ls to Misel banjoes Man Synen Wae Comferences Teple lever reed Upri Hatwork SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Mbi pik Delete Select al krenn SIP Tuine Hanne F_Tunnel_Guadno33 SiFTunnel_egygiq SIP_Turevel_12J SIP Tune pipi L Tunneli PTurel_ 512 Back Help Fig Il 177 SIP Tunnel Settings page epygi Fig Il 178 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices page Ban Salen ser Conferences Tebeqinny inben pret Uinik Nelwailk SIF Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Add Entry BIF Tuned Pisma BF Tunnel Lear Mirig admin Main Sate Uha Conberenoes Vee ga poate Wanit Uglies Mobwark SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices hse iy Chin l E R gigii n R gis SE Tiie Horma tizet Heme a baici s nae we IVa epyg Prog cir bbs Fig Il 180 SIP Tunnel
23. This option is displayed only if the IPSec VPN partner supports it The forth page of the IPSec Connection Wizard contains IPSec Connection Properties which serve to specify the members of the IPSec Connection and to set the basic parameters for encryption Mian Syste lees 8 Comferemoes Decleepilivcarryt internet Uplink Hetarik epygi Den es Boe a IPSec Configuration Wizard A group of radio buttons are used with Dynamic IP Road Warrior and Static IP Remote Gateway to select if the IFSec Connection Fropemes atdatd remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device is connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and is acting as a Road Warrior or is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address and is acting as a VPN Gateway lf Dynamic IP RoadWarrior is selected the Remote Gateway IP Address text field will automatically generate the value any to allow access independent from the sending IP address Selecting Static IP Remote Gateway requires entering the IP address or the hostname of the remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device in the Remote Gateway text D mamic IP i Roatwamig Static IP Rianne Gabra Remie Gateway LI Guadko se Remote Galiei Et ital gubiti Himi Gaii Clouado Remet Subnel Local Subngi lt Remote Subnet Roni Sigrid ro IP opbgand IF IPs hind L l Sihil Vi 3l p IP Cl Shop conmerchon Wanni surtesse field Please Note The Static IP
24. corresponding extension to be used by the QCM application When the checkbox is not selected on this page the QCM will be functional with the extension only during trial period te To toes Mentone Gs To Line Seminupe Please Note This checkbox can be simultaneously selected on fenmen ee as many extensions as QCM licenses are available on the Quadro Fig Il 82 Extensions Management Edit Entry License Settings page The Go to User Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the extension specific Extension s Main Menu page see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide The Go to Line Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the Line Settings page of the corresponding extension Pickup Group Extension Settings Pickup Group amp Access List The Pickup Group service is used to monitor calls addressed to a certain list of extensions and to pick up calls ringing on the listed extensions This service may be used when a group of extensions are located in the same area so the persons nearby can hear the ringing on one of the extensions This feature allows you to pick up the call ringing on a certain extension by dialing the number of the pickup extension The Pickup Group list is used to define the extensions that can be monitored by calling a certain pickup extension The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are allowed or forbidden to intercept calls ringing on extensions in the Pickup Group
25. corresponding to the selected user space are dependent on the Voice Recording codec selected from the Voice Mail page For example for the same amount of marked out user space selection of the G726 voice recording codec will provide more space for voice mails and user defined voice greetings than the G711 codec selection Call Relay indicates whether or not the Call Relay option is enabled on the extension Codecs column lists the short information full information is seen in the tool tip about extension specific voice Codecs Extension codec s can be accessed and modified by clicking on the link of the corresponding extension s Codecs The link leads to the Extension Codecs page Clicking on each user extension in the Extensions table will open the extension specific Extension Settings menu The Pickup Group Call Park and Paging Group extensions are displayed without a link in the Extensions Management table and extension pages Additionally the supplementary services configuration pages will not be accessible for this type of extensions Clicking on the Recording Box extension will move to the corresponding extension s Recording Box where the recorded calls can be managed Add opens the Add Entry page where the type and number of the new extension should be defined This page consists of MEn SRA Tawe _ EES _ TY Internet Uplink Mehak Ce epysl Tia ded PRS the following components The Extension text field is used to enter
26. defective the Licensor will replace the media without charge as long as the original media are returned to the Licensor with satisfactory proof of purchase and date of purchase within the Warranty Period This warranty is limited to you as the licensee and is not transferable The foregoing warranty does not extend to any Licensed Materials that have been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE OR WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS DEFECTS OMISSIONS INACCURACIES FAILURES DELAYS OR INTERRUPTIONS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LACK OF VIRUSES AND ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR NON INFRINGEMENT THE ENTIRE RISK ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS REMAINS WITH YOU 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISIN
27. document which you can find at the Epygi Web support portal This page consists of the following components The Enable Automatically Firmware Update checkbox selection enables the automatic firmware update service on the Quadro Attention When the older firmware is installed on the Quadro the system configuration will be lost and the device will be factory reset QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 29 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The first manipulation buttons group on this page allows you to choose between the manually configured firmware server and the server defined by the DHCP server e Assign manually this selection is used to manually configure the firmware server settings The Server Name the IP address or hostname the Server Port and the Update Method should be defined The Update Method drop down list provides a possibility to choose among TFTP FTP HTTP or HTTPS methods For some of these selections authentication Username and Password can be entered e Assign automatically via DHCP choose this selection if the Quadro acts as a DHCP client in its WAN interface In this case the firmware server s configuration will be automatically obtained from the DHCP server This selection requires previous configuration on the firmware server and will work only if the auto update directory is created on the TFTP server The DHCP server should also be co
28. epygi config loc 172 30 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Disabled Locale US TimeZone Central Time US amp Canada Theme Dynamo Choose Theme on Login disabled Emergency Code 911 PSTN Access Code 9 Ethernet Upstream 100000 Downstream 100000 Min Data Rate 0 Assign automatically via DHCP Assigned by device MTU 1500 Bytes Dynamically by provider No Routes Automatically Backup Configuration disabled Display notification for all events except Login and Firmware Update events Those events have a Do nothing action assigned Additionally Fan Control critical and major failures have a Flash LED action assigned Simple Network Time Protocol Server and Client enabled SNTP Server ntp1 epygi com Polling interval 6 Disabled Disabled Enabled Server Configuration Assign manually Server Name ftp epygi com Server Port 21 Update Method ftp Username anonymous Password empty Check and notify Every day at 0 00 SNMP disabled User Logging enabled Developer Logging disabled Log Lines to Show 25 Comment undefined Remote Logging disabled 3pcc support No key found ACD support No key found Barge In No key found IP Phone support No key found QCM support No key found Conference Server No key found Call Recording No key found Appendix System Def
29. if configured only after the configured scheduled time comes Fig Il 18 Schedule Add Entry page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 153 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus The Send Mail before Conference Activation checkbox enables email notification delivery to the participants before the conference activation The text field requires the timeout in minutes before the conference activation when the email notifications to the conference participants with Email Address configured from the Add Participants page should be delivered This option is only valid if the Email Address is configured for the participant The Send Mail on behalf of text field requires an email address or a conditional name related to the conference to be transmitted in the From field of the email notifications AGC Settings Admission Gain Control option is used to equalize the voice levels of all participants in the conference In case if some participants have too low voice level while others sound too loud this option is used to adjust all voices to some average level before sending them to the conference The AGC Settings page is used to enable and configure the Admission Gain Control parameters The Enable AGC checkbox is used to enable the Admission Gain Control option on the corresponding conference The Low Threshold and High Threshold fields indicate the range of the acceptable voice level in
30. logo for the IP Phones This page contains only those IP phones for which Quadro supports the custom logo upload The uploaded custom logo will be visible on the display of the IP phone The Enable checkbox is used to enable the custom logo for the selected IP phone model s The Browse button opens the file chooser to select the custom logo file la ty lee f IF Phones Logo Fig Il 161 IP Phones Logo FXS Gateway Management The Quadro FXS Gateway is an analogue Gateway that allows connecting analogue phones to a VoIP network The device can be used with Quadro IP PBXs to emulate additional FXS ports Both Quadro IP PBX and the FXS Gateway should be located in the same network Quadro IP PBX is connected to the Quadro FXS gateway through its MAC address Main Synem Users Conferences Toleti imcini Uplin eter FXS Gateway Management fil Bim Delais Reboot Restor HAC Aches aera abe The FXS Gateway Management page is used to define Quadro ssioecee09 90 1 FXS Gateway devices in your network that can serve as FXS expansion modules for your Quadro IP PBX Additional FXS lines C epysi Tu ese 24 Administrator s Menus provided by the FXS Gateway can be connected to the IP lines on the Quadro IP PBX QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Fig Il 162 FXS Gateway Management page 86 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Conferences
31. side upon call establishment procedure SIP Tunnel drop down list appears only when the SIP_Tunnel Destination Type is selected on the previous page The list is Scientia cara used to select the particular SIP tunnel to route the calls through Fig Il 185 Call Routing Wizard page 2 the corresponding Quadro Destination Host requires the IP address or the host name of the destination for a direct call or the SIP server for calls through the SIP server This field is named Modified Destination Host if the Pattern field on the first page of this wizard contains symbol Destination Port requires the port number of the destination or of the SIP server This field is named Modified Destination Port if the Pattern field on the first page of this wizard contains symbol User Name and Password require the identification settings for the public SIP server or servers requiring authentication Enable Activity Timeout checkbox is used to limit time to live period of routing pattern makes sense if accept or failure feedback arrives too late from the destination Checkbox selection enables the Activity Timeout text field which is used to insert a routing pattern activity timeout in the range from 1 to 180 seconds When timeout is configured the routing pattern will be active within the defined time frame and if no response has been received from the destination during that period the pattern will be stopped and next routing ru
32. the administrator access the extension s settings page where a custom greeting can be manually uploaded Move Up and Move Down are used to move the selected record one level up or down in the Extensions Directory table The sequence of the entries in the Extensions Directory is ia Syrom _Coere __ Conference _ Tolphey __ Sewn Wh _ etwa important if several records match the same spelled name The Extensions Directory table is parsed from the top down Extensions Directory Settings Add Entry and the matched entries will be played according to their position in the table Add opens the Add Entry page where a new name may be assigned to the extension An error message appears and prevents adding a new entry to the Extensions Directory if no extensions are available in the Extensions Management table Fig Il 119 Extensions Directory Add Entry page The Add Entry page offers the following components Name requires the name of the extension owner Several extensions can have the same name and a single extension may have several names Users Name is the identification parameter being searched within the Extensions Directory You should use uppercases letters in this field otherwise the name will automatically be changed to uppercase when saving it to the Extensions Directory table Call to drop down list contains all extensions on the Quadro that should ring when selecting the specified Name Description can be used for any optional inf
33. 5 2 x 54 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Call To text field requires the destination number dialed in the format depending on the selected Call Type The wildcard is supported in this field ZeroOut this group is used to configure call redirection service on the Auto Attendant When a caller reaches the Auto Attendant he may want to accelerate the automatic redirection feature instead of using Auto Attendant features To activate ZeroOut caller should dial digit see Feature Codes during the Auto Attendant welcome message The caller will then be automatically transferred to the destination specified in this page Enable ZeroOut checkbox selection enables the ZeroOut feature and activates the following fields to be inserted Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types o PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant o SIP calls through a SIP server o PSTN calls to PSTN O Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing The Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where the caller should be automatically forwarded to if activating the ZeroOut feature Attention The routing patterns in the Call Routing table starting with digit 0 will not work for incoming calls to attendant if both the ZeroOut and Send AA Digits to Routing Table opti
34. A goes on hold The Quadro user moves to a remote location and makes a call to the call park extension The Quadro user enters call park extension s password and resumes the conversation with user A Please Note Anyone who wishes to retrieve the parked call will be requested to pass a password authentication if the password is defined for the call park extension to resume the parked call The parked call will be disconnected if an incorrect password has been inserted and authentication has been rejected To avoid unexpected calls received on the extension used for call parking it is recommended to use virtual extensions for the Call Park service Barge In Service Attention The Barge In Service is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page The Barge In Service on the Quadro allows the PBX users to participate to the third party s calls while remaining imperceptible With the special feature codes for details see Feature Codes in the Manual III Extension User s Guide you may dial in to the active calls between the other local PBX user and his call partner and depending on the configuration and the feature code used you may either listen to the call or additionally be able to speak to the extension user only or to all participants This service offers three options e Listen in with this option you may only listen to the third party s call without being able to speak in the call No sou
35. Calls and Outgoing Calls checkboxes are used to select whether the FXO traffic statistics for only incoming or outgoing or for both type of calls should be displayed in the diagram chart Maximum Active Calls checkbox is used to have the number of maximum active calls displayed in the diagram chart At least one of these checkboxes should be selected otherwise error message appears Show button is used to generate an FXO channels usage diagram chart over the parameters selected above When this button is pressed FXO Channel Usage Statistics chart appears It represents dependency between the time frame and the number of calls performed during that period Additionally it may display the maximum number of calls performed in the selected time frame The Line Status for any shared ISDN Trunks on the Quadro displays the state of the B1 and B2 channels and the information about the active calls on them This page includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters appear only when an event takes place on the channel Static Parameters e B channel the state of the channel enabled or disabled e State the current state of the channel free busy or N A Dynamic Parameters e Caller Party this parameter appears when a call is received and indicates the caller address e Called Party this parameter appears when a call is placed and indicates the destination address e Ca
36. Camler Semings Ve Carrier Conmibeon Sings Accom Han epypkon Pires worie Contin Paesrvorik SIP Sr SUP Seared PHE SEHT abei iet Tipini Metan Fig Il 192 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 1 Hel iwork Vel Carrier Mkaneed Settings E eee RTP Boy AU erect ie Use Hama agai tht ham le Send Koop alive Meceages to Proxy Vitvieeteift 60 at Thibon Hast TE Aliris 157 3 20 51 Port saat Secomhony SIP Seve Hoal T Address kipi apygi cor Par S060 Curhound Proxy for Secomlary SIP Served Moss Addresa 197 Si 0 iS AJaregg _Previous n Carper ha i Se ewoi Tatinel oc Lod AB rights masm Fig Il 193 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 2 107 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus 2 VoIP Carrier Advanced Settings The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is applicable only when a route is used for calls towards a configured VoIP Carrier from a peer located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected the RIP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers UserID requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should have been provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested only for certain SIP servers For others the field should be left empty Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP registration server accessibility to the verification mechan
37. Code Attention It is highly recommended to secure PSTN and IP PSTN routing rules by selecting AAA Required options Unsecured routing rules may cause unexpected expenses QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 99 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Check with 3PCC checkbox is used to request a 3PCC approval before placing a call with the specific routing rule When this checkbox is selected and the corresponding routing rule is used to place a call Quadro sends a request to the call controlling application for the managing person to accept or reject the specific call it can be a popup window or any other type of dialog box depending on the call controlling application If the request is accepted the call will be placed Otherwise if the request is rejected the call will be skipped In case of no feedback from the call controlling application the call will be accepted after a timeout defined in the configuration of the call controlling application The Failover Reason s radio buttons indicate whether the system should use the next matching pattern if call setup with the current routing rule fails and allows choosing the reasons to be considered as a failover e None indicates that matching patterns should not be used regardless of the failover reason e Failover Reason s indicates possible failure reasons Failure reasons vary depending on the destination type selected on the previous page If the
38. Confeences Telephiy iter vet Uplink Helwork Vel The Enable FXO checkbox selection activates FXO support FAO Settings for the selected FXO line yyy canis sia beni Comin PREM Mais The Allowed Call Type is used to choose the allowed call directions for the corresponding FXO line The administrator may choose between e Enabling incoming calls prohibiting outgoing calls for the selected FXO line e Enabling outgoing calls prohibiting incoming calls for the selected FXO line e Enabling both incoming and outgoing calls for the Fig ll 166 FXO Settings page selected FXO line Man System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Up nk The Route incoming FXO Call to manipulation radio buttons group allows you to define the destination where incoming calls addressed to the corresponding FXO line will be forwarded to FXO Settings FXO 1 172 30 215 250 5060 e Extension this selection allows you to choose the local PBX user or auto attendant extension to forward calls If an inactive extension is chosen from this list the voice mail system will answer the call addressed to the corresponding FXO line If the Auto Attendant extension is chosen it will become the default user for the Fig ll 167 FXO Line Settings page corresponding FXO line on the Quadro e Routing this selection allows you to forward the incoming calls to the destination defined through Call Routing This selection requires you to e
39. Conferences Tebeptioty internet Uplink Netwoak The Users page contains a table where the Administrator and Local Administrator users are listed This page allows them to User Rights Management modify the passwords of available users in the table and to tenes Salen manage the Local Administrator s account The following Chane Password Enable User Disable User functional buttons are available on this page The Change Password functional button is used to change the password of the Administrator and Local Administrator user s account Select one of the available users in the table by toggling the corresponding checkbox and press Change Password to open the corresponding page Fig Il 65 Users page at User Rights Management The Change Password page is used to change the user s password It offers the following components QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 35 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Old Password text field is only present when modifying the Administrator account password and requires the current password of the Administrator An error message prevents entering the wrong password The New Password text field requires a new password for the Administrator or Local Administrator Reentering the new password in the Confirm New Password text field will confirm the new password Administrator s Menus Main System Users Conferences Change Password Account Name admin Old Password digits anty
40. DHCP Server Statements Authoritative Ping Check Ping Timeoutfsec 1 Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 241 DHCP Advanced Settings Main Syste User Conferences Telephony mermat link Heiwork DHCP Advanced Settings Add Entry C Predefined Gpaont option Harre phon Value Custom Options Option Code it phon Value Type IF _Addneaas ption Salue 172 524 2410 Ap igi i i 7 A EE win T Dph reg gale bij AE ri 1 Fig Il 242 DHCP Advanced Settings Add Entry The Option Code text field is used to insert a code of the option It may have values in a range from 0 to 255 The Option Value Type drop down list is used to select the type of the option value It may be an IP address a boolean or integer value etc The Option Value text field is used to insert the value of an option Depending on the selected Option Value Type this field should have the corresponding value Warning messages will prevent saving if the value inserted in this field does not correspond to the requirements of the Option Value Type If an array should be inserted here the values should be separated with a comma DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface is used to establish virtual networks in the Quadro s LAN or to integrate the Quadro into the corporate network s virtual LAN WAN DHCP service can be activated both on virtual LAN or WAN interfaces VLAN is useful
41. Date lem Maes Quien Users C cadeconces febeplroery bet en rent Upinb hetn Quadro Status IP Lines Registration Status Usermane Durin P AGhess fei aton leme P Lines Reatsn ation Stans Fig Il 27 SIP Registration Status page tegishi athom Lipa ep i Fig Il 28 SIP Registration Status page When the allowed number of subscriptions is reached no new subscriptions are possible Typically the number of subscription should be keep reasonably below the maximum allowed number to avoid losing subscriptions Thus in case the actual subscription number is close to the limit configuration of IP phones should be adjusted to decrease the number of total subscriptions on the Quadro QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 18 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Used Subscription Distribution field indicates IP phone s subscriptions distribution among BLF Busy Lamp Field subscriptions which are used for watching extensions and SLAs on IP phones and MWI Message Waiting Indication subscriptions which are used for voice mailbox status indication on the phone License Status The License Status page displays a table with all available licenses on the Quadro and the corresponding settings for each license Currently only QCM license status is displayed Mam Sytem Usas 8 Contetences Teheplvoeny bternet Upted Met woth Quadro Status License Status This page includes the following informatio
42. Device button is used to reboot the a o aane gi Quadro Please note that the session with the Quadro will be Checking IP configuration 3 dywtaicaliy wia DNC Chine closed i e the Quadro GUI should be newly opened and a CERIN TOENE ODDE ee T aaa new login will be required afterwards Se ES A TRS EN The Start Call Capture button leads to the Call Capture page where active calls and available interfaces may be captured The Download system logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar archive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro Fig Il 57 System Diagnostic page The field below will display the diagnostics results and the connectivity conditions The system should be reconfigured if problems occur during the diagnostics Show System Logs link leads to the page where Quadro s logs might be viewed downloaded and the logging setting may be adjusted System Logs The System Logs page is accessible by pressing the Show System Logs link on the Diagnostics page This page is used to adjust where system logging settings view system logs directly in your browser or download them locally to your PC The System Logs page consists of three sub pages The System Logs Settings page is used to adjust the system logging settings and contains the following components The Enable User Logging checkbox is used to enable user level log
43. FVC snom 820 also supports FVC snom 870 also supports FVC snom MeetingPoint also supports FVC Aastra 480i also supports FVC Aastra 480iCT Aastra 9112i also supports FVC Aastra 9133 also supports FVC Aastra 9143i 33i also supports FVC Linksys SPA921 Aastra 9480i 35i also supports FVC Linksys SPA922 Aastra 9480iCT Linksys SPA941 Aastra 67511 also supports FVC Linksys SPA942 Aastra 6753i also supports FVC Yealink T20 Aastra 67551 also supports FVC Yealink T22 Aastra 67571 also supports FVC Yealink T26 Aastra 6757iCT Yealink T28 QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 84 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Programmable Keys Configuration The Programmable Keys Configuration page is used to assign a function to the programmable keys of the IP phone The design of this page depends on the IP phone model However independently on the IP phone model this page contains a number of the programmable keys and Functionality drop down list assigned to each of them The following options are available in the Functionality drop down list Main Syslean Users Conferences Telephony mierne pink Nel mk e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro and a possibility to pickup the call Programmable Keys Configuration IP Line 7 addressed to that extension a e Park Answer Ext on the phone can be visible Weich Ext 11263 y as PkA Ext PrkA Ext
44. Il 116 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard SoftKeys Configuration for Aastra phone 63 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note Once a new receptionist is created the Call Queue feature will be automatically enabled with the corresponding Call Queue Size and Max Call Queue Appearance settings on all extensions attached to the IP lines defined in the Attached IP Lines text field Main Stem Users Comferences Telephony miler wet Uplink Hetwok epygi quad Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Summary Desenpbon My Deskice phone Fihona hoda Snom 320 WAC Addorss 451562011 ARS chaed IP Lies Lad Mapped FP Lines To Keys 21 3 Wistehed sericea 16 70 15 17 Heme YOu musi start ie Bone belone the niw setings will Ke tiia The next page of the wizard is a Receptionist Phone oc E E OA Configuration Wizard Summary where the configured P a eee aaa aera settings for the receptionist should be verified Additionally this econ ee page contains a Reboot IP Phone now checkbox which should be selected if you wish to have your IP phone rebooted once the tes tt eme corresponding receptionist is created Reboot is needed for a proper functionality of the IP phone However if you wish to reboot the IP phone later leave this checkbox unselected Fig Il 117 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Summary page Extensions Directory The Extensions Directory is a useful too
45. Incorrect Port Range only Integer values allowed will appear The difference between Max and Min RTP ports should be 100 ports or less according to the system s capabilities otherwise the corresponding warning appears RTP RTCP Port ranges cannot include the defined SIP UDP ports see SIP Settings otherwise an error message will appear Telephone Event Draft Support enables telephony events transmission according to the draft ietf avt rfc2833bis 04 The checkbox needs to be toggled if the SIP destination party phone or IVR has problems recognizing DIMFs generated by the Quadro Enable RTCP Support enables Real Time Control Protocol support and allows for the RTCP packets transmission RTCP protocol is used for monitoring the RTP streams and changing RTP characteristics depending on Network conditions Main Sytem Users Conferences Tokin ahead neet Lipainik Metical Be RTF Settings Edit Entry The RTP Settings Edit Entry page offers a drop down list and a P11 PGM audio oocding standard kHz sample rate 8 Gis 64 kbs data rate checkbox Packeiaton Imhir ai w Midnabie Stance Guppression Packetization Interval contains possible values in milliseconds to be configured for the selected codec sao Back Gijp gr ees eg Diihaobijigi Lu al igi riia reed The Enable Silence Suppression checkbox selection enables ae Fig Il 147 RTP Settings Edit Entry voice activity detection for the selected codec To Edit
46. M26x SW Version 5 2 x 150 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus Upload Info file indicates the information file name The system will display the file content exactly in the way it is formatted in the file It is recommended to use a txt formatted plain text file The uploaded file should not exceed the size of 2000 bytes The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding conference and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for an information file The Remove Info File link appears only when a file has been previously uploaded and is used to remove the uploaded information file Participants This page allows to configure participants of the conference as well as to adjust settings of the participants dialed out during the conference or independently connected to the conference The New Participants Configuration moves to the page where the settings of participants independently dialed in to Main Conference Conference Properties the conference can be configured Once the new participant connects the conference he will automatically Participants appear in the Conference Progress table on this page and remain there unless disconnected from the conference Conference ID 308 The Handset Added Participants Configuration moves to the page where the settings of participants dialed out from
47. Mailbox Instructions on how to insert the information prompted in the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard are available in the Features Codes see Manual IIl Extension s Users Guide The Shared Mailbox section is used to setup a mailbox sharing The Edit Voice Mailbox Access List link goes to the page where a list of PBX extensions can be defined for which the mailbox of the current extension will be shared and accessible without password authentication For more details on how to access Shared Mailboxes see Feature Codes Use External Voice Mail enables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension and is used to define a remote Voice Mail Server as a location for the Voice Mails In this case recorded voice mails will be collected on the remote server Radio button selection enables a sub group of manipulation radio buttons If the remote Voice Mail Server is combined with ta See there Caiena tegen the SIP Proxy server it is recommended to select Proxy Controlled Mailbox Type With this selection SIP proxy will keep the recorded voice mail on itself When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing 0 the call will be redirected to the voice mailbox on the proxy server Extensions Management Edit Eniry lf the remote Voice Mail Server acts as a standalone location of voice mails it is recommended to select Independent Mailbox Type With this selection Quadro redirects the recorded voice mails to the defined remo
48. No aliases defined DHCP Options Gateways 172 30 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Domain name servers 172 30 0 1 NBT name servers 0 0 0 0 NTP servers 172 30 0 1 Domain name epygi config loc Overload tftp server name 172 30 01 DHCP Server Statements Authoritative enabled Ping Check enabled Ping timeout 1 sec Undefined System Default Value Maximal mail message duration 5 min Ask password before granting local access to mail box disabled Ask password before granting remote access to mail box enabled Send welcome message disabled Play Voice Mail help enabled Automatically play messages enabled Send mails count information message disabled Send date time information message enabled Send beep at the end of message enabled Silent VM recording disabled Send new voice messages via e mail disabled Send new voice message notifications via SMS disabled Send new voice message notifications via phone call disabled Voice Mail Indication Lamp indication enabled for IP lines only Appendix System Default Values 143 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Parameter Group List Speed Calling Account Settings Caller ID Based Services Basic Services General Basic Services Hold Music Basic Services Do Not Disturb Basic Services Hotline QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x System Default Value Tone i
49. Password digits allowed only will appear The Expiration Date and Time drop down lists are used to set the date and time when the registration will expire The Expires in checkbox is used to enable the Expiration Date and Time feature The Description text field requires an optional description about the calling party Global Speed Dial Directory The Global Speed Dial Directory link leads to the page where Mam apatan Uaa Ciituienca Talapia nen yl Nena global speed dialing rules may be uploaded in a file With this service you may define multiple speed dial rules write and save them in a file and then upload all of them at once Upload Global Speed Dial Director fie Global Speed Dial Directory To compose the configuration file any text editor can be used which may produce files compatible to the CSV format the speed dial code and destination should be separated by commas There should be a line break after each code defined Fig Il 191 Global Speed Dial Directory page When a global speed dial configuration file is uploaded the Download Configuration link appears on the Global Speed Dial Directory page which allows you to download the configuration file to the PC The speed dial configuration file downloaded from the Quadro is in the CSV format To use the global speed dialing rules user should simply dial the speed dial code assigned to that speed dialing rule The call will be parsed through the rules of Call Routing table
50. Port ID drop down list contains the following options e Any Port User Any any shared ISDN trunks running in User mode e Any Port Network Any any shared ISDN trunks running in Network mode e ISDN Trunk ipaddress shared ISDN trunks on the selected gateway where ipaddress is the IP address of the ISDN gateway that shares its ISDN trunks e Any Port User ipaddress any shared ISDN trunks from the selected gateway running in User mode e Any Port Network ipaddress any shared ISDN trunks from the selected gateway running in Network mode QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 100 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Call Routing Wizard Page 3 appears if the Filter on Source Modify Caller ID checkbox had been enabled on Page 1 of the Call Routing Wizard It will require information about the source caller The Source Number Pattern field requires the caller address for which the current route will be applied The complete list of characters and wildcards is allowed in this text field see chapter Allowed Characters and Wildcards The Source Type drop down list gives you the option to select the source type PBX SIP ISDN FXO used by the source caller to reach the Quadro The settings in the Caller ID Modification group allow Caller IDs of source calls to be modified The Number of Discarded Symbols NDS text field requires the number of digits that should be discarded from the beginning of the Source Number P
51. Quadro when the Loopback Timeout expires The FXS Lines Loopback Settings page shows the only table where all FXS lines of the Quadro are listed On this page the loopback diagnostics may be enabled disabled and the Loopback Timeout can be adjusted for FXS lines The FXS Lines Loopback table lists all the FXS lines on the Quadro along with their loopback parameters Loopback State and Loopback Timeout Men Sydem asaji Cede er ee ia C Gn en tied hehh Hamb FXS Lines Loopback Settings The Edit functional link leads to the FXS Lines Loopback Settings TA Coati inatia Leaphach Salcat mene Sect Edit Entry page where Loopback Timeout in seconds may be configured for one or more selected FXS line s f Lowebhackh Shale eich Timeout The Enable Disable Loopback functional link is used to enable disable a the Loopback service on the selected FXS line s Fig ll 165 IP Line Settings Loopback page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 87 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Hot Desking lf Quadro has limited number of analogue and IP phones connected and much more users wishing to make and receive calls through the Quadro some of the connected phones can be announced as public Public phones have no static owners they are just connected to the analogue or IP lines Each user that accesses the public phone should first login with the previously created virtual extension and the corresponding p
52. Rights Management epys Tih dies eS Men yehen ibe Conteienies Tehepilrctig liheaniel Uini Meterik User Rights Management Changing access rights for role extensions Gm Access DemAccess Selecta haea Salecson a CH Deere pea Pall Slatietes Granted Fenvarding Lst Addie Ernir O eas Spred Calling Sonregs Li usarprw Changing Paceeword Tor admin of sdension Granted Grand Granted Granied Oraned Basis Denices General Seating n g m adoresamanrgemeN Exiension Caller ID Daasd Services Table inaned AU petarwices Edit Eirion Ghl r D Basg Bonide prutli Exjension Grip Lisl Granted E greupitsiadd Extension Group Liri Addiedit Meamibar Grandad Gack Hat iusersothngs Brinson Account Batis a few Bade Sermces Hold Music Settings Exlendion Voice Maiki Batic Semoes Hyi Ling Settings Capea he Cp S Coa Techie Lid All rig kb rereana d Fig Il 68 Edit Roles page at User Rights Management 36 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Users Menu QuadroM 3 caenncns Dr ctory Af Pr Active Calis oo manenemerd Cat Sian Teme Y Fig Il 70 Telephone Users Menu in Plain Theme Fig Il 69 Telephone Users Menu in Dynamo Theme Extensions Management The Extensions Management page is used to create a variety of extensions and auto attendants on the Quadro From this page by clicking on the user extension the Administrator can go to the
53. Settings Tunnels to Master Devices page The Tunnels to Master Devices page consists of a table where master devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 95 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new master device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The Enable Registration checkbox selection is used to enable the registration to the corresponding master device The Tunnel Name text field requires the SIP tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel name with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quadro however this is not mandatory POYO j Man Shen Uses Conferences Teleqlininy Werme Hink Nelwoik yy SI Toys cir bbs SIF Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry Cl Enable Regithabon Tunnel Mame SP Tunnel User ene guidat The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel_ ai thaili Masler dedite if 192 160 7553 Madler dewice port S060 Save Rak Hala The Password text field requires the authentication password Eappiigha fl SC oe Eee Tari lego hii AD tig hte reta
54. Sil BAT Tien for RP o tomatic Ofre g Disable j e Force with this selection all the SIP traffic will be routed through the NAT server Help e Disable with this selection no SIP traffic will be routed Fig II 148 General NAT traversal page through the NAT server The SIP Parameters page is used to configure NAT specific settings for SIP and offers two independent groups of settings Bim Dee thai fee fpi himnai Apna Hef UDP Parameters Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of pant connection over NAT e I E Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of ni Mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT STUN settings are configured on the STUN parameters page see below MAT Traversal Settings Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT Mapped Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP UDP traffic over NAT Fig Il 149 SIP Parameters page Mapped Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT TCP TLS Parameters Mapped TCP Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP TCP traffic over NAT Mapped TCP Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP TCP traffic over NAT Mapped TLS Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP TLS traffic over NAT Mapped TLS Port requires the port n
55. There is a checkbox for every IPSec connection to select it for further editing Start activates the connection establishment of the selected IPSec connection The State of the IPSec connection will change into Connected or Activated depending on the IPSec connection type If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected appears Attention It is not recommended to simultaneously start a static and a dynamic connection configured to use the same secret key A dynamic connection may capture the static SE connection peer and vice versa depending on which connection a a ee se en aE established first cana fie li fae J IPSec Configuration Stop disconnects the selected IPSec connection The state of the IPSec connection will change into Stopped If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected will appear More than one record may be selected at a time to be stopped Fig Il 208 IPSec Connection Settings page Add leads to the Add IPSec Connection wizard where a new IPSec connection can be defined and specified The wizard provides several pages Edit leads to a set of IPSec Connection Properties pages to modify the parameters of the selected IPSec connection The page includes the same components as the Add IPSec Connection page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise an error message One row must be selected appears Res
56. Uplink Melverk The Generate and Install New CA Root Certificate page is used to define generate and install a new CA root certificate for SE ne eS Boo ae ee ee SIP TLS traffic All fields in this page require root certificate E T specific information dtia or Finen bain hall na The General Certificate and Install button is used to generate DS ia a new CA root certificate based on the defined data and to scale ia install it on the Quadro Quadro will get rebooted automatically sya iia ea Hea once the new certificate is installed You may download the gmat address actual copy of the certificate from SIP Settings page Vandabon par are DA Key Pitawwd To ensure a secure TLS connection with the Quadro s defined CA root certificate both sides should have the same certificate installed If the end user is an IP phone you may activate the a eT EE TD TLS certificate update mechanism from it to obtain the latest certificate generated by the Quadro If the end user is a server or other device you may download the certificate from the Quadro and apply it manually on the remote side Porin Paaswerd Fig Il 145 Generate and Install New CA Root Certificate page RTP Settings The RTP Settings page allows the administrator to configure the codec s packet size and silence suppression for each voice codec to select the G726 codec standard to define RTP RTCP port ranges etc All parameters listed on this page may be modifi
57. Wizard I2 amp L3 Settings 91 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Coding Type drop down list allows you to select between a law and mu law coding types The Switch Type is another configuration parameter that depends on the Service Provider The Passive Mode checkbox is used to leave the ISDN Layer1 connection in the Slave mode When this checkbox is selected Layer1 remains idle when calls are not available When this checkbox is not selected Quadro keeps its Layer1 always active This checkbox enables the Enable TEI Remove Procedure and Permanent TEI Value checkboxes With the Enable TEI Remove Procedure checkbox is selected the trunk will lose the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 With the Permanent TEI Value checkbox is selected the trunk will keep the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 or when Quadro detected ISDN link DOWN signal from carrier These checkboxes are present only for connection types different from PTP Point to Point selected on the first page of ISDN Wizard In case if PTP Point to Point connection type is selected on the first page of the ISDN Wizard these two checkboxes are replaced with a TEI Address text field that requires the channel number digit values from 0 to 63 for connection establishment between the CO and the ISDN client Channel Selection is used to select between the Preferred and Exclusive B channel select
58. Yes WWARNING password is empty PCMA Yes WVARNING password is empty PCMU See diih ATTS Yes PEMU aa Copyright C 2003 2009 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 72 Extensions Management page The following columns are present in the table Extension lists user or attendant extensions on the Quadro This number is used for internal PBX calls Display Name indicates an optional display name to identify the caller Attached Line indicates the FXS or IP line corresponding extension it is attached to R is displayed in this column when SIP Remote Extension see below functionality is enabled on the extension SIP Address displays the SIP address of the corresponding extension The column displays the full SIP address i e username sipserver port when the Registration on SIP Server checkbox is selected If registration is disabled the SIP address will be displayed in the following format username Proxy sipserver port If no SIP registration server or SIP server port is defined corresponding information will not be included in this column If no username is defined the extension number will be displayed instead Percentage of System Memory indicates the user space in percentages configured for each extension The actual available duration in minutes for the extension voice mails uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages is also displayed here The available minutes
59. above specified by their State enabled or disabled the selected Service the set Action allowed or blocked the IP addresses the filters apply to if Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding With the exception of View All the table offers the following functional buttons e Enable is used to enable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear e Disable is used to disable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear e Add opens a filter specific page where new rules may be defined by a Service an Action a Restriction to certain IP address es or IP groups and if adding a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding the destination IP address for Forwarding The page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding offers the following input options Service includes a list of possible services to be configured All user defined services also will be displayed in this list Action includes possible actions to setup the rule Forward to IP requires the destination IP address where traffic should be transferred to if it comes from the restricted host The IP address defined in this field will be ignored for blocked action of the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding rule Please Note It is not allowed to forward incoming packets when the NAT service is disabled on the Quadro Qua
60. an IPSec connection normally requires the functionality of a VPN gateway on each side of the communication line An intelligent Internet access router for example Quadro delivers this function but also PCs or workstations may also be equipped with VPN gateway functionality Home offices typically prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses When Quadro is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address it will be set up to act as a VPN gateway Quadro is then prepared to establish an IPSec connection with another VPN gateway device but also allows access to Road Warriors A notebook laptop used by a traveling employee could also be a Road Warrior Access to their company s intranet via an IPSec connection can be obtained regardless of their location Quadro can also be set up to act as a Road Warrior If a home office is connected to the Internet via Quadro with PPPoE Point to Point Protocol and dynamic IP addressing setting up Quadro as a Road Warrior will allow an IPSec connection to the corporate network QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 14 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus For the encryption and decryption of the data transmitted via the IPSec connection a key is used RSA used by Quadro is an asymmetric key system It has to be available on both sides of the IPSec connection and will generate a different pair of keys on each side a private key and a public key During the connection establishment
61. and rings on the agent s phone until it is answered If this value for some call in the queue is exceeded then the call is being disconnected unless the call redirection is enabled from this page In that Sore PIE case the call will be redirected to another destination as Fig Il 96 Extensions Management Edit Entry ACD Group Settings page defined here Call Distribution Type defines the method of choosing the agents within the group for connecting the call The following distribution types are available e All Agents Ringing the system tries to reach all available agents in the group ringing their phones As soon as the first answers it cancels the calls to other agents similar to Many Extension Ringing on the Quadro see Manual III Extension User s Guide If no one answers within Common Timeout the system either disconnects or redirects the call Round Robin the system calls to the first available agent in the list of agents configured with AG If the agent doesn t answer within Ringing Timeout the system tries to reach the next agent in the list etc Reaching the end of the list it starts from the beginning again If the call is not answered and the Common Timeout has expired the system either disconnects or redirects the call e Longest Idle the system calls to the first available agent who was longest idle after the last call If the agent doesn t answer within Ringing Timeout the system tries to reach a
62. be delivered The e mail Han Syan ise 36 Conferences lelepinny herme Uplink Helwok System Mail Settings Enable MTF Haat 10116015E SMF Peat Mal Sender Addrece Produchive_Guadrodie M44 Mail Resigned Addrete asholeingayandepyygiainean Mail Recipient Address C0 LJ Enable S81 Authentication inar Hame Administrator s Menus uag icar Pacer ne recipient here can be a Quadro administrator or someone responsible for network and system problems Gaa mark Healy Mail Recipient Address CC text field requires an active email address where a carbon copy CC of the system emails will be delivered Fig Il 46 System Mail Settings page Enable SMTP Authentication must be selected if the specified SMTP server requires authentication In this case authentication User Name and Password configured on the SMTP server should be defined in the corresponding text fields Attention The following symbols are not allowed for the Password field 7 amp Vv Send Test Mail is used to initiate a test e mail transmission This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page To configure the System Mail Enable the system mail sending by the Enable checkbox selection Update or set the SMTP host in the SMTP Host text field Update or set the e mail sender address in the Mail Sender Address text field Update or set the e mail address in the Mail Recipient Address text
63. blocks the last caller e Record records the call in case if the manual call recording is allowed for the call configured from e Call Recording Settings e ACD Login Logout allows the corresponding ACD agent to login to all groups it is involved in if previously logged in to log out from those groups For details on ACD functionality see ACD Management For Snom phones when multiple IP lines are selected on the Attached IP Lines text field on the first page of the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard this list additionally contains the number of specified IP lines That selection is used to set the correspondence between the selected IP lines and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so select the IP lines corresponding to each programmable key from the Functions drop down list on this page Each programmable key on the Snom IP phone will now be responsible for the selected IP line on the Quadro QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Mom System Users Conferences Telephony internet Uplink Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration Prog ammabile Key Fumction PKI Main System Users Coaderences Telopleoary internet Uplink Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Softkeys Configuration Key Fiuctionality 1 Watch Ext 41 Vmat CallFwd OND Linelnfo CallBlk Watch Ext 47 Watch Ext 71 ea a ee Se eils Call Park Ext 77 STA af oth LLS Fig
64. by the receptionist to determine the availability of managers for incoming call transfers to them Call Interception To use Call Interception service the managers phones watch option should be enabled and each manager should have a programmable key assigned on the receptionist s IP phone This is performed automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard When an incoming call addressed to the certain manager comes in the receptionist can see the corresponding programmable key blinking and the caller s ID on the phone s display The receptionist is able to intercept the incoming call by pressing the blinking key The caller will then be connected to the receptionist If the receptionist does not answer the call addressed to the manager and if the manager does not answer it either the call will be directed to the manager s voice mailbox if it is enabled If the manager s voice mailbox is not enabled the call will be disconnected Kickback Quadro allows the receptionist to forward the incoming calls to the manager s extension and if there is no answer or if the called extension is busy on another call the call is returned to the receptionist s phone instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer or busy the call will automatically get back to the receptionist Voicemail
65. call cannot be established due to selected Failure Reasons the call routing table will be parsed for the next matching pattern and if found the call will be routed to the specified destination Busy available for PBX SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN destination types and indicates cases when the dialed destination is busy Wrong Number available for PBX SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN destination types and indicates cases when the dialed number is wrong Network Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN destination types and indicates cases when system overload network failure or timeout expiration occurred System Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN destination types and indicates cases indicated in Network Failure and Other fail reasons Other available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN destination types and indicates cases when authorization negotiation not supported or request rejected or other unknown errors occur e Any stands for all failure reasons mentioned in the Failover Reason s group The Custom Profile text field is present if the PBX Voicemail destination type has been selected on the first page of the Call Routing Wizard This field requires the Voice Mail Profile name to activate the custom voice mail settings see Voice Mail Profiles on the extension when the corresponding routing rule will be used Please Note If an extension does not have a profile specified here or the specified profile
66. chapters below The LAN configuration and regional settings will be described later in this chapter Please Note It is strongly recommended to leave the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to the administrator QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Mam System Users Conferences Teleplroey System Configuration Wizard Getting Started This wizard guides you through Bystem Configuratben DHCP Setings sr the LAN iefertace Regonal Betings and Presererces Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Code Seatings Copyngm C 2003 2008 Epyagi Tesinslogies L d Ae rights reseed Administrator s Menus Fig Il 2 System Menu in Plain theme Fig Il 3 System Configuration Wizard Start page QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The System Configuration page contains the host name IP address and Subnet Mask information about the Quadro LAN interface These settings make Quadro available to the internal network The System Configuration page offers the following input options Host Name requires a host name for the Quadro device Domain Name requires the LAN side domain name which the Quadro belongs to IP Address requires the Quadro host address for the LAN interface Subnet Mask requires the Quadro hosts Subnet Mask The Regional Settings and Preferences are used to select settings specific to the location of the Quadro This is important for the functionality of the
67. drop down list is used select a preconfigured custom template for the IP phone When the Use default is selected in this drop down list the template selected on the IP Line Settings page will be used see above The Enable Hot Desking Capability checkbox is used to enable the Hot Desking feature on the corresponding IP line The Hot Desking Automatic Logout section is used to configure Hot Desking functionality expiration on the corresponding IP line This may be useful when someone who logged in to the public phone with the extension attached to this line forgot to log out after using it With this option enabled once the expiration time arrives the extension will automatically log out from the public phone The following options are available e Never the extension will never expire and will remain logged in to the public phone e After the defined period of time requires the period after which the extension will automatically log out from the public phone e At the certain moment requires the moment hour and minute when the extension will automatically log out from the public phone By pressing the Web link in the Details column for each configured SIP phone will lead you to the Web configuration page of the corresponding SIP phone Please Note This link only works from the LAN side of the Quadro i e when the Quadro s GUI is accessed from a PC located in the Quadro s LAN If you wish to connect the SIP phone s GUI t
68. extension settings pages biain System Users Conferences Telephony lea rit Uplink Metevork When this page is accessed for the first time after the Quadro s initial boot up or the default configuration settings restore an intermediate page is displayed Choose Extensions Length The Change Extension Length page is used to define the extension settings applicable to all extensions on the Quadro This page disappears once being saved The Change Extension Length page consists of a radio button i Fig Il 71 Extensions Management Add Entry page selection e Leave Current Length radio button selection is used to leave the current length of extensions on the Quadro Per default the extensions length on the Quadro is 3 In front of this selection the actual configured length of extensions is displayed e Change Length radio button selection is used to change the actual length of extensions on the Quadro This selection enables the following information to be defined The Extension Length drop down list requires you to choose the length of the extensions on the Quadro This number will apply to all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions The length of the extension can be 2 3 or 4 The Extension Prefix text field is used to define a prefix with which all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions should start The prefix cannot start with the digits 0 or 9 otherwi
69. firmware on your SIP phone Please Note The Firmware Version Control service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below Attention Do not select this checkbox if you wish to run other firmware version on your SIP phone than the one compatible with the Quadro The Configure IP phones from drop down list is used to select the Quadro s interface where the IP phones are connected Besides LAN and WAN this list also includes all defined VLAN interfaces The Phones Default Template drop down list is used to select the Quadro default template for the IP Phone which will be used if not selected otherwise on the particular line see below The Manage IP Phones Templates link takes to the IP Phones Templates page where custom IP phone templates may be created The Upload IP Phones Logo link takes to the IP Phones Logo page where custom logo for the IP phone may be uploaded The FXS Gateway Management link takes to the page where Quadro FXS gateway devices may be defined in order to add additional FXS lines to the Quadro IP PBX The IP Lines table lists all available IP lines with additional information about each of them number of the extension attached to it information about the phone type and the configuration details QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 82 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Each column heading in the tables is link By clicking on the column heading the table will
70. for the description of the skill Fig Il 123 ACD Management Add Skill page The Agents page of ACD Management contains a list of agents and the skill set corresponding to each agent Every agent is characterized by an Agent ID which should be unique in the system Agent IDs and passwords are used by the agents for logging into Agents Group see description above Add opens the Add Agent page where a new agent may be created The Add Agent page contains the following components ACD Agent ID requires the number of the agent Digits are only accepted for this field The Agent ID should be unique in the system Password requires a password of the agent The agent password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered the Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent creating the agent Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear Description requires an optional description of the agent Call Type lists the available call types Fig Il 124 ACD Management page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 68 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus PBX extensions on the Quadro tan fiee ike C a SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls to a global telephone network Auto used for un
71. hold New not yet played and Old fal onan aenar aaae already played call recordings The Status column in the E I amen Recording Box table indicates the current state of the call Ee e aa arte a ramram ELIT recordings All new recordings in the table are displayed in bold ocr cana z font Playing a call recording cancels both the New status and E panenan e bold font Call recording can be selected to be played or Beep Tanani deleted a a Taname KE Pa jia faep i T F T aa j Bead Bo eke ein eB Mecho Bs Le The following information is available on this page Recording free space provides information on the number l Fig Ill 110 Extension s Recording B of minutes seconds of free recording box space es eee entre wget Refresh functional button is used to refresh the Recording Box for any latest recordings or status changes Send to FTP functional button is used to move one or more selected recordings to the FTP server configured from Recording Storage Settings in Recording Box Extension Settings page New recordings field shows the number of newly done call recordings since the user s last access to the voice mailbox All recordings field shows the number of all recordings existing in the Recording Box Recording Box table displays the following information Status indicates whether the call recording is New and not yet played New recordings are displayed in bold font Caller is the address of the caller
72. in corporate companies to divide large networks into groups and to have devices like Quadros and IP phones in each network separated for example to separate networks for data and voice transmission Priorities may be assigned to the interfaces for packets prioritization With VLAN configuration each virtual network will be characterized with a VLAN ID tag Packets addressed to that network will be checked towards the ID and if the ID number defined in the incoming packets matched the corresponding network s ID the packets will be accepted Otherwise if the ID does not match the packets will be dropped In the same way if the Quadro is integrated into the network that uses VLAN technology outgoing packets should have the ID number of the corresponding virtual network for the remote party to accept the packets from the Quadro QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 130 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface page contains a table with all enabled VLAN interfaces created in VLAN Settings page see below and the corresponding parameters VLAN ID IP Address Range and WINS Server This page contains the following components Enable DHCP Server checkbox activates the DHCP server on Quadro for VLAN With this checkbox enabled Quadro will be able to assign dynamic IP addresses to the devices in its VLAN Activate functional button is used to activate DHCP service on one of the VLAN interfac
73. in this page Enable ZeroOut checkbox selection enables the ZeroOut feature and activates the following fields to be inserted e Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls through the FXO Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing e Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where caller should be automatically forwarded in case of activating the ZeroOut feature Restore Default Greeting File will restore the default greeting file If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled Upload New Greeting File shows an attached greeting file selected by the current user The greeting file will be played to a caller party when it is entering the voice mail system The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will be received The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension In this situation the You do not have enough space warning will be received Optionally greeting file can be recorded from the phone handset see Feature Codes The Browse button he
74. is used to define the email templates used in the system generated emails to the Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network epygi conference participants Two email templates can be defined on ae this page pag Mail Default Settings e Conference Notification Default Mail delivered when the moderator chooses the Send Notification Mail menu option Meee eee menor e Conference Activation Default Mail delivered by the a i conference Scheduling system if the Send Mail before ee ee onrerence etalls Conference Activation option is enabled Conference ID lt conf id gt Subject lt subject gt Password Each template should be defined in the corresponding text field Description lt description gt anne iiei iga Participant password lt password gt Additionally functional tokens can be used to automatically Safir sates cu onc eee tena gy Schedule List insert the Conference ID Subject Description Participants Password Scheduling information as well as a possibility to Conference Activation Default Mail display the time remained until the conference will start etc ARAE ABE conference ID The conference you have been invited to is to be jec All these tokens can be inserted by USING the links on the right activated in lt time to _activation gt Conference Details side of the page Conference ID lt conf_id gt Password i i
75. level up or down within the Agents Table The sequence of Agenis is important when Round Robin call distribution is selected in the ACD Group Settings page see above Agents will be called in the order selected in the Agents table Recording Box Extension Settings For Recording Box extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings SIP Advanced Settings and Recording Box Settings pages The SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions described above The General Settings and Recording Box Settings pages are described below DPE Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Ccp gl QuadroM32x 52 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings General Settings 80 SIP Settings SIP Advanced Settings Display Name Subject Recording Box Settings Password P 1 General Settings for Recording Box extension e ballin EET AE SETTA Confirm Password seceece This group requires Recording Box extension s information and has B nou pubera the following components Percentage of Total Memory 2 M Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the POSEE ORENS Recording Box extension Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail IS copyigntccy 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Lid All rights reserved sent Fig Il 100 Extensions
76. line The Hot Desking Automatic Logout section is used to configure Hot Desking functionality expiration on the corresponding FXS line This may be useful when someone who logged in to the public phone with the extension attached to this line forgot to log out after using it With this option enabled once the expiration time arrives the extension will automatically log out from the public phone The following options are available e Never the extension will never expire and will remain logged in to the public phone e After the defined period of time requires the period after which the extension will automatically log out from the public phone e At the certain moment requires the moment hour and minute when the extension will automatically log out from the public phone QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 81 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Information on the Caller ID system Caller ID is a service identifying the caller when performing a call or sending a voice mail and notifying the called party about the identity of the caller The Caller ID service is available only for phones with a display to show that information Two types of Caller ID notification are available on Quadro FSK and DTMF FSK Standard The FSK standard supports caller ID indication either with the phone handset on hook or if the called party is already busy with another call or operation handset is off hook F
77. list of patterns 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 Matching digits 100 150 asd 1 1 3 12 31 123 3 11 15 3 1 aa z ie hi 1 3 0 The list of patterns 1231 1 1 3 3 0 8 100 150 asd 1 1 3 12 31 123 11 15 3 i 1 3 Matching digits The Best Matching Algorithm will stop after executing step 3 as no new sub lists are formed The resultant list of prioritized patterns will be the following QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 106 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The prioritized list 1231 1 1 3 3 0 8 100 150 asd 1 Vol P Carrier Wizard 123 2274 1 3 12 31 123 11 15 3 or ss a 1 3 Administrator s Menus The VoIP Carrier Wizard is used to define access codes for available VoIP Carrier accounts which will particularly allow you to reach users over IP PSTN providers or to call to the peers registered on the certain SIP servers by dialing simple digit combinations For each configured VoIP carrier the wizard creates a specific IP PSTN routing rule in the Call Routing table This entry is available to PBX users only which means only PBX users can make calls to the corresponding VoIP carrier Additionally a virtual extension automatically generated in Extensions Management will be registered on the defined VoIP Carrier s SIP server The settings of that extension will be used to make calls from Quadro s users towards
78. message will appear Cappighi iE n A Ep tote eee AD righi Fig Il 219 L2TPServer Configuration page To Specify an IPSec Connection 1 Press the Add button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection Wizard will appear in the browser window 2 Selecta VPN Peer Type and assign a name to the IPSec Connection Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 3 Enter the remote side IP parameters check subnets gateways for the connection select the NAT traversal option if needed and the desired keying type Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 4 lf the Automatic Keying type has been selected enter the automatic keying parameters and select the PFS and IPSec compression options if needed If the Manual Keying type has been selected enter the encryption and authentication keys and SPI s 5 To specify an IPSec connection with these parameters press Finish Press Cancel to abort the operation To Manage an RSA key for the IPSec Connection 1 Press the RSA Key Management button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection RSA Key will appear in the browser window 2 Select the RSA key length and press Generate to generate a new RSA public key This may take several seconds 3 Enter a destination e mail address in the Email this key to peer text field then press Send to send the new RSA public key To Delete Stop Start Enable Disable a VPN Connectio
79. mode Any inserted digits on the Auto Attendant prompt will be parsed through the Routing Table on ints rai Lane T OAOD Nita the Quadro Extensions Management Edit Entry Amena Siena OO Redirection on Timeout this group allows automatic call redirection in case no action has been performed by the caller The group offers the following options Enable Redirection on Timeout checkbox is used to enable disable the automatic call redirection Recurring Attendant Prompt Repetition Count text field indicates the number of Recurring Attendant Prompts to be consecutively played to the caller with no action from his her side When the Recurring Attendant Prompt is played the number of times indicated in this text field the call will be automatically redirected to the defined destination Call Type drop down list includes possible incoming call types PBX PSTN SIP or Auto PBX selection means that the call will be redirected to the local extension SIP selection means that the call will be trent Fre eas ene redirected to the SIP destination correspondingly SAREE PSTN selection means that the call will be redirected to the PSTN destination Auto selection is used for undefined call types destination independent on n whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN Fig Il 104 Extensions Management Edit Entry Attendant Scenario page number will be reached through Routing QuadroM8L M26x SW Version
80. modifications are allowed and no functional buttons are available QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 122 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide ETAN PET 7 Main Syste Users Conferences Telephony hiteaneet Unlinik CEEL E H wi Puad bH Filtering Rules The Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filter is for incoming traffic The rules here allow or deny systems on the Internet to AREE Panes reach the services of Quadro s LAN The NAT service should be Current Policy Firwat disabled enabled on the Quadro to provide the possibility of Port Lone Tot Eet onet Mecca aa cece PAEA ea ino Forwarding in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering FERGIE na rules The Port Forwarding function will be unavailable if NAT is disabled on the Quadro Poa nie Mange User Deined Service Pool coupe The Outgoing Traffic filter is for outgoing traffic The rules here allow or deny Quadro s LAN users to reach external services Packet Filter Management Access is used to enable management access to the Quadro from the Internet A host on the Internet can be esa ca rune i allowed to reach the Quadro Bitat i smn Besnoug ih tonmantto te Doscrimian Call Control Access is used to enable the access from the call controlling application from the Internet to the Quadro The call controlling applications can be used to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifica
81. more of the following Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA settings e Local Authentication with this checkbox selected callers will need to pass authentication through the Local AAA Table when dialing the current pattern e RADIUS Authentication and Authorization this checkbox is present when a RADIUS client is enabled With this checkbox selected callers will need to pass the authentication through RADIUS server see above when dialing the current pattern e The RADIUS Accounting checkbox is accessible when the RADIUS Client is enabled With this checkbox selected no authentication will take place but CDRs call detail reports of the calls made through this routing record will be sent to the RADIUS server This checkbox selection enables the Client Code Identification checkbox If the authentication is configured based on the callers address callers will pass the authentication automatically otherwise they will be required to identify themselves by a username and a password e The Client Code Identification checkbox selection activates the code identification feature a caller after dialing the destination phone number may optionally enter and then an Identity Code An Identity Code is an arbitrary digit string entered by the user to identify a specific call or call group The Identity Code is sent with CDR to the RADIUS server and might be used by a billing program for grouping the calls having the same Identity
82. newly created ACD Group will automatically appear in sam pime emee Caiena a etm the Extensions Management table ACD Management Add Group Fig Il 127 ACD Group Management page Edit opens ACD Group Extension Settings in the Extensions Management Pressing on the links in the Group ID and Agents List columns of the Groups table will lead you to the ACD Group Extension Settings where group settings and the list of group s agents may be adjusted correspondingly Fig Il 128 ACD Group Management Add Entry page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 69 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Conferences Menu Conferences Ma Syan Ma Cii Pebepel est ry Wieden inet Aldiak ne a Mans Manager Wai Denit Bareji QuadroM 32x Managemen Aetiwe Calle Fig Il 129 Conferences Menu in Dynamo Theme Please note The Conference Server is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page Conferences Management The Conference page displays a table with the existing conferences on the system This page allows you to create new conferences and manage the existing ones The following columns are present in the Conferences table Conference ID indicates the unique ID of the conference This number is used from Auto Attendant to reach the conference The Conference ID is also used as the username for the moderator when logging into the Quadro ric E Main Syoten Users Conmdienc
83. numeric values from 0 to 500 between CALL PROC and ALERT messages Alert Guard Timer it is used when Quadro is connected to a slow ISDN call confirmation PBX Recommended values are fast connection Oms normal 150ms default Main System Users Conferences ISON Wizard L2 2 LI semings Trak 1 values from O to 90000 It is ee Ga idle Timer T202 10000 TSU Tires 4000 TAS Tiri Tad Tirer Aled Guard Tirneout Coding Type Prrpir Mode CONNECT DISC or O Permanent TE Vay Capri ghi 1 CG A E pgi Toba gby aL PU slow ISDN PBX 350ms very slow ISDN PBX 500ms QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Hill righvin sepa Telephony S00 Sraa j maar C1000 23000 mas 10 1500 mga 0 SOD 5 riiit 1000 1 2000 y maer 0 300 meee Fl Enable TE Reng Proeedune rind tan eed Upainike Weti Switch Tepe Chane 2elechon Deieer Celablishimerdt Procedure Called Party Type of Number Calley Party Type of Muniber Called Part Humberin Plan Calling Party Mumbaring Flan eniri Progass Tore to PETE roaming Caled Cipt Sine Generate Progress Tore to IF Enas CUR dardce e tamaie aconnaction Moda a Cremas CUD wah P Aseened iderdty EITM Channel FID Channel besic_ dsi w pretend On progress indicaba wth band infomaben k Links w linkre w ISDAMAelephorn numienig alan ISM telephony numbering plan Hane ha 0 25 l Cancel Fig Il 172 ISDN
84. of the recorded call Callee is the address of the called party of the recorded call Date amp Time is the call recording start date and time Message indicates call recording duration in minutes seconds and a speaker sign used to play using any available media player supported by your Operation System the recording or to download the audio file to the PC The column headings of the voice mail tables are created as a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column Upon sorting ascending descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading Each row in the Voice Mailbox tables can be selected by a checkbox for editing deleting or marking Delete removes the selected recording s Select All checks all existing entries in the table Inverse Selection inverses the current selection if no entries are selected clicking on inverse selection will check all entries To Play a Call Recording 1 Click on the speaker icon of the corresponding recorded call 2 Depending on you browser s settings the wav file will be played directly or an application will ask you to save the wav file on the local PC In the second option please specify the path and run the media file from the specified location to play it QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 60 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus To Delete a Call Recording 1 Select the checkbox of the cor
85. on hold while the PBX number and the SIP username if it is registered on the SIP server of the first available call park extension where the user is added will be played to him her The Call Parking is valid for the period defined in the Call Park Extension Settings By default it is 15 minutes During that time hold music if configured will be played to the parked party When the Retrieve Timeout expires the phone that initiated the call parking will start to ring If no one picks up the parked call or if the phone is off hook the parked call will be automatically disconnected QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 58 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The pickup user will be able to pick up the parked call from any destination by calling the extension where the call has been parked either by its PBX number or SIP address The authentication password will be prompted if configured of the call park extension in order to retrieve the parked call For example the Call Park extension 77 is created which has been registered on the SIP Server under the 892220 registration username The Quadro user is added to the Park Access List while the phone at the remote location is added to the Park Access List of that call park extension While being on a call with user A the Quadro user dials the appropriate calling code As a reply Quadro will play the extension 77 and SIP username 892220 to the Quadro user The user
86. on the following steps Bain Syriam Users Ceterences Telephony interme Lipa Heran k Firmware update The second page of Firmware update has a Browse button used to browse the image file and the Specify Image text field that will display the selected image fade fens ahaa i i EEKE filename w N ideta ladinageseleareDitSohoBayeLined Bape Pressing Save will start uploading the image file to the board and the next page will display results and verification of the image being burned Mem Systerm Users Confetences Telephon eeu Uplink Het work This page displays non editable information about the sass image validity The Image Check field will display invalid Firmware update if the image does not correspond to the hardware version The Current Software Version field shows the old software version The New Software Version field shows the new version of the software image This page needs to be confirmed in order to continue image updating If you are sure that the image version is appropriate for your device press Save Fig Il 50 Firmware Check page Firmware update If you have confirmed the firmware version a new page with firmware update progress will be displayed next There are no functions available on this page just information about the firmware update procedure At some point the connection with the device is being lost and you need to wait until the firmware will be burned on the Quadro You wil
87. only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error message will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error message Fig Il 83 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for pickup extension page will appear ee j The Edit Pickup Group link leads to the page where a list of monitored extensions can be defined QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 44 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus B g jg Fickup Group of Extension 112 The Pickup Group of Extension page lists all available regular and virtual extensions on the Quadro and allows you to manage the Pickup Group The Enable functional button is used to include the selected extension s to the Pickup Group of the corresponding pickup extension The extensions in the Pickup Group can be monitored by the pickup extension The calls addressed to the extensions in the Pickup Group can be answered by the pickup extension The Disable functional button is used to exclude the selected extension s from the Pickup Group of the corresponding pickup extension Fig Il 84 Pickup Group of Extension page The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for th
88. page The Call Detail column is present only in the Unsuccessful Calls table and indicates the reason why the call was unsuccessful The Filter performs a search procedure by the selected criteria The search may be done with several criteria at the same time The Download Call Statistics links are available below all Call Statistics tables and allows you to download the displayed call statistics in a text file To Enable Disable the Statistics 1 Enter the Call Statistics Settings page 2 Select or deselect the Enable Call Reporting checkbox to enable or disable statistics recording 3 If enabling the statistics the maximum number of records to be stored in the statistics table should be selected from the corresponding drop down lists 4 Press Save to apply the new configuration QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 74 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide To Filter the Statistics 1 Enter the desired criteria fields 2 Press the Filter button to search the call reports within the Call Statistics table Administrator s Menus Please Note To return to the complete Statistics Table clear all search criteria and press Filter To Reset the Statistics 1 Press the Clear All Records button in the Call Statistics Settings page 2 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes The call statistics will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the statistics information click on No RTP Statistics The RTP Statist
89. public key to secure your IPSec Connection The functionality of Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS can be added to both Following ways of automatic keying are available e Shared Secret is a type of password consisting of any characters that both of the IPSec Connection partners must know The authentication will be done with this shared secret All encryption functions below will remain concealed Please Note It is also not recommended to start multiple road warrior connections with the Shared Secret automatic keying selected For multiple road warriors to be started at the same time it is recommended to use RSA keying with Local ID and Remote ID fields configured e RSA requires the public RSA key of your IPSec Connection partner Please Note System prevents to start a connection with Shared Secret automatic keying selected if there is already a connection with RSA automatic keying started and vice versa The Local ID requires an IP address Quadro FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way Remote ID also requires an IP address the IPSec Connection partner s FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 116 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Local ID and Remote ID text fields may have the values in one of the form
90. registration on a SIP server gt To Uses Settings Registration Password is used to confirm the password If the r3 To Line Saninas entered password does not correspond to the one entered in the ennes anma a Password field the error message The passwords do not match Please try again will appear Fig Il 77 Extensions Management Edit Entry SIP Settings page SIP Server indicates the host address of the SIP server The field is not limited regarding symbol usage or length It can be either an IP address such as 192 168 0 26 or a host address such as sip epygi com SIP Port indicates the host port number to connect to the SIP server The SIP server port may only contain digit values otherwise the error message SIP Server Port is incorrect will be displayed when applying the extension settings If the SIP server port is not specified Quadro will access the SIP server through the default port 5060 Registration on SIP Server enables the SIP server registration option If the extension has already been registered on an SIP server its IP address will be displayed in brackets 3 SIP Advanced Settings This group is used to configure advanced SIP settings Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server settings and to define other SIP server specific settings The SIP Outbound proxy is an SIP server where all the SIP requests and other SIP messages are transferre
91. requires the IP address of the subsequent router for IP packet forwarding The PPTP L2TP Routes allow IP packets forwarding through the PPTP and L2TP tunnels of the Quadro If PPTP L2TP connections do not exist on Quadro VPN routes cannot be generated The PPTP L2TP Routes table displays all generated VPN routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet where the incoming packets should be routed Via Tunnel for the VPN tunnel incoming packets should be routed through and Tunnel State for the actual state of the route tunnel up or down The Add button opens the Add VPN Route page where a new VPN route can be generated The Add VPN Route page offers the following components Route Via contains the available PPTP and L2TP connections on the Quadro A connection selected from this list will be used to route the IP packet from the Quadro s LAN to the peer behind the PPTP L2TP tunnel Route To requires the IP address range of the possible peers behind the PPTP L2TP tunnel whereto the IP packets should be routed Administrator s Menus Main Syste Ue Caferences Tekapo itana plink Merweod hk IP Policy Routes Enas agate Baise Prionty Lawes Proy Adil Edit Die lage Sale baie EE sale Fig Il 32 IP Policy Routing table Man Sytem Uses Conferences Telephony tonel pins Nelwoth
92. result of an error condition TEI Request shows the number of packets containing TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier to initiate subscription of the device in the network Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of broadcast signaling packets received for call initiation and termination Exchange Identification shows the number of received packets containing connection management settings ISDN BRI Layer 2 Errors statistics Incorrect Length shows the number of packets with an incorrect length Bad Supervisory Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect supervisory header Bad Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered information frame header Bad Frame Type shows the number of packets with a bad frame type Bad Unnumbered Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered acknowledgement frame header Foreign TEI Value shows the number of packets with a bad or foreign TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier value ISDN BRI Layer 3 statistics Active Calls shows the number of currently active calls in the selected trunk Outgoing Calls shows the number of all outgoing calls in the selected trunk Incoming Calls shows the number of all incoming calls in the selected trunk ISDN trunk statistics are not displayed on this page at first but the page is automatically refreshed every 10 minutes Statistics collected from that time as well as the last resetting of the counter will be displayed
93. right below that field To achieve the well Fig Il 156 IP Line Settings page protected strong password minimum 8 characters of letters in upper and lower case symbols and numbers should be used Mam System Users Conferences Tetegtnouty Deiwel pare If you are unable to define a strong password press Choose Generated Password to use one of system defined strong IP Line Settings IP Line 1 passwords For automatic SIP phone configuration the SIP phone should be reset rebooted The appropriate configuration will then be automatically downloaded from Quadro to the SIP Phone Please Note For automatic configuration some SIP phones may require additional actions to follow the restart For example by default the IP Dialog SIP Tone II is in a non auto provisioning mode so it should be manually enabled on the phone Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding SIP phone for instructions on performing a factory ETA reset or reboot on any of the supported phones what additional lo we SS configurations are required for a specific SIP phone and how to pee Eeo B manipulate with the GUI Onc ao al The Use Session Timer enables the SIP session timer for the corresponding IP line This checkbox enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active F Ena ack r Fig Il 157 IP Line Edit page The Use Template
94. s PBX number for PSTN callers this is the caller s PSTN number e Full name the caller s full SIP address SIP username and the SIP server For PBX caller this is the caller s PBX number for PSTN callers this is the caller s PSTN number e Duration the voice mail duration e Date the date the voice mail was received To insert the predefined tag to the subject line you should simply click on the corresponding tag The following format should be maintained to create a flexible subject Example Voice mail received from VM_DISPNAME VM_DATE In this example all email subjects will contain a static text Voice mail received from following by the display name of the caller and the date voice mail is received FAX to E mail format drop down list is used to define the format of the FAX document received in the voice mail and to be attached to the email in case user has enabled Send new voice messages via e mail option from his personal Voice Mail Settings TIFF or PDF formats may be selected here Dial Plan Settings The Dial Plan Settings page is used to adjust the dialing timeout setting The Routing Dial Timeout setting specifies a period of time after the last dialed digit that the system identifies as a completion of dialing If the user does not press any key within the specified timeout the system assumes that the dialing is complete and starts calling the dialed number Only cpygi predefined values included in the dr
95. share the available PSTN lines The table on this page lists all registered accounts and account information It will show the corresponding authentication parameters username and password and date time of the last registration The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new account can be configured A Username and a Password is required for a new account on this page To use the shared remote PSTN lines 1 Enable the Use PSTN lines of the other device checkbox 2 Press Save to apply the selection 3 Enter the Authorization Parameters page 4 Create an account using a unique Username and a Password Gain Control The Gain Control settings are used to define transmit and receive gains For FXS lines Transmit Gain defines the phone speaker volume on the call Receive Gain defines the volume of the phone microphone on the call For FXO lines Transmit Gain defines the level of voice transmitted from Quadro to the FXO network Receive Gain defines the volume of voice received by Quadro from the FXO network For Voice Mail Recording Gain defines the volume of the phone microphone upon playing voice mails or system messages Playback Gain defines the phone speaker volume upon playing voice mails or system messages For Audio Lines Transmit Gain Line Out defines the level of voice transmitted from Quadro to the Audio Line Out port Receive Gain Line In defines the volume of voice receive
96. some data is encrypted with the remote party s public key They can be decrypting the data with their private key and the data encrypted there with Quadro s public key can be decrypted with Quadro s private key Since the private key is never transmitted it stays completely unknown to everyone thus the system remains safe Even if someone gets the public key decryption cannot be possible without the private key Quadro generates such a pair of keys automatically when it is set up The user cannot see the private key but must know the public key because their IPSec connection partner will need it Please Note A pair of keys will always be generated a public one and a private one The previously generated pair of keys will become invalid as well as all existing IPSec connections that use RSA keying The IPSec Configuration link refers to the page where IPSec connections can be created and managed The IPSec Configuration page consists of two sub pages Connection and RSA Key Management The Connection sub page provides an overview of all existing IPSec connections characterized by their Connection Name the Remote Gateway the IP address or the hostname of the IPSec connection partner the State of the IPSec connection Stopped Connecting Activated Waiting or Connected and the dedicated Keying Type the encryption type The content of the table can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the header of the respective column
97. the Play Hold Music Until Moderator is Connected checkbox selected participants connected to the conference will listen to the hold music unless moderator will join the conference Leave Active checkbox will keep conference active even if all participants have left it Recording Settings page The maximum duration of a conference recording can be optionally limited from the Participant Password can be entered to require a password for participant access to the conference It has to be entered twice for confirmation The password entered here should be used by the participant to join the conference The participant can participate in the conference only according to the rights speaker or listener granted by the moderator Max Duration sets the conference to be limited to a maximum duration in minutes Leave the field empty for unlimited conference duration With the Play Hold Music Until Moderator is Connected checkbox selected participants connected to the conference will listen to the hold music unless moderator will join the conference Leave Active checkbox will keep conference active even if all participants have left it Recording Settings page Conference recording can be manipulated either from the Conference Progress page or from the handset see Feature Codes If the Recording Indication is also enabled from the Recording Settings page voice announcements will be played in the conference to inform participants that the conferenc
98. the conference to which any low or high voices out of this range should be adjusted The fields may have values in a range between 50 and 0 dB QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Main Conference Conference Properties AGC Settings Conference ID 308 V Enable AGC Low Threshold 50 High Threshold 40 Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies epygi quadro Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 19 AGC Settings page 154 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement Appendix Software License Agreement EPYGI TECHNOLOGIES LTD Software License Agreement THIS IS A CONTRACT CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT USE OF THE QUADRO HARDWARE AND OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE PROGRAM INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU MAY NOT USE THE HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE 1 License Epygi Technologies Ltd the Licensor hereby grants to you a non exclusive right to use the Quadro Operational Software program the documentation for the software and such revisions for the software and documentation as the Licensor may make available to you from time to time collectively the Licensed Materials You may use the Licensed Materials only in connection with your operation of your Quadro You may not use copy modify or transfer the Licensed Materials in whole or in part except as expr
99. the created VoIP Carrier will be placed VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 1 provides a following option of describing the VoIP carrier When predefined carrier is selected in the VoIP Carrier drop down list the SIP Server and Port will be already predefined in the next page Manual selection allows you to manually set up the VoIP Carrier settings The Description field allows you to insert an optional description of the VoIP Carrier VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 2 is used to define VoIP Carrier Settings The page contains following components 1 VoIP Carrier Common Settings The Account Name text field requires a username for authentication on the defined SIP server The Password text field requires a password for authentication on the defined SIP server The Confirm Password text field requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error message Incorrect Password confirm will appear The SIP Server text field requires an IP address or the hostname of the SIP server destination party it is registered on The SIP Server Port text field requires the port number of the SIP server destination party it is registered on QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Main System Users Conferences Depi VolP Carrier Wizard Select VolP Carrer a ee ia TBO BACt Ure har ge 0 SS Lay Pe dee Lp Bid System Users Conberentes Felipiman VolP Carrler Wizard Vor
100. the single call recording for the selected Recording Box extension When the call reaches the selected duration the recording will be automatically stopped while the call will stay active Recording Announcement group allows updating the active recording announcement played in the call when call recording starts downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Play Announcement When Starting Recording checkbox is used to enable disable the announcement played during the call saying that the call recording starts When this checkbox is not selected the call recording will start silently without any notification Upload new recording announcement message indicates the file name used to upload a new recording announcement message The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new recording announcement message file The Download Recording Announcement Message and Remove Recording Announcement Message links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Recording Announcement Message
101. to another party that also acquires your Quadro 4x or any Quadro SIP Gateway product If you sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials you must at the same time transfer the documentation to the acquirer Also you cannot sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials to another party unless that party also agrees to the terms and conditions of this Agreement Except as expressly permitted by this section you may not transfer the Licensed Materials to a third party 6 Protection And Security Except as permitted under Section 5 of this Agreement you agree not to deliver or otherwise make available the Licensed Materials or any part thereof to any person other than the Licensor or its employees without the prior written consent of the Licensor You agree to use your best efforts and take all reasonable steps to safeguard the Licensed Materials to ensure that no unauthorized person shall have access thereto and that no unauthorized copy publication disclosure or distribution thereof in whole or in part in any form shall be made 7 Limited Warranty The only warranty the Licensor makes to you in connection with this license is that the media on which the Licensed Materials are recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from the date of purchase the Warranty Period If you determine within the Warranty Period that the media on which the Licensed Materials are recorded are
102. used to define a list of extensions that are allowed to park the call to the corresponding call park extension Wildcard is supported in the Address field to add a group of extensions with one entry If the extension is not in the Park Access List for the corresponding call park extension it will not be able to park a call to this call park extension eI By default this table contains a entry which allows any PBX users to park the call to this extension Attention If you modify the Park Access List by adding new extensions do not forget to remove the default entry from the list for the new configuration to take effect 3 Retrieve Access List This page is used to define a list of callers that are allowed to retrieve a call parked to the corresponding call park extension If the caller is not in the Retrieve Access List for the corresponding call park extension it will not be able to pickup a call parked to this call park extension By default this table contains an Auto entry which allows any caller to pickup the call parked to this extension Attention If you modify the Retrieve Access List by adding new callers do not forget to remove the default Auto entry from the list for the new configuration to take effect The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new caller can be added to the list This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the available ca
103. which can be any device or application that has audio recording capabilities The SIP Address of the remote destination where the recorded conference will be stored is required to be defined for this selection Optionally the SIP address of a user can be inserted here In this case the conference will be recorded to the private mailbox of the user or will be directly played to him if he answers the incoming call Enable Recording Use Internal Storage wax Recording Time imin Use External Storage Recording SIP Address Recording Indication Cl Start Recording Automatically Copyright Cy 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 10 Recording Settings page Recording Indication selection enables voice announcements played in the conference to inform participants that the conference recording is started stopped paused or resumed When the Start Recording Automatically checkbox is selected the conference recording will start automatically as soon as the corresponding conference is activated Customization The Customization page is used to manage the voice prompts played during an active conference The page offers the following options When the Play First in Conference message checkbox is selected the system will play a You are the first participant in the conference notification message informing you that no more participants are yet connected Welcome Message parameters grou
104. 2 General ATOMA ON esso N E E E 12 NGENWOFK STATU fee ee E EEEE EEE ee EEEE EE eee eee 13 Lines StatuS ssssssssusrrrsrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrstrrretnrrr errin str rr errr re rnr r ArESAAEESEAEEEEAEEESEAEESENEEEEAEENOAEENSEAENESPAEEESEEEOEEEEEE EEEE REENE EnEn 14 MEMON o US a a EEE E E AA AA AEE AAEE AEE ee ee E AE EEEE 17 A ome E a E rer eT rer rr rere rrr TTT 18 Ol REGIS UrarlON Sl aCUS 5 2552 gacesceeeeeceseeseeceeneereeeeesauaaueaeeseaeueceusnccengscosecsuaseosvesuseeussecyescssuceuiesiaeeaeenes eneeeseeneeumeseeeane 18 IP Lines Registration foes 10 en nn en nr en nee Tent a a ne ee ere 18 License StatuS sssssssrsusrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrsrrrretrrrr trti e trr t rnr rt rnrn rrrEESEAEESEAEEEOAEEESEAEESENEEEEREENOAEENSEAENEESAEEESEEEESEEEEEEEEEEE REENE EE EEnt 19 P ROUNDO ON TUT A Oe iiei EEO EEA AAAA AA AAAA AEAN EANA EANET ANEAN EA EEE AAA NAANA RENAA 19 Connouration M nagenmnent eassrirrrsrisisis ia O A aa 21 Legible Configuration IVAN SIMS eters at hats ne cede eua dadada E 22 eee eh E rss a ines 23 To DoE a E a E E E E E E E E E E EE ee EE EES 26 Ka eTR e A EE AAEE E AE EE E E E E ENE E E E ada eee E EEE 26 SM E S E a A A Caer ne ee 27 PUTON a e U E E E E E 28 Automatic Firmware Update sssrsssrrrrsrrrrerrrrrsrrrstrrrstnrrrt rriro trnto EE DDE E EEE SDE E EEE EEE EE EEE EE EE SEES EEE SSDS EEE ESSE E EEE ESSERE EEE SEES 29 iovelelg TO FOO EEE E ee ee ee 30 poi Ll gale 2 9 e Pr re rn eee ene errr ere eee er one ee 31 B
105. 26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus Man Siem lhe Confeencen THaphomy Aa ved Pie igen Herak Quadro Status Lines Status Limi 1 Ba Site Uie Conenemcen Telepn Bierre ipini feel ere Quadro Status Lines Status Lire Lines Slates Fig Il 18 Quadro Status Lines Status 15 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Lines Status table of any shared FXO Line on the Quadro provides information about the Allowed Call Types the extension number attendant or routing client to whom the Incoming Call is Routed To and the State of the line Free or Busy The FXO Channel Usage Statistics link is only present for local FXO lines this option is not available for shared FXO lines and leads to the page where diagram chart of FXO lines usage can be viewed Man Syam Users Conferences T ebojsdrorry Administrator s Menus befor tvet Uptrd Netwoth Quadro Status Lines Status Fig Il 19 Line Status FXO Status page The FXO Channel Usage Statistics page consists of following components used to define the chart parameters Trunk checkboxes are used to select the FXO line number s over which the FXO traffic chart will be built At least one Trunk checkbox should be selected otherwise error message appears Time range of statistic table drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram chart that is to be built Incoming
106. 26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Number of Records displays the current number of statistics entries in the table For successful calls Total Duration Maximum Duration Average Duration and Minimum Duration statistics are displayed on top of the table The Call Statistics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls pages consist of the general information on successful missed and unsuccessful calls search fields and the calls table The search components are as follows From and To text fields are used to search by date and time The data must be entered in either of the following formats dd mm yyyy hh mm ss or dd Mon yyyy hh mm ss The time criteria are optional From requires an earlier date and time than the To field If the entered data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal date should be less than maximal date prevents statistics filtering From and To drop down lists are used to search by duration The duration has to be selected from the list of values From field must indicate a shorter duration than the To field If the inserted data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal duration should be less than maximal duration prevents statistics filtering Calling Phone and Called Phone respectively require the caller and called party s SIP address see chapter Entering SIP Addresses Correctly extension or PSTN number as search criteri
107. 6 24 G726 32 G726 40 G729a iLBC enabled H 263 and H 264 disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled SRTP Policy Accept anything Attendant 00 Settings Codecs Universal Extension Recordings Default Percentage of System Memory 1 Receptionist Management No entries Extension Directory No entries Authorized Phones Database No entries ACD Management Undefined Conference Management and Mail Feature is disabled by default Default Settings Enabled 100 entries for all type of calls Automatic Downloading of Call Statistics disabled UDP and TCP Port 5060 TSL Port undefined Realm quadro SIP Settings session Timer disabled DNS Server for SIP default SIP timers RFC 3261 Host Aliases for SIP undefined Properties for all Codecs except iLBC Packetization 20ms Silence Suppression yes iLBC properties RTP Settings Packetization 30ms Silence Suppression yes G 726 Standard ITU T specification RTP RTCP port range 6000 6255 RTCP Support disabled NAT Traversal for SIP Automatic SIP and RTP Parameters Use STUN SIP TCP Port 5060 STUN Parameters Primary STUN Server stun epygi com Primary STUN Port 3478 Secondary STUN Server undefined Secondary STUN Port undefined Polling Interval 1 hour
108. Administrator s Menus Throughout this guide you will see a variety of recurrent buttons Below is a description of these buttons Button Description This button leads back to the previous page of a fixed sequence of pages used mainly in wizards Previous This button leads forward to the next page of a fixed sequence of pages used mainly in wizards Cancel This button discards the latest not yet This is the last button of a fixed sequence of pages that completes and saves the entries of an entire sequence This button opens the help page belonging to the currently active Quadro management page This button opens a window where the last inserted IP addresses are listed It allows the user to make a quick selection of an IP address that has been previously used This will avoid the user needing type it again The clipboard can hold up to 10 IP addresses and a new IP address will replace the oldest one from the list IP Clipboard Recurrent Functional Buttons Button Description This button returns you to the page you were previously on This button confirms an operation you started before This button confirms an operation you chose before This button discards an operation you chose before This button saves the settings modified on the currently active management page This button opens a window where the last inserted SIP addresses are listed It allows the user to make a quick sel
109. Agreement It is understood that this Agreement along with the Quadro Installation Guide and User s Manual constitute the complete and exclusive agreement between you and the Licensor and supersede any proposal or prior agreement or license oral or written and any other communications related to the subject matter hereof If one or more of the provisions of this Agreement is found to be illegal or unenforceable this Agreement shall not be rendered inoperative but the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect No Waiver Failure by either you or the Licensor to enforce any of the provisions of this Agreement or any rights with respect hereto shall in no way be considered to be a waiver of such provisions or rights or to in any way affect the validity of this Agreement If one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement are found to be invalid or unenforceable in any respect the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of Texas without regard to choice of law provisions that would cause the application of the law of another jurisdiction Attorneys Fees In the event of any litigation or other dispute arising as a result of or by reason of this Agreement the prevailing party in any such litigation or other dispute shall be entitled to in addition to any other damages assessed i
110. Codec Parameters 1 Select the codec from the Codecs Table that is to be edited 2 Press the Edit button on the RTP Settings page The Edit Entry page will appear in the browser window 3 Change values in Packetization Interval and or enable disable Silence Suppression 4 To save the codec settings press Save or to keep the initial data click Back QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 78 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus NAT Traversal Settings The NAT Traversal Settings page is divided into separate pages used to configure General NAT settings SIP NAT parameters RTP and STUN parameters for NAT and a page where the NAT Exclusion table may be filled The General Settings page consists of a manipulation radio buttons group to select the mode of the NAT Traversal usage for the SIP traffic any incoming and outgoing SIP messages from and to the Quadro will be routed through the NAT PC Tm he E Man Sen Wes Conferences Telephony Heber peed Uplink Aelwok Py amp l Ti dabh HAT Traversal Settings e Automatic with this selection system will analyze the Quadro s WAN IP address and if it is in the IP range specified for local networks according to RFC the SIP traffic will be routed through NAT Otherwise if Quadro s WAN IP address is outside the specified IP range no SIP traffic will be routed through NAT server Gomi kanik GP Parameters EIE Paamiut SIUN Pami MAL Recor
111. DN Status Trunk 1 Link displays the ISDN link state up or down Frame Synchronization displays the signal synchronization state in the trunk Yes or No HDLC Receive shows the number of packets received in HDLC High level Data Link Control format HDLC CRC Error shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check errors HDLC Packet Abort displays the number of received aborted packets HDLC Transmit displays the number of packets transmitted in HDLC format HDLC Octet Count displays the number of error packets received in HDLC format The following SDN BRI Layer 2 statistics are displayed for received and transmitted packets TEI value shows the actual TEI value L2 State shows the actual BRI L2 state Information Frame shows the number of signaling packets for call initiation and termination Receive Ready displays the number of controlling packets while the ISDN link is up Receive Not Ready displays the number of controlling packets in case of inability to accept calls by destination i i Fig Il 173 ISDN Trunk Status page SABME shows the number of packets upon connection establishment Disconnected Mode shows the number of packets when the connection is being disconnected Disconnect shows the number of packets upon connection termination Unnumbered Acknowledgement shows the number of packets upon accepting connection establishment termination Framer shows the number of packets as a
112. G OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED MATERIALS EVEN IF THE LICENSOR OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES YOU AGREE THAT YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S ENTIRE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSED MATERIALS SHALL BE AS SET FORTH HEREIN AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR LOSS TO YOU EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE LICENSE MATERIALS The foregoing limitation exclusion and disclaimers apply to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 155 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement 9 10 11 12 13 14 Compliance With Laws You may not use the Licensed Materials for any illegal purpose or in any manner that violates applicable domestic or foreign law You are responsible for compliance with all domestic and foreign laws governing Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP calls U S Government Restricted Rights The Licensed Materials are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 C F R section 52 227 19 or subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 as applicable Entire
113. ID Standard 2 FSK for all lines Ringer type Type A for all lines Busy Tone and Power Disconnect indications disabled for all lines Off hook caller ID disabled for all lines Hot Desking Capability disabled for all lines IP Lines Configuration Enable PnP for IP lines enabled Enable firmware version control enabled Configure IP phones from WAN Phones Default Template systemdefault IP Phone Templates no custom templates IP Phone Logo disabled no custom logos uploaded FXS Gateway Management undefined IP Lines 1 16 enabled IP Lines 17 80 disabled 1 80 IP Lines attached to 127 206 extensions All IP lines are in inactive mode Disabled IP lines displayed FXS Lines Loopback Settings Loopback is disabled for all FXS lines Loopback timeout is 30 8 FXO lines all lines enabled incoming and outgoing calls allowed and routed to 00 Attendant on all lines No shared trunks available Use PSTN lines of the other device disabled Authorization Parameters undefined FXS lines Transmit Gain 6 Receive Gain 0 FXO lines Transmit Gain 6 Receive Gain 0 Voice Mail Recording Gain 0 Playback Gain 0 Audio Lines Transmit Gain 0 Receive Gain 0 Enable Tunnels to Slave Devices disabled Tunnels to Slave Devices no entries Enable Tunnels to Master Devices disabled Tunnels to Master Devices no entries Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing dis
114. IP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will resume being sent to it Extensions Management Edit Entry SIP Advanced Settings 11 The RTP Priority Level drop down list is used to select the IP Aan hebnces Settings priority low medium or high of the RTP packets sent from a Remete Srana A EE corresponding extension RTP packets with higher priority will be e ae eens sent first in case of heavy traffic Lessin ON L The Do Not Use SIP Old Hold Method checkbox enables the 7 bo Not Use SIP Gla Hold mimoa new recommended method of call hold in SIP in which case the Gebound Prey hold request is indicated with the a sendonly media attribute Se rather than with the IP address of 0 0 0 0 used before The n ane Socomlay SIP Server checkbox should be enabled if the remote party does not recognize hold requests initiated from the Quadro Host adds Cutheand Prony tor Secondary SIP Sarve A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively require the host address IP address or the host name and the port numbers of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers Host address BID Ba Sng Oo Poel Soa Capyrighatty 2000 OR Epes Tepe jy All righi reared Fig Il 78 Extensions Management Edit Entry Advanced SIP S
115. LAN Derived from Microsoft s Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP and Cisco s Layer 2 Forwarding L2F technology L2TP encapsulates PPP frames into IP packets either at the remote user s PC or at an ISP that has an L2TP remote access concentrator LAC The LAC transmits the L2TP packets over the network to the L2TP network server LNS at the corporate side Large carriers also may use L2TP to offer remote POPs to smaller ISPs Users at the remote locations dial into the modem pool of an L2TP access concentrator which forwards the L2TP traffic over the Internet or private network to the L2TP servers at the ISP side which then sends them on to the Internet For PPTP and L2TP Connections two parties are required a Client and a Server The client is responsible for establishing the connection The server is waiting for clients it is not able to initiate the connection itself Attention L2TP tunnels have no data encryption mechanism The Host Name and a Password specify each side The client should know the server s name and password the Quadro server has no password and the server should set the client s host name and a password The client and server settings have to match on both sides for successful connection establishment Clients and Servers are identified by their hostnames which means that only one client can be connected to the server in the same network Servers also define the range of IP addresses that are assigned to the Server an
116. M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus x r Main Systeam Uses Coerentes Tik Waters t piik Hetit Cak HY HI Event Settings Gii tiii Cit Select all hrei ie Section Numerous circumstances may cause a certain application on Quadro to flag an event The Event Settings page lists all possible events on the Quadro and allows controlling notification action when an event takes place Each entry in the events table has a checkbox assigned to each row By selecting the corresponding checkboxes operations such as Edit may be done for one or more events Edit opens the Edit Event Settings page to modify the event acon Fig Il 42 Event Configuration Settings page ION The Edit Event Settings page offers the following input options Mam System Users Conferences Telephony internet Uplink Meterai epygi Application displays the application the event refers to Multiple o is shown here if more than one event has been selected for the action assignment Edit Event Settings Name displays the name of the event Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been selected for the action assignment Description displays additional information about the event Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been selected for the action assignment Save Back Help Action offers radio buttons to choose one of the actions to notify the Quadro administrator when an event s takes place The followin
117. MF will not display caller ID To Configure the Line Settings Select the line number that should to be configured from the Active Lines column in the Lines table on the Line Settings page Press on the line number link in the Line Settings table The Line Settings Line page will appear in the browser window Use the Caller ID drop down list to select the caller ID detection system mode corresponding to the phone type Enable the Dialing Prefix With Caller ID checkbox if needed Configure the Remote Party Disconnect Indication parameters by selecting the corresponding checkboxes Define a Ringer Type from the corresponding drop down list Enable Off hook Caller ID if needed Press the Save button on the Line Settings Line page to save the caller ID system and other line specific configuration settings lal he dl ial aloe IP Line Settings The IP Line Settings page is used to configure IP lines for IP phones to be connected to the Quadro Quadro provides the options to connect SIP phones to its LAN side assign the corresponding IP line to an active extension and use SIP phones as a simple phone with all telephony services of the Quadro for example call hold waiting transfer etc 32 IP Lines are available on the QuadroM8L by default 16 IP Lines are available on the QuadroM26x by default The IP Lines Settings page displays a table with the available IP lines on the Quadro Entering the feature key in the Features page can enable mo
118. Management Edit Entry General Settings page for Recording Box extension Password requires a password for the Recording Box extension QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 51 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered the Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc The Percentage of Total Memory drop down list allows you to select the space for call recordings and the uploaded custom messages of Recording Box extension The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro i epygi Bia Syste
119. P session timer for the IP lines specified in the Attached IP Lines text field This checkbox enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The Use Kickback checkbox enables the kickback service on the corresponding receptionist When this service is enabled if receptionist transfers the incoming calls to the extension and if there is no answer or if the called extension is busy on another call the call is returned to the receptionist s phone instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer or busy the call will automatically get back to the receptionist When this service is not enabled the incoming call will reach the Voice Mail Service or the call queue of the called extension depending on the extension user s configuration aT yi T j Man Semn Uses Conferences Telephony Iben met Uplink CACT Py gl Pia dis a Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules If you have selected the 55i 57i Snom 360 or Grandstream GXP2000 IP phones from the Phone Model drop down list the next page in the wizard will be the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules For all other phone models this page is skipped For Snom 360 and Grandstream GXP2000 IP phones this page contai
120. PrkAn Ext or a PrkAns Ext watch the calls parked to the n Ba 11138 A corresponding extensions and a possibility to Weich Ext 11151 M x retrieve the calls parked to that extension ae y This list also contains a number of PBX services available a n 3 on the Quadro and accessible with the key combination Cem Ca see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this Jesraniicraecs2000 Errai tashnatesini Ley Al nipt neseren page the key combinations become transparent for the IP Fig Il 158 Programmable Keys Configuration page the preview is individual for different IP phone model phones too e Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call CallBack calls back to the last caller Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro CallBlk blocks the last caller Record records the call in case if the manual call recording is allowed for the call configured from Call Recording Settings ACD Login Logout allows the corresponding ACD agent to login to all groups it is involved in if previously logged in to log out from those groups For details on ACD functionality see ACD Management Please N
121. QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Quadro The Global Phone Network in a Box epygi CPYS soo me Administrator s Guide for QuadroM8L and QuadroM26x Edition 1 June 2010 SW Release 5 2 7 and higher QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Table of Contents Manual see Installation Guide Step by step guide to install and configure Quadro basically Manual II Administrator s Guide ADOLE LAMIN ar S GUE eean E cesta cease case aye E E eae 4 gu uadro s Graphical IMCS aCE srisiseisoreniersernien i iier ieioea e aeaaeai ar eea 5 Administrators Main Padesan EAE E ee ee ee eet 5 Pa Ur NS ae ae E AA AAAA AAAA AA E EEEE EAE EE EE EA 6 Recurrent Functional ButtonS sssssssssrsssrrrsrrrrerrrrrerrrrotrrrrt rrit t rriro EEE rr rrr rnnr r nAErSEAEESEAEEEOAEEEEEAEEESEAEEEOEEESEEEEEE NEEESE EEEE EEE 6 BPM UN CS SS CONE Cy irii aa AAEE EEEE EEEE E acute a eerueo 6 AUMAR Sa Or MENU eene ei Bire E a ANAE E E NS E EEE EEEE A EEE a aE ra a 7 Sy em MONU serieren E E EEN TEE 7 oh ET E A N a aaa AA EAE mare A AEAEE E E E E E AA 7 internet Configuration Wizard cc nt cinsin E E E dacdadadaadanadcwan 9 Automatic Provo NINO Ee te nn nn ee ee ee EEEE E 10 Needed Bandwidth for IP Call Sirciicicccuvedencceuusdetelatenndusednecterstaaedeeniountenndaesionsdeseassdaoassondearienseepiaesanesteustaasincsdeustiancdar 11 PECUNIA a E eee er eee pete E ee EE 11 BUS ATNA eet ae E mmo wm om wm A E E E E EEEE em E A A A 1
122. Routing Wizard Characters 0 9 A Z a Z _ amp Q Please Note The symbols and should be prefixed with a slash if they are used as ordinary characters otherwise the system will interpret them as wildcards Please Note The symbols and are used to define a range of characters and cannot be used as ordinary characters Wildcards Any number of any characters Any single character A character or a string from the specified set of characters and strings The following control symbols are used to specify a set Use a comma to separate the elements of a set Please Note No spaces are allowed within braces Example The pattern is 9 1 3 11 a Numbers matching the pattern are 91 93 911 9a e Use a minus sign to specify a range of characters Each successive element of the range is obtained by increasing the previous element the element code by one Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2145 2155 2a5 2b5 2c5 2d5 Use an exclamation point to exclude a character or a string from a set Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 14 c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2155 2a5 2b5 2d5 Please Note You can use the wildcard within the braces but not Thus 12 104 15 36 is a valid pattern whereas 15 36 is not Please Note The symbol cannot be used to exclude a range of symbol
123. S N E aaa areca oe steno mt chen toe parte alae uae EE E E E en E E E E ead EES E NE TE E O E E E T 32 o eN LOO mona EEEE EEE eee eee eee 32 FS MN SS tt sete tea as a eae asd as al as el eee ec dec dec dea cece ce nnr RrEREERRERAERAEREERANNASaASaAcancanoancancnansancansancannnnnnnn 34 UPa lie ye le 0E ars el aetna ee erence EEKE E nee ere en ee N ESEE E TE ee ee ee ree cere A 34 Update Languages for IP PHONCS sce cisccecaccdcscacccdeennaencauanseasccacncauasanacasassoncacaeasaseencass sean sane seensaanesseteaneaeseasaseuasaeaeauaea 35 U EFRON Maltad Gil G ats 2ce2ssececeeereveescesqenecceensesaeseecauauqeees saunas cesaeeseeseesarseuesucceecsaescosuceussceecneasgeeeeeauecesaecseeeessaeaeesees 35 SCS EEEE E ass 37 Sae ea AE e E E ere E E te EE E EE E E ee EE E E 37 oeer EN Omo e NO a EAEE AA ENEE EE ENEE E eee ere E AA 39 Pickup Gro p Extension Settings oessa ATREA O A AAA AAA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA NEEE 44 GEPC EXEN TO NC S e E E EEA 45 Paging Group Extension SettingS ssssrsssrrrrsrrrrsrrrnrrrrrerrrrstrrrrt rrit trr EE EE EERE EEE r EERE EEE ESSE DEES EE EE DEES EE SSE DEE EEE ESSERE EEE SEES 47 ACO Gru E dela ON gt 86 g eee eT ee ee ee 49 Recording Box Extension SUNS ca aaa cei ie ee ci ace ea oe eared Ana E NEEE EEEE EE A 51 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide ARtendant Exton ion SeN so cs or pee ee ES E se cctuce ceeeenieouce oc queese A 54 Ada MuMipIe mp 40 10 coe hehe hc rh tee en nen nr nent ene te t
124. STN and IP networks It is not valid for PBX calls With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding auto attendant extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if this auto attendant extension is reserved or not used The Percentage of System Memory drop down list is used to define the space for the Auto Attendants system messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro 2 Attendant Scenario This group is used to select between default and custom attendant functionality scenarios When the Default scenario is selected a group of settings should be adjusted Here the user defined Auto Attendant system messages can be uploaded and the list of Friendly Phones can be configured For Custom scenario a scenario script file in EpygiXML coding the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support should be defined and the custom voice messages can be uploaded The Default manipulation radio button selection enables the following components The Send AA Digits to Routing Table checkbox selection switches the Auto Attendant to the routing
125. See eee TE phone is unregistered incoming calls will be routed to the line nasil extension it is attached to When this checkbox is not selected all incoming calls will be routed to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise if the remote SIP phone is unregistered calls will be forwarded to the extension s voice mailbox Extensions Management Edit Entry The Symmetric RTP checkbox should be selected when the remote extension is located behind the symmetrical NAT Fig Il 79 Extensions Management Edit Entry Remote Settings page The Show Hot Desking Settings and Hide Hot Desking Settings links are correspondingly used to show or hide the Hot Desking settings on this page The Enable Hot Desking Capability checkbox is used to enable the Hot Desking feature on the corresponding remote extension The Hot Desking Automatic Logout section is used to configure Hot Desking functionality expiration on the corresponding extension This may be useful when someone who logged in to the public phone with this extension forgot to log out after using it With this option enabled once the expiration time arrives the extension will automatically log out from the public phone The following options are available e Never the extension will never expire and will remain logged in to the public phone e After the defined period of time requires the period after which the extension will automatically log out from the p
126. Settings functional link restores the default signaling settings of the selected ISDN trunk s Fig Il 168 ISDN Settings page Clicking on the corresponding ISDN trunk will lead to the ISDN wizard where trunk s ISDN signaling settings can be configured The ISDN Wizard consists of several pages The ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings allows you to choose the interface type and the connection type of the selected trunk s The Interface Type drop down list allows you to select between the User and the Network interfaces If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the CO then User interface type should be selected If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the PBX then Network interface type should be selected in that case Quadro acts as a CO for that PBX QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 89 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Main Syme Unsere Conferences Talapleanmy kaana Up nk Hetwark epy i T Nr qerimi The Connection Type manipulation radio button group allows you to choose the connection type for the selected trunk s e PTP Point to Point In case of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if only Quadro is connected to the ISDN trunk from CO no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from CO besides the Quadro In case of connection to the PBX Network interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if
127. TP GET Request radio button will switch to the custom settings of the DynDNS service Normally the DynDNS provider uses HTTP get requests to map dynamic IP addresses to host names If the HTTP receive request is known to you choose the Create Custom HTTP GET Request radio button and enter the appropriate value into the URL text field The selection enables the following optional settings The URL text field requires the complete request to be sent to the DynDNS server Normally it has the following format http www server domain port scriptpath scriptname param1 value1 amp param2 value2 The request modifies the nameserver database so that the hostname will be resolved to the new IP address The Basic Authentication checkbox enables the encoding of the username and password entered in the text fields above and then uses the Basic Authentication method to notify the provider about the user authentication settings Most of the DynDNS providers require an authentication for security Authentication parameters can be provided in the URL text field to be used for the HTTP get request The Basic Authentication checkbox can be selected if no authentication parameters to be provided Firewall and NAT The Firewall Configuration page allows setting up a firewall configuring the security level and enabling the NAT and IDS services of Quadro A Firewall is a security service configured by the Quadro administrator based on various criteria The firewall a
128. Telaplecery internet Uplink Matwork FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard FXS Gateway Model Add functional button opens FXS Gateway Management Wizard where new FXS Gateway should be defined The FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard FXS Gateway Model page contains following components e The FXS Gateway Model drop down list is used to select the FXS Gateway model to be used as an FXS expansion device e The MAC Address text fields require the MAC Address of the FXS Gateway Based on the selected FXS Gateway model and the inserted MAC Address the FXS Gateway can be automatically configured by simple reset reboot FXS Gateway Modal Epygi OuadroFXS 16 Fig Il 163 FXS Gateway Management Wizard page 1 e The Description text field requires the description of the FXS Gateway to be configured Main System Users Conderences Telephony liter net Upank Met rvoth FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard The next page of the wizard is FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard FXS Gateway Lines This page displays a list of FXS lines provided by the FXS Gateway and is used to assign each ee FXS line to an IP line on the Quadro IP PBX System will ee automatically assign the provided FXS lines to the first available IP lines on the Quadro IP PBX You may adjust the configuration Coat from this page denies A Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 Line 13 Line 14 Line 15 Line 16 FXS Gatew
129. The FAX statistics is not available for the FAX transmitted with other protocols SIP Settings Man System Users Conferences FAX Statistics Teleptentry Bates tert Uplink Netevoth Fig Il 142 FAX Statistics page The SIP Settings provide information on the SIP receive UDP and TCP ports and allows you to select DNS server configurations for SIP and the SIP timers scheme The UDP Port indicates the SIP UDP User Datagram Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used The SIP UDP port cannot be in the selected RTP RTCP port range for FXS and IP lines see RIP Settings otherwise the Mapped port for SIP shouldn t be in RTP port range error message appears The TCP Port indicates the SIP TCP Transmission Control Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used Please Note Quadro will not use TCP protocol as a transport for SIP messages if the TCP Port field is left empty The TLS Port indicates the SIP TLS Transport Layer Security receive port number By default TLS port is not used and is empty coded to 0 TLS port number should be different from the TCP Port number The Reaml text field requires messaging level information to be included in SIP messages sent by Quadro This information might be used by remote side for authentication purposes Gipi Main Syaem Users Conferences Tokphony SIP Settings UO Pot 3095 TOP Pat 3060 TLE Pot 1314 Ripaim quadrime
130. The appropriate Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding rules that should be deleted from the rules table Press Select all if all rules should to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the Filtering Rules page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel by clicking on No Service Pool The Service Pool table is a list of all created services and their parameters It is used to add new services with the appropriate settings protocol type and port range New services can be used to add a restriction or permission by defining a new filtering rule with the following Main System Users Conferences lebepliany Wtetined Uplink Aetataik Add opens the Add New Service page where new services may SRIVIEE FOOL CONEGUTEON be added it a_i Set eae Sts Edit opens the Edit Service page where the service parameters except for the service name can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add New Service page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear Fig Il 225 Service Pool page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 124 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Add page is used to add new services and includes the following text fields and buttons Service Name requires a name for the service that should be added Protocol includes a list of possible pro
131. Transfer Quadro allows the receptionist or extension user to forward incoming calls directly to the voice mail of the other attached extension To do so an appropriate routing pattern should be added to the Call Routing table Hence when transferring a call to the assigned extension incoming call will directly go to the extension s voice mailbox Multi Company Receptionist Quadro provides the possibility to use a single IP phone to manage the receptionist s features for multiple companies at the same time To do so the incoming line appearance for the phone should be created attached to the IP line of the IP phone and be labeled to the corresponding company name Being busy with a call related to one company the receptionist is able to also receive the calls related to other companies While calls are QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 61 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ringing in the background the receptionist can switch between the incoming calls If the receptionist does not answer the incoming calls and if the Call Queue service is enabled on the extensions the incoming calls will be stored in the queue specific for each company line Man Synem Users Ceafarances Telepi bhnam Link hetrik Receptionist Managment Add Ein Delete Sakdal linetise micii The Receptionist Management page allows you to configure IP phones to be used as a receptionist on the Quadro This page contains the list o
132. USS freee pete gs oe sone cece cada cone ttcueesacaausatesesasaun sees seeneessoeeceues soceeueseeceeueeiecacs sages caeuee seaecaue coeatneueesecedenausaes 122 CO ON acacia ese ce es tee EEEE aceneoneenais sae euseaaeiaes 124 WP POO lias sesso acute sian siea niet se ie deeddadenndediaaauaaalaadiaddedatadadananatacetadaannents A E 125 DS Mara acacia E i artes beg ee ted ded tee E a anc ceo leuedp ded ae daas ded Va ded EA 127 EO MOM reer tenet ccedaceu sec enaweueceesneuee E E E ees aeseeeceasas 128 ON CRS orcs eee tsee cee saedueceseeeuueee E E EEE E E E E 128 DNS Server SENOS errira ENEO AEA E A LE NRA EEEE ERR 128 DACP SetHngs Tor NC LAN WS Ga Say ste a ee aN EE EE EN D i aa a aa E REEN 129 DACP Advan ca SeN eea a EEEE cag oosesesaseosee es 130 DHCP Settings Tor The VLAN I CSCS cierras naana E OANE AAAA E E 130 Redi Maon FOTIT seedi A E EEE R R eee ee Te 131 Admin rotors Additional Features ete re heer T rr Terr er er rr enn EEE ee ee ee ee ee 132 incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking seriiirririierirrrrvvrreviiriiiiriii detected EEEE ENEE ENERE EEE UEV EU EEK 132 VOE Ma BB ss os epee nn enn en vr A E ee ee ee 132 LOG OU rere cent ese se st etesateuseseseussanseseeesecenanasetaseneeaeeaseease case ss st eaes sea en sn esanenanen seen seenscenseensae ress Dusteuseeusesuaeeeseeaaeeeseeseeeseees 134 Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator aiid dcc viadedstsdeden veers teweeasevaew areca en earners ear eeaee Cx cece e sence
133. Upload new call queue message allows updating the active call queue message played when a caller is being held in the queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Browse buttons open the file chooser window to browse for a new Call Queue welcome message file The uploaded files should to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension which will cause the You do not have enough space warning message QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 42 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide 6 Voice Mailbox Settings This group is used to configure voice mailbox storage and consists of a group of manipulation radio buttons to define the location where voice mails will be collected Disable Voice Mail disables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension With this
134. a Wildcard symbols are allowed here The Call Statistics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls tables are lists of successful missed and unsuccessful incoming and outgoing calls and their parameters Call Start Time Call Duration Call destinations Each column heading in the tables is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column Upon sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed close to the column heading Fig Il 139 Call Statistics page The Details column is only present in Successful Calls table and provides the following information e Brief information about the call quality voice codec used to receive and transmit packets and the close call reason The close call reason appears to provide more information about the call termination reason which can be a network problem termination by one of the call parties voice mail service activation etc Clicking on the details information will open the RIP Statistics page where all RTP parameters of established call are provided e Authenticated By information about the callers that passed an authentication on the Quadro as configured in the Local AAA Table see Call Routing e Information about FAX statistics for the calls that have a FAX transmission handled It only appears when there was a FAX transmission during the call Clicking on the FAX link in the Details column will move to the FAX Statistics
135. a new extension number If non digit symbols have been entered the error Incorrect Extension no symbol characters allowed will appear If an extension with the same number already exists in the Extensions Management table the error Extension already exists will appear Extensions Management Add Entry Edeka 124 Tyne Jer Extension w om peri pr a a Et See eA nig ieee Fig Il 73 Extensions Management Add Entry page Please Note Extension number cannot start with the digits 0 You can add extensions of up to 20 digits long However the Call Routing won t be adjusted automatically you may need to manually adjust the routing rules for extensions in custom length The Type drop down list is used to select the type of the extension to be created for details see below The following values are available in this list e Attendant e User Extension Pickup Group Call Park Paging Group QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 38 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e ACD Group if this feature is previously activated from Features page 6 Recording Box if the Call Recording Settings feature is previously activated from Features page Edit opens the Edit Entry page where a newly created user or attendant extension settings might be adjusted To operate with Edit one or more record s have to be selected otherwise the No records selected error message will ap
136. able lists the IP lines and remote extensions registered on the Quadro The table indicates the actual IP addresses of the remote devices the usernames by which the devices have been registered on the Quadro as well as the registration status information The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices and SIP Tunnels to Master Devices tables list the SIP tunnels between local and the remote Quadros see SIP Tunnel Settings The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a master The SIP Tunnels to Master Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a slave IP Lines Registration Status The IP Lines Registration Status displays a table with the IP Lines registration information on the Quadro The table lists the IP lines and remote extensions registered on the Quadro The table indicates the actual IP addresses of the remote devices the usernames by which the devices have been registered on the Quadro as well as the registration status information Subscription Count field indicates used and allowed number of subscriptions for all IP phones registered on the Quadro Subscriptions are events originated by IP phones when watching other extensions or SLAs on the Quadro and when monitoring voice mailbox for new received voice mails SP hamei te Shove pas TTE kune SiP Tunnel SIP Tunnel SH hamets to Master Devices Tunnel Marne Master Daka P Master Cece Pot Pegetiation State PReatet ation
137. abled Local Routing table 5 entries defined for a call to the default Auto Attendant 00 for calls to PBX SIP PSTN and 911 emergency destinations Local AAA Table no entries Global Speed Dial Directory undefined RADIUS client disabled Voice Mail Recording G729a Email Subject for voice Voice mail received from VM_DISPNAME VM_USERNAME FAX to E mail format TIFF 142 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Parameter Dial Timeouts 3PCC Settings RTP Streaming Channels IPSec PPTP and L2TP Dynamic DNS Firewall IDS NAT Filtering Rules DNS Server Settings DHCP Advanced Settings VLAN Settings Extension Settings Parameter Voice Mail Settings QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x System Default Value 4 seconds Secure Connection disabled Request Timeout 10 Feature Key not added WAN Port not opened Undefined No connections RSA Key Management 1024 bit key defined PPTP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 1 0 24 Authentication MSCHAPv2 MPEE 128 bit L2TP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 2 0 24 Disabled Firewall disabled Ping Stealth enabled Fool Portscanner disabled Disabled Disabled Outgoing Traffic MS File Sharing Blocked for all SIP Access Allowed for all No user defined services and IP pool groups Time to live TTL 86400 seconds Mail Exchange MX undefined
138. ackup devices This action will result in rebooting the current master After rebooting the current master device will start running in a backup mode Switching the backup to master starts all applications on Quadro and causes all IP phones to reboot The swapping takes around 1 minute however another 1 3 minutes are required in order to reboot all the IP phones connected to redundant system If backup device before swapping was in passive mode then after swapping the master will start running as backup in passive mode otherwise if it was in active mode then master will start running as backup in active mode Download system logs link is only present on backup device and is used to download system logs to the local PC as a tar archive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro Status The system status window displays non editable tables providing extensive system status information about Quadro General Information Network Status Lines Status Memory Status Hardware Status SIP Registration Status IP Lines Registration Status and License Status The links on this page lead to device Transfer Statistics user mailboxes and supplementary services configuration pages The System Status page has several tables providing system information General I nformation The General Information page includes the following information e Uptime duration Period Quadro is
139. added groups and the members assigned to these groups If a group is empty EMPTY will be indicated in the Members column If hidden group members will still remain active but HIDDEN will be displayed in the Members column The IP Pool Configuration is used to add groups of IP addresses that have the same restriction criteria When adding a new filtering rule groups may be used instead of several IP addresses IP Pool Configuration offers the following components View makes hidden groups visible Hide makes group members hidden and adds the HIDDEN comment in the member column Add opens the Add Group page where a new group may be added This page consists of the Group Name text field requiring the group name and the Group Description text field requiring the optional group description as well as standard Save and Back buttons to apply or abort changes Edit opens the Edit Group page where the service parameters can be modified It provides the same components as the Add Group page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear Please Note Changing a group name will also change the references to this group including groups where this group is a member of and all affected filter rules enabled and disabled ones in all chains Deleting a group will also delete any reference to the corresponding group including filter rules and member relations to
140. adjusted The system provides the possibility of editing multiple conferences at the same time The Edit Entry page consists of two frames In the left frame settings groups are listed Clicking on the corresponding settings group displays their configuration options in the right frame Please Note Save changes before moving among settings groups The Edit Entry General Settings page allows the administrator to edit the following conference settings QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus Fig Il 130 Conferences Menu in Plain Theme 70 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Display Name is any optional information about the subject of the conference e The Password text field requires a password for the moderator access to the conference The password inserted Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi soa uadrom here is used by the moderator to join the conference The moderator is able to use conference codes during an active Conferences Management Edit Entry call conference and access conference specific GUI pages to coordinate the conference view change conference Cannes Santen General Settings 308 properties activate deactivate it start stop resume recording _ SIF Settings view conference statistics The Confirm Password text field cole semaine AEREI i i SIP Advanced Settings requires the confirmation of the
141. adjustment of IP settings This selection requests the following parameters IP Address requires the IP address for the Quadro WAN interface Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask for the Quadro device WAN interface Default Gateway requires the IP address of the router where all packets are to be sent to for example to the router of the provider The WAN Interface Configuration page may be used to modify the MAC address of the Quadro This might be necessary if the ISP Internet Service Provider requires a specified MAC address for example for authentication This page offers the following components MAC Address Assignment manipulation radio buttons e This Device turns to the default MAC address of the Quadro e User Defined requires user defined MAC Address The MTU drop down list allows you to select the maximum packet size on the Ethernet in bytes MTU is used to fragment the packets before transmitting them to the network The MTU preferred value is dependent on the Ethernet connection The default MTU size is 1500 Bytes for Ethernet and 1400 Bytes for PPPoE Automatic Provisioning Automatic Provisioning provides the possibility to automatically configure the WAN network settings of Quadro This is very useful when the administrator is not actually aware about the Quadro s network settings Automatic Provisioning automatically detects the matching network configuration settings applies them on the Quadro thus connecti
142. adro OCM Support Fel support fot Oued o Coeemanication Managet 10 users Conterence Server Full support for Conference Server 32 users e ACD Support enables the ACD Management feature Cannecerdng Support tes Cal Recordin copay x which provides contact center solution for queuing and automatic distribution of the calls between contact center agents e Barge In enables the Barge In Service on the Quadro The feature allows the PBX users to participate to the third party s calls while remaining imperceptible e IP Phone support enables additional LAN sided IP Conures phones support on the Quadro This feature key allows you Key 07802 to activate three packages of IP lines support With the first inserted feature key additional 32 IP lines will be activated With the second and third inserted feature keys 64 Fig I 62 Features Add page additional IP lines will be activated each time Mam System Users Comet ences Teleptety keset Up nk Met ca bh e QCM Support allows Quadro s extensions to be used by Quadro Communication Manager after QCM trial period expires Depending on the feature key type additional 4 or 10 QCM licenses can be activated on the Quadro e Conference Server activates the Conference Server feature on the system enabling it to act as a standalone conference server This allows up to 64 person conference calls to be set up and offers a bundle of helpful features to manage the conferences
143. ages for IP Phones page User Rights Management The User Rights Management service sets restrictions on the GUI access for various users permits or denies the access to certain Web GUI configuration pages and creates multilevel user management of the Quadro The feature is useful to the ISPs in order to set the restrictions for certain customers to manage the Quadro s configuration Two levels of Quadro GUI administration are available Administrator this is the main administrator s account The administrator can configure to have the factory reset safe the default password or choose not to The administrator has access to all Web GUI pages and no one else has configuration permission to adjust this account The administrator is responsible for granting access to all other user groups Local Administrator this is a common sub administrator s account The password is not factory reset safe Local Administrator can have permission to adjust each GUI page Extension this account refers to all extensions created on the Quadro The password for default extensions is not factory reset safe but is contained in the backed up configuration Permissions for an extension to access each GUI page can be adjusted here The User Rights Management page consists of two pages The Users page is used to manage the available users on the Quadro The Roles page is used to assign the corresponding permissions to the users Man System Usets
144. ally adjust the routing rules for extensions in custom length Tye Liner Extension Quantity 10 Stat From the Extension 111 Start From the SP User Hame 50111 SIF Sorser sip epygi com SIF Pio S060 hegistation on Si Server soe Back r FAIDA Epai Tap pe A nipan mna Fig Il 107 Extensions Management Add Multiple Extensions page Start from the SIP User Name text field requires the SIP server registration user name for the first extension to be created Depending on the value in the Quantity text field the next extensions to be created will have subsequent SIP user names For example if you have inserted 30201 in this text field and the Quantity text field contains the value 5 then the 5 newly created extensions will correspondingly have the following registration SIP user names 30201 30202 30203 30204 and 30205 This user name is used for the registration on the SIP Server and should be unique on the SIP server This field length is limited by 20 symbols and is not limited regarding the use of symbols If an extension with the given SIP user name already exists in the Extensions Management table a next subsequent not used SIP user name will be used instead SIP Server text field requires the address of the SIP server The field is not limited regarding symbol usage and length as it can be either an IP address or a host address e g sip epygi com SIP Port text field requires the port number to connect to
145. anti Sultir Display Mane Subject Gudro User 1 Serine Si Parierand ELLET Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent C rmi Papii LESELE AmSched Link Lire 1 Wee Kickh ack Password requires a password for the new extension El Altowr Cali Relay Ei Show on Public Directory The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric Ga To User Settings Percentage of Total Memory 5 sym bols are entered the ncorrect Passwo rd no sym bol Go To Lines Settings Allra olor wears bo Bargi In be this entensign characters allowed error will prevent creating the extension Edi Barge In Acces Lisi save ak Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear Fig Il 74 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings page Attached Line lists all free lines to where an extension may be attached Please Note Extensions cannot be detached from the line if the SIP Remote Extension service is enabled on it To detach the extension from the line disable the SIP Remote Extension service on the extension first Use Kickback checkbox enables the Kickback service on the extension for the blind call transfer When the extension transfers the call to the
146. ants a lecturer s permissions Both listener and speaker participants can get lecturer permissions Enabling lecture mode for a participant will allow him to speak to the conference and will mute all other participants of the conference Please Note Only one participant can act in a lecture mode at the same time Activate Conference This link is used to activate a conference Send Notification Mail This link is used to send an email to the participants notifying them about the start of a conference and inviting them to join The text of the notification email is being configured by the administrator Recorded Conferences Conference recording service allows you to record conferences and save them on the system internal or external storage space depending on the configuration To use conference recording service it should be enabled from the Participant Password can be entered to require a password for participant access to the conference It has to be entered twice for confirmation The password entered here should be used by the participant to join the conference The participant can participate in the conference only according to the rights speaker or listener granted by the moderator Max Duration sets the conference to be limited to a maximum duration in minutes Leave the field empty for unlimited conference duration QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 147 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus With
147. anually from Administrator s Main Page of the Quadro s Web Management or by pressing the Record button on the IP phone during the call If no such button exists on IP phone the functional key can be configured from Quadro to handle the recording functionality see Programmable Keys Configuration To configure Call Recording an extension of the Recording Box type should be created first The memory allocated to that extension will be used for storing the recorded calls There are two ways to access the recorded calls in the Recording Box through handset and through Web Management Through handset Recording Box is accessible by calling the Recording Box extension On Quadro s Web Management call recordings are available from Extensions Management by clicking on the Recording Box extension Attention Following limitations apply to the call recording on the Quadro e Only calls which are originated or terminated on the Quadro extensions can be recorded Pass through calls cannot be recorded e Calls to Auto Attendant or Voicemail cannot be recorded The Call Recording Settings page is used for configuring the call recording rules The Call Recording Settings table lists all existing call recording rules Click on the recording box extension number in the Recorded To column will move to the corresponding Recording Box The Call Recording Settings table offers the following functions Add functional button opens the Add Entry page where a new call re
148. appears when the configuration generation procedure starts and it is used to stop it The Download generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to download the generated file to the PC in a plain text format Necessary changes can be made in the downloaded configuration file and then uploaded back to the system Attention Make sure the changes you have done in the downloaded legible configuration file are valid and will not corrupt the system when being uploaded back to device The View generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to view the generated file directly in the browser The Restart generation button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to cancel the generated configuration file and to start over Man System Users Conferences Telephony hernet Upit Configuration Summary ins ed m Generating glodal legible configuration tating through the administrator mfiguration Process finished Ooenioad generated configuratice View generated configurator Sahni le tht ttt tle Administrator s Menus Fig Il 39 Configuration Summary Preview page The Upload Legible Configuration page is used to upload a configuration file in a text format The Browse button in the opened page is used to browse certain legible configuration file
149. assword in order to make the phone assigned to the certain extension From that point forward and unless the user with log off the phone he may place and receive calls and use all the supplementary PBX services of the Quadro The Hot Desking feature is used to organize the user login logout on the public phones Each user should have a virtual extension configured in the Extensions Management table The virtual extensions can be configured as needed to use all the available supplementary PBX features when the user will log in from the phone with that extension The Hot Desking option should be enabled on the corresponding analogue or IP lines from the Line Settings or IP Line Settings page accordingly To login to the phone use the 0008 feature code for more details see Feature Codes chapter You will be prompted for the extension and the password When you login to the phone with your extension the phone becomes a fully featured phone connected to the Quadro You may place and received calls with the SIP address configured in the Extensions Management page use Voice Mail services etc When you have finished using the phone logout with the 0o008 feature code From that moment forward your extension becomes again virtual and is not connected to any analogue or IP line but it still can handle calls using Call Forwarding Many Extension Ringing Hunt Grouping etc services and voice mails according to the supplementary service configured on that vir
150. atabase page Press the Add button on the Authorized Phones Database page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the call type and enter a caller address in the corresponding text field Select a Login Extension and the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox if required Enable Call Back service if required and define a Call Back Destination in the same named field Fill in an optional Description in the appropriate field if required Press Save to submit the settings awa a To Delete an Authorized phone from the database 1 Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page 2 Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones Database page 3 To remove an authorized phone s select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding records that should be deleted from the Authorized Phones Database table Press Select all if all records should be deleted 4 Press the Delete button on the Authorized Phones Database page 5 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel the action by clicking on No Call Back Services With Call Back service callers can save a call charge when calling to and through Quadro Quadro provides the possibility of creating a list of those trusted callers that are allowed to make free of charge calls to Quadro s Auto Attendant or through its Call Relay menu to the third party SIP or PSTN destination Two types of Call Back services are available on the Quadro Pre con
151. ate OT 2E40 ADPCM speech eoding af 40 kibia rated packaging is selected try a different one e f Use ITU_T specification is selected the ITU 1 366 2 AAL2 type 2 service specific convergence sublayer for narrow band services type packaging of codewords is used where packing code words into octets is starting from the most significant rather than the least significant digit in the octet e If Use IETF RFC is selected the IETF RFC RTP Profile for Audio and Video Conferences with Minimal Control type packaging of codewords is used where packing code words is starting from the least significant position in the octet RTP RTCP Port Range LAC Antenne Low Bit Rahi Coder af 1323 khia ra i AG Shimii 2 Uee MUT specticaion eg ETF AEG RIPRTCP Pon Range Min E200 Man BITS DEnatle RTP Supeet Save Back a pri pee Ae EI P DE Ta iF iai Lhi Al righ Fig Il 146 RTP Settings page e Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed e Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed Since the specified maximum port has to be higher than the minimum port the error message Min port number should be less than max port number will appear if this condition is not met The port range must consist of digits only otherwise the error
152. ation Wizard The Internet Configuration Wizard allows the administrator to configure the WAN interface settings and to adjust Quadro s connectivity with an external network The Internet Configuration Wizard MUST be run for Quadro to be connected to the Internet Mam System Users Conferences Teloptiony kienet Uplink Network Internet Configuration Wizard Getting Started This wizard guides you through Uplink Selection and based on which VOAN infertace Protocol you s fect there through L fos Protocels PPPOE IL for Protocol PPTP EL for Protocol Ethernet PPPPPTP Corfiguration WAN IP Configuraton WAN IP Confquratior WAN interlace Con gurator FFPPPTP Configuration e WAN Iartace Configuration DONS Settings WAN Imerface Configuration DNS Settings DNS Settings All the settings of the Internet Configuration Wizard are described in the chapters below except those for the IP settings which will be described in this chapter Attention It is strongly recommended not to change the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to an administrator Fig Il 7 Internet Configuration Wizard Start page The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings e Uplink configuration see below For WAN Interface protocol PPPoE For WAN Interface protocol PPTP For WAN Interface protocol Ethernet e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN IP Configuration see b
153. ats presented below Main Srem Uhbers Conferences Tebeplmoan bierni Updink Bed vaca lk e IP address example 10 1 19 32 IPSec Connection Wizard e Host name example vpn epygi com This form requires additional resources to resolve the host name therefore it is not recommended to use this format automatic keying VPNConnect e FQDN example vpn epygi com This form is i anakina considered as a string and is not being resolved It is recommended to use this form for most applications ii gt Hyder Unvedb Rol LAV GSN pd cies i e user FQDN example quadro vpn epygi com This Local 19 168 0 26 form is also considered as a string and is not being resolved It has no advantages over the previous form Remo iD quadri spral com PPPS Fareri Forward Secme Duss Paat compression Please Note The Local ID and Remote ID values are mandatory for RSA selection and are optional for Shared Secret selection However it is recommended to define the Local ID and Remote ID values for multiple road warrior connections Fig Il 211 IPSec Connection Wizard Automatic Keying Settings page PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy is a procedure of system key exchange which uses a long term key and generates short term keys as is required Thus an attacker who acquires the long term key can neither read previous messages that they may have captured nor read future ones Use IPSec Compression enables IPSec data compression
154. attern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear fa pe Dhein minnar rigis Call Routing Wizard nace Fikar hhogy Caller i bd Emiri ted ay The Prefix text field requires entering the symbols alphanumerics and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the Source Number Pattern instead of the discarded digits For example if the routing pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the prefix digits are 909 the final phone number will be 909345 Wildcards are allowed here see chapter Allowed Characters and Wildcards The Discard Non Numeric Symbols checkbox is used to aie ea discard any non numeric symbols from the Source Number Fig Il 186 Call Routing Wizard page 3 Pattern The Display Name text field allows you to replace an original caller s ID with the custom display name for the corresponding routing rule This field is optional and when it is left empty an original caller ID will be displayed on the called destination s phone otherwise the name inserted here will appear on the phone This field is not available for PBX Voicemail destination type routing rules The Remove Display Name checkbox is used to remove caller IDs from calls made with this routing rule This checkbox is not avai
155. ault Values 138 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Parameter Language Pack User Rights Management Extensions Management Extension Settings General for QuadroM8L Extension Settings General for QuadroM26x Extension Settings SIP for QuadroM8L Extension Settings SIP for QuadroM26x Extension Settings SIP Advanced Extension Settings Remote QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Appendix System Default Values System Default Value Default English Current Language Pack none Users admin enabled localadmin disabled Roles Extension all accessible pages for extension except for Extension Voice Mail Profiles Local Administrators all accessible pages for localadmin Extension Length 3 once applied extensions 00 101 294 appear Display name none Password empty 101 and 126 extensions are attached to the FXS lines 1 and 26 correspondingly 127 198 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 96 Kickback disabled Call Relay disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 101 126 5 Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 127 198 0 4 Allow other users to Barge In to this extension disabled Display name none Password empty 101 and 102 extensions are attached to the FXS lines 1 and 2 correspondingly 103 206 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 80 Kickba
156. automatic backup of the system configuration and the voice data can be configured The service allows you to setup Quadro so it will automatically backup the system configuration and the voice data and store it in the specified location Fig Il 36 Configuration Management page The Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page allows you to enable the automatic backup of the system configuration and the voice data on the Quadro With this service Quadro will automatically backup the system configuration and the voice data and store it in the specified location Main System Users Conberemoes Ticleeqitivcarny lite ries Ppl Automatically Backup Configuration Settings nfo Fiber back will bob gener via Fii dren ibr el Grable Automaticaly Dackap This page contains the following components The Enable Automatically Backup checkbox enables automatic backup mechanism on the Quadro The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you to select whether the backup files will be delivered by email or stored in some location Uair Palit e The Send via Email radio button is used to send the automatically backed up files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email EEPE address of the administrating person to receive the automatically backup files Foppa Mond o TEU e The Send to Server radio button is used to store the eme C e automatically backup files on a remote server Th
157. ay Lines Add Entry Descriptor Duadrof X516 Please Note The FXS lines can be assigned only to inactive IP lines on the Quadro IP PBX If there are no enough free IP lines available on the Quadro IP PBX you should first deactivate the IP line from the IP Line Settings page to use it in the FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard The next page of the wizard is FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard Summary where the configured settings should be verified jeie 6 16 Jl S I6 IS it fe Once FXS Gateway Configuration Wizard terminates a new entry is added to the table and the corresponding FXS Gateway s configuration gets updated according to the settings defined in the wizard i e corresponding routing rules will be added to the Call Routing table of the FXS Gateway If you need to reboot the ai A FXS gateway use the Reboot functional button in the FXS Fig Il 164 FXS Gateway Management Wizard page 2 Gateway Management page Loopback Settings The FXS Lines Loopback Settings page is used to configure the lines for voice loopback diagnostics When loopback is enabled on the line any incoming calls to the corresponding line will automatically pick up on the first ring and any voice towards the line will automatically be sent back to the caller the caller will hear themselves in the handset Loopback Timeout provides the option of limiting the voice loopback diagnostics duration i e the caller will be disconnected from the
158. be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The alternating Hide disabled IP lines and Show disabled IP lines buttons are used to respectively hide or show the IP lines that have not been activated with a feature key To enable the lines install a feature key from the Features page By pressing on the IP line link in the Available IP Lines column the Edit IP Line page specific for the current IP line is opened This page offers a group of manipulation radio buttons that allows you to enable the IP line and to configure it to for use by the SIP phones Inactive this selection disables the corresponding IP line SIP Phone this selection configures the IP line for a SIP phone to be connected to the Quadro s LAN e Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist The drop down list excluding Other selection enables the MAC address text fields used to insert the MAC Address of the corresponding SIP phone Use Other selection if your SIP phone is not in this list e Line Appearance text field requires a number of simultaneous calls supported by the SIP phone e Username and Password are required for this selection They should match on both the Quadro and the SIP phone for a successful connection The Password field is checked against its strength and you may see how strong is your inserted password
159. bled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled SRTP Policy Make unsecure calls accept anything For extensions 127 206 Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a enabled G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 iLBC G 722 G 722 1 H 263 and H 264 disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled SRTP Policy Make unsecure calls accept anything Display name Attendant FAX forwarding disabled Show on Public Directory enabled Percentage of System Memory 5 Scenario default send AA digits to Routing Table disabled Redirection on Timeout disabled ZeroOut disabled Welcome Message enabled Ringing Announcement disabled Welcome Message Recurring Attendant Prompt and Attendant Ringing Announcement default Registration username 00 Registration password empty SIP server sip epygi com SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration disabled 140 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Parameter System Default Value Attendant 00 Settings SIP Sane aa O E R Advanced Codecs G711u preferred G711a G726 16 G72
160. bled for the user and the call queue appearance value is greater than 1 If the call ringing in the background isn t answered it will be transferred to the user s voice mailbox or if no answer forwarding is enabled it will be forwarded to the corresponding destination If the call is set into the queue the caller will hear a message asking them to wait until the call will be answered Once the receptionist or extension user terminates the call the next call in the queue will ring to the user For regular FXS users indication about the callers in the queue is through the Call Waiting service see Manual III Extension Users Guide When a new caller arrives to the call queue the phone display if available of the phone connected to the FXS will display the total number of callers in the queue along with the name phone number of the last caller Extension Status Quadro provides the possibility of controlling and determining the actual state of the managers phones through the receptionist s IP phone configuration of the IP phone is done automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard A programmable key on the receptionist s IP phone that is assigned to the corresponding manager will blink when an incoming call to the manager s phone is currently ringing The key lamp will be ON when manager is on a call and will be OFF if the manager s phone is in the idle state The extension status can be watched viewed
161. bled will be dialed Fig Il 17 Schedule Page Clicking the Add button takes you to the Add Entry page where new scheduling rule can be configured This page offers the following components A group of radio buttons that are used for selecting the frequency of the scheduled sa ae Ware Cepyg j conference quad e Once the calendar date month day year should be specified for this Schedule Add Entry option e Daily Conference ID 308 e Weekly weekdays when scheduling out to be activates should be selected for this option Use Select All and Select None to select or deselect all weekdays Ooan e Monthly the calendar day should be selected for this option Weekly C Sunday Thursday e Annually the calendar day and the month should be selected for this option C Monday MFriday are a d In the Time text fields the time of the scheduled conference activation should be ae _ defined The time selected in these fields will be considered according to the system date and time settings Select All Select None The Allow Participants to join conference before Conference Activation checkbox selection allows participants to dial in to the conference before conference activation During this period participants will be able to communicate with each other However this does not mean that the conference is activated the participants Time 06 00 will be dialed out if any and the recording will start
162. bound has a destination number that matches the specified pattern it will be completed according to the current rule A routing pattern may contain wildcards For the list of characters and wildcards allowed in this text field see chapter Allowed Characters and Wildcards QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 97 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ii fie Ge melee a Call Routing Wizard Raubo CHi Type Add Entry T Inaba Bex i Number of Discarded Symbols requires the number of symbols that should be discarded from the beginning of the routing pattern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear Prefix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the routing pattern instead of the discarded digits The following tags can be used for this field Fig Il 184 Call Routing Wizard page 1 e lt callerid range gt used to apply the complete or a part of caller ID the caller s number detected during the call as a prefix For example lt Callerid 1 3 gt indicates that the first 3 digits of the caller ID will be considered as a prefix lt callerid 3 end gt indicates that the caller ID from its 3 digit and up to the end will be appl
163. bt REA pubit key amal Pir key bi paar e RSA key doesn t start with Os Dsk TIRE Em i nyA I rN ME FEF T d PUBS SRG INAO pe TAHA 2 Lae Bend RSA key doesn t end with e RSA key contains symbols other than Alphanum h The Email this to the peer text field requires the mailing address of the IPSec connection partner The Send button will insert Quadro s public RSA key into an e mail and send it to Fig Il 213 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection RSA Key Settings page the IPSec connection partner PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol is used to establish a virtual private network VPN over the Internet Remote users can access their corporate networks via any ISP that supports PPTP on its servers PPTP encapsulates any type of network protocol IP IPX etc and transports it over IP Therefore if IP is the original protocol IP packets ride as encrypted messages inside PPTP packets running over IP PPTP is based on point to point protocol PPP and the Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE protocol Encryption is performed by Microsoft s Point to Point Encryption MPPE which is based on RC4 L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol is a protocol from the IETF which allows a PPP session to run over the Internet an ATM or frame relay network L2TP does not include encryption as does PPTP but defaults to using IPSec in order to provide virtual private network VPN connections from remote users to the corporate
164. card characters use and correspondingly QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus System Menu Mam fale Ua Conair Egem Condguraton Wired Guat Recundance Sting aw IP Fouling Cenbju t m j Sonia Wanaperi Evenes THEE Tirai ee fy Mo peng CAPS DiD F iiri pale Ee hiehworking Tonks UMP Debris Ciuegnesies Terri Upload Languige Fack Leie Fighti Mineral bbe concen alau DSP Cikri Manew VAN IP Aide vA Ch DO SP ip Tahrig Lhi Ai System Ty iri epysi Tees Bamer in DEA na ceca 2a Shep ape os Te Bent boedecy 2 ee lene Ficawace Version 5 0 21 Fe lease med inc O a0h expires bonkz O b expires 17 0 cE 0 1 expires Li 12 Fig Il 1 System Menu in Dynamo theme System Configuration Wizard The System Configuration Wizard allows the administrator to define the Quadro s Local Area Network settings and to specify regional configuration settings to make Quadro operational in its LAN The System Configuration Wizard MUST be run upon Quadro s first startup to make sure that it works properly in its network environment The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings e System Configuration see below e DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface e Regional Settings and Preferences see below e Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings see below DHCP Settings for the LAN are described in the
165. cessible remotely Select only those logs that you wish to have monitored remotely Fig Il 59 System Logs System Remote Logs Settings page In the View System Logs page you may view the generated logs on the Quadro System logs are useful to determine any king of problems on the Quadro as well as to monitor the user s access and the usage of it Man Sytem Users Cenfehenoes Telephom keina pink Memaoik Cepysi afin On the left side of the page a list of main logs is displayed System Logs CAS User Clicking on the needed link will display the most recent log lines ssa ie ci iii Saal The number of log lines displayed on this page is set on the System Logs Settings page se AAE Appliewtan Lag Started A 2000 309 1706197 _ ____ OH is OM J eneren a SAGE TL INE eere The text field on the left side is dedicated for support personnel only and is used to search a custom log not listed on this page To O rama Hahei CH ratan __ Tre do so insert a required log name to the text field and press Show a 1 bor seer i nd rh ita Custom Log functional button aha 130 GetConniguraticn TRUNK O dons not asi 0 Gebhoniigur 257 2171 ae paramo Serio O If the user has used Logs Collection feature code ison TERT after or during from another phone connected to the same y Quadro the call a special log file will be generated containing the details of that call and few last ca
166. ck disabled Call Relay disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 101 126 5 Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 127 206 0 4 Allow other users to Barge In to this extension disabled For extensions 101 and 102 Registration username same as extension number Registration password empty SIP server sip epygi com SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration disabled For extensions 103 198 Registration username same as extension number Registration password empty SIP server undefined SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration disabled For extensions 101 126 Registration username same as extension number Registration password empty SIP server sip epygi com SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration disabled For extensions 127 206 Registration username same as extension number Registration password empty SIP server undefined SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration disabled Authentication User Name undefined Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy disabled RTP Priority Level medium Do Not use SIP Old Hold Method disabled Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for Secondary SIP Server undefined Remote Extension disabled 139 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Parameter Exten
167. codec support for incoming unified FAX messages fax to mailbox Enable Pass Through FAX enables the FAX tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the G 711 codec support for incoming unified FAX messages fax to mailbox If both of the above checkboxes are enabled the T 38 codec will be used as a preferred codec for FAX transmission If it is not supported by the peer the G 711 codec will be used instead If the extension is attached to the line that has no FAX machine modem connected the extension is virtual or is attached to an IP line the incoming FAX can only be stored in the extension s voice mailbox To allow FAX to be stored in the voice mailbox the extension s user should not answer the incoming calls so that they are forwarded to the voice mailbox Please Note If both of the above checkboxes are disabled no FAX transmission to the peer s voice mailbox will be possible Enable Pass Through Modem checkbox is available for the Auto Attendant and the extensions attached to the FXS lines only This checkbox enables the modem tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the data transmission from to the modem attached to the line During data transmission Silence Suppression and Echo Cancellation are automatically disabled on the line Please Note If the extension attendant is intended to accept modem connections disable the Enable T 38 FAX ch
168. cognize must be silently discarded If the client is valid the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose name matches the request The user entry in the database contains a list of requirements username password etc that must be met to give access to the user If all conditions are met the user gets access to the Quadro Network The RADIUS Client Settings page contains the Enable RADIUS Client checkbox that enables RADIUS client on the Quadro Please Note The RADIUS Client cannot be disabled if there is at least one route with RADIUS Authentication and Authorization or RADIUS Accounting values configured in the AAA Required drop down list at the Call Routing table In order to be able to disable the RADIUS Client on the Quadro appropriate routes should be removed first The other RADIUS Client settings are divided into three groups QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 108 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide 1 Registration Settings The Primary Server requires the IP address of the primary Radius Server The Secondary Server requires the IP address of the secondary Radius Server NAT Station IP text fields require the NAT PC WAN IP address If no NAT Station is specified here Quadro s IP address will be sent to the RADIUS server Secret Key is used to insert the secret key between the Radius client and the server Contact the Radius server administrator to get the secret key for your Quadro
169. connected Quadro stays in the always connected mode This will allow always being online in the network IP Address Assignment radio buttons are used to define the IP address assignment for the PPP interface with the following options e Dynamic IP Address the IP address to the PPP interface will be assigned dynamically by the DHCP server e Fixed IP Address the fixed user defined IP address will be assigned to the PPP interface captai The Keep Connection alive checkbox enables keeping the connection alive by sending control packets dedicated for the link state verification Fig Il 205 PPP Dial Settings page Advanced PPP Settings The Advanced PPP Settings are used to enable disable certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment These settings are available only if Quadro has a PPPoE WAN interface Attention Disabling any of the services below may cause problems when establishing a connection including the complete connection failure The default settings should be changed only if the ISP Internet Service Provider specifically requires it or if the peer system has problems with one of the services listed below More information about these services can be found at http www protocols com pbook ppp htm The Advanced PPP Settings page offers the following group of checkboxes QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 113 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Admini
170. cording rule is being configured The Add Entry page consists of the following components The Caller Information requires the Call Type and the callers Address The Called Party Information requires the Call Type and the called party s Address Call Type lists the available call types e PBX indicates that the calling or called party is Quadro extension tee Sytem Gere PEETER Sete pdety Call Recording Settings ute ai At Ct Dat Geet teen ta Pan ee i pa e SIP indicates that the calling or called party is located in SIP network external to Quadro e PSTN indicates that the calling or called party Fig Il 201 Call Recording Settings page is located in PSTN network external to Quadro w Creat B ted tattered e Auto indicates any of the types listed above QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ian hea le 1 ei te ek litje EFi beet ei Masik Call Recording Settings Add Entry The value in the Address text field is dependent on the oe Call Type If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro mine FE extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here In case of Auto call type any of the addresses listed above are allowed Wildcards are applicable for this field Recording Type drop down list allows you to select whethe
171. ction be defined m as The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where an PBX 102 os extension may be added to the list This page requires the or PBX 7 ves extension number in the Address text field that will be allowed miele ie he to barge in Wildcard is supported for this field to add a group of extensions with one entry Copyright C 2003 2009 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 75 Barge In Access List The checkboxes on this page allow to select one or more options of the Barge In service for the extension Halt byelem Users Cases TelapliHi Internet UaK Nalmcik e Allow Listen In e Allow Whisper Barge In Access List Add Entry e Allow Barge In nee i Audolriesiss ini bascar Sa potest Eel aow Listen in FF Allow whisper e Aller Bargi in Save save Hack gee C Span Tori cap Fig Il 76 Barge In Access List Add Entry 2 SIP Settings Man Sytem Users Conetemces Telephony tenet pink This group is used to configure extension s SIP registration settings and consists of the following components Extensions Management Edit Entry User Name requires a user name for the extension registration SIP Registration Settings 11 on the SIP server The registration user name needs to be Se a unique on the SIP server and it is displayed on the called phone when performing an IP call This field length is limited to 32 symbols Password indicates the password for the extension
172. ction Wizard Local Subnet lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from all stations of the local network to all stations of the remote LAN VPN gateway devices are not included In this case the local and remote subnet IP addresses and subnet masks have to be entered in the corresponding text fields Local Subnet IP and Remote Subnet IP More than one of the above checkboxes may be selected to specify the desired communication relations The Stop Connection if not successful checkbox allows you to stop the IPSec connection attempts if the partner is still unreachable after the timeout period If the checkbox is not selected the system will continue to try to reach the IPSec connection partner The RSA Key Management sub page is used to see the current RSA key and to generate a new one This page contains the following components QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 117 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The public key is displayed in the RSA Public Key text field so that the user may inform their IPSec connection partner about it for example via fax The user has the option of generating a new pair of keys by specifying the key length with the corresponding radio buttons Generate a new 1024bit RSA Key and Generate a new Man System Users Conferences Talephony Internat Uplink Met work 2048bit RSA Key and then clicking the Generate Button IPSec Configuration A valid RSA key should fit to following requirements aadik n TDH
173. d MSN Settings page which is used to turn on the MSN configuration It is recommended to enable the MSN when there are multiple ISDN devices connected to the same ISDN bus If the MSN is enabled on this Fig ll 170 ISDN Wizard ISDN PRMP Settings page the next page will require the MSN table configuration Copyrigh Ci Se Caw Teala r Lie All righi rard For MSN service enabled the Routing Settings page is used to assign MSN numbers to the certain destinations on the Quadro The MSN number can be assigned to the Quadro s extensions to the Auto Attendant or to the routing agent The destination selected from this page will ring upon incoming call to the corresponding MSN number comes in QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 90 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II The fields in the MSN Number column require the MSN numbers allocated to the Quadro Please Note At least one MSN number should be defined in this page The system displays an error message if the same MSN number is used twice in this page The Route Incoming Call to drop down lists are used to select the destination where the incoming call addressed to the certain MSN number will be routed Choosing the Routing with inbound destination number selection will automatically use the initially dialed number to connect the destination without any additional dialing If MSN is disabled on the ISDN Wizard MSN Settings page the ISDN Wizard Routing Set
174. d Confirm Pagowoed C1 Shew on Public Directory Riri Tent 15 saw sack Fig Il 87 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for call park extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Password confirm With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc Retrieve Timeout text field requires a timeout in minutes during which the parked call will stay active i e the parked user will remain on hold When the call park retrieve timeout expires the hold music stops playing to the parked user and a new call is being placed towards the extension initiating the call park If the extension initiating the call park does not answer the call the caller which has been recently parked will reach the extension s Voice Mailbox if enabled otherwise will be disconnected 2 Park Access List This page is
175. d Some SIP servers use an outbound proxy server to escape restrictions of NAT For example Free World Dialup service uses an Outbound Proxy server If an Outbound proxy is specified for an extension all SIP calls originating from that extension are made through that outbound proxy i e all requests are sent to that outbound proxy even those made by Speed Calling The Secondary SIP Server acts as an alternative SIP registration server when the primary SIP Registration Server is inaccessible If the connection with the primary SIP server fails Quadro will automatically start sending SIP messages to the Secondary SIP Server It will switch back to the primary SIP server as soon as the connection is reestablished QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus 40 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Authentication User Name requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should be provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested for some SIP servers only For others the field should be left empty Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP registration server accessibility to the verification mechanism Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts for the SIP registration server accessibility verification If no reply is received Nd from the primary SIP server within this timeout the Secondary S
176. d by Quadro from the Audio Line In port The Gain Control page offers Transmit Gain and Receive Gain drop down lists for each line that contains allowed gain values which can be set up by the administrator for every line The Restore Default Gains button restores the default values QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Mon Sten Uses Conferences Telephon hesar Uline Network Ces i Fig Il 174 External PSTN Gateways page External PSTN Gateways Authorization Parameters ide Celt Delete Select all krania Selecto User ane Main System Weare Gain Control Ruston Ditut Gains Line 7 Tamiami Gawe Rices Gik FAD 1 0 Tramini Gawe Racake Gain Fang Tiamat Gain Recea Gain Feo 5 Trammi Gaines Facts Gaii Feu T Thana Gatt u Recah Gain Voice Mail Recording Gain Pipik Gan Alii Lines Trammi Gain d ine out ic FRacak Gain line in k tea Back Capyighi geh A 2080 Epy TAn Lij Ai ghe narhi Tirer Resist ath State Rect nation hate Time Hoel Fig ll 175 External PSTN Gateways Authorization Parameters page Talaphamy learnt Uplink Lint 2 Thanet Gain Hice Gea Feo Taran Gam Aacehe Gain Feo 4 Transit Gain Receta Gaii io Thanet Gain Recah dean Fes Thar Gane i Receive ei Fig Il 176 Gain Control page 94 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide SIP Tunnel Settings Ad
177. d confirm Administrator s Menus Man System Users Conferences Telephony Mesnet Uplink Network Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings General Settings 40 Fig Il 91 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for paging extension page The Edit Paging Group link leads to the page where a list of extensions to be paged can be selected The Paging Group of Extension page lists all available regular and virtual extensions on the Quadro and allows you to manage the Paging Group The Enable functional button is used to include the selected extension s to the Paging Group of the corresponding extension Once the call to the paging group comes in all the extensions in that group will be paged i e will automatically go off hook by automatic activation of the phone s speaker The Disable functional button is used to exclude the selected extension s from the Paging Group of the corresponding extension The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for users to use the Paging Group service can be defined The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to use the Paging Group through the corresponding extension The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the avai
178. d Bandwidth for IP Calls Call Park Service Call Park service is used to store a call on a specific number so that any other user on the system can retrieve it For example a user receives a Call but wants to take it in a conference room where it is possible to speak privately Transferring the call to the conference room is not an option because the conference room it is transferred to might be in use or the user is unable to walk to the conference room in time to answer the call The user can use Call Park to place the call at a specific number and then retrieve when they reach the conference room To use the Call Park feature at least one Call Park extension should be created in the Extensions Management table Additionally two lists should be defined for the call park extension Park Access List for users that might park a call to the corresponding Call Park extension and Retrieve Access List for the users that can pick up calls parked to that extension By default both of these lists have entries so any PBX extension on the Quadro can park the call and any destination can retrieve the parked call Any limitations to these settings should be done individually for each call park extension To park a call the Quadro user which has been previously added to the Park Access List for at least one of the available Call Park extension on the Quadro should dial the appropriate digit combination see Feature Codes during the call The active call will go
179. d Client hosts participating in a connection The PPTP L2TP Configuration link displays a page where a new PPTP and L2TP connection can be configured as well as PPTP and L2TP server settings can be adjusted The page consists of 3 sub pages The Connections page lists all existing connections are listed characterized by their Connection Name Type of the connection PPTP or L2TP the Client Server mode the State of the connection and the Remote Hostname IP the IP address or the hostname of the connection peer The state of the PPTP and L2TP Connections except for the Stopped Main System Users Contorences Telephony ngornet Upaink Network state is established as a link that refers to the page where logout information about the connection status is displayed PPTP L2TP Configuration Logs can be useful to determine problems on PPTP or L2TP connections failure Add functional button leads to the PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard page where a new connection can be established Olpections Please Note After creating a PPTP server connection PPTP connections between devices placed on the Quadro LAN and external devices will no longer be possible The PP TP pass through service for incoming and outgoing traffic will be automatically disallowed once a PPIP server connection is Fig Il 214 PPTP L2TP Configuration page created QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 118 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Adm
180. d a member with these parameters to the selected group press Save To Delete a Member 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Click on the desired members that should be deleted The IP Pool Group Configuration list will appear 3 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding members that should be deleted from the Members table Press Select all if all members should be deleted 4 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page 5 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cancel the deletion by pressing on No To Delete a Group 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Check the one or more checkboxes of the corresponding groups that should be deleted from the groups table Press Select all if all groups should be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cancel the deletion by pressing on No QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 126 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus I DS Log The IDS logging page contains information about dropped packets and the senders responsible for those packets IDS discards dangerous packets or packets including intrusion attacks lIt generates a table with the IDS log report The administrator can be notified about ne
181. d to define the sequence in which they will be played for the person in the queue My selecting this option the default ACD queue messages will be replaced with the scenario defined below Custom Queue Messages table lists all audio files in the custom queue scenario and allows you to add new field Each audio file is characterized by the number of repeats and the timeout when it should start The audio files may be ordered in the list with Move Up and Move Down functional buttons The custom queue will start with the first audio file in this list and will be played in the loop in the order audio files are listed tae Sytem Gere med wt ene 4 ACD Management Add Entry The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new audio file can be defined This page consists of the manipulation radio buttons selection to allow upload a new audio file or to select an already uploaded one e Existing File this selection is used to choose one of the already uploaded custom queue messages to include in the scenario The same file may appear in Fig Il 97 Extensions Management Edit Entry ACD Group Settings Add Queue Message page the different instances of the queue music e Upload New File used to upload a new audio file The uploaded files should to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message
182. dded groups that may also be added as a member to another group Member description text fields can be used to enter an optional description of the member To Add a new Group with Members To add a group with the given parameters press Save Be al a a iad a assign it to the currently selected group Administrator s Menus Bain System Users 3 Conferencet Topti hnerra Lipolan Hermork IF Fool Group Contiguration Current Group ChatGroup Add fiat Dele Saleci al bearse Seen Pletrehern I Fig Il 229 IP Pool Group Configuration page Main Sy8em Users Conferences Tehepliny intane Uplink Nelwork IP Pool Group Configuration Add Member Current Group ChatGroup Fig Il 230 IP Pool Group Configuration Add Member Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link on the Filtering Rules page Click on the Add button on the IP Pool Configuration page A page where a new group may be added will appear in the browser window Define a group name in the Group Name text field and fill in the Group Description if needed Open the IP Pool Group Configuration page by clicking on the group name Select the Add button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page A page opens where new members may be added to the group Enter an IP address for the member in the IP Address text fields select a IP subnet or IP group from the User defined Group drop down list to 8 Enter a Member Description in the corresponding text field if needed 9 To ad
183. defined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number a SIP address or a PSTN number will be reached through the Call Routing table Fig Il 125 ACD Management Add Agent page The Calling Address text field is used to define the address by which the agent can be contacted The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Calling Address field should contain the extension number on Quadro and the corresponding agent can be reached by calling on extension number located on the same Quadro However it doesn t necessarily mean that the agent shall be located at that Quadro if the extension is remote extension then agent s location might be far from Quadro For the SIP call type the Calling Address field should contain the SIP address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly and the corresponding agent can be reached by calling on SIP address The agent with that kind of termination number might be located either at the same Quadro or anywhere else in the SIP network For the PSTN call type the Calling Address field should contain the PSTN number and the corresponding agent can be reached by calling on PSTN number via some PSTN interface on Quadro ISDN or FXO The agent with that kind of termination number is located in the PSTN network fixed or cellular For the Auto call type the Calling Address field should co
184. details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual III Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc The Percentage of Total Memory drop down list allows you to select the space for the uploaded custom messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro Ba trem fhe aiH Vabs ide ey faster yia Hes weak Extensions Management Edit Entry AGO Group Fainga 2T 2 ACD Group Settings This group is used to adjust the ACD group settings and has the following components Max Queue Size defines the maximum number of calls waiting in the queue If all positions of the queue are busy and a new call arrives it will be rejected by the Agents Group Agent Ring Timeout defines the maximum ringing time of the agen s phone If the call is not answered before this timer expires the system will try to connect the call to another agent in that group Group Ring Timeout defines the maximum waiting time of the calls in the queue including connection time when the call is extracted from the queue
185. device manually even if you have cancelled the language pack update procedure on the following steps The next page displayed will show verification of the language pack being uploaded and asks for confirmation to overwrite the existing custom language pack if applicable After final confirmation the system will upload the selected custom Language Pack and it will reboot Update Languages for I P Phones The Update Languages for IP Phones page is used to upload a custom language pack to the IP phone This page only contains those IP phones that support custom language pack uploading from the Quadro ie feiss jee Di lee Bai Lod irass To upload the custom language pack go to your IP phone related page and Browse the custom language pack file Save the Update larquages for F phiires changes to upload the custom language pack to the IP phone PAARE cine Attention Pressing the Save button will stop some vital processes on the IP Phone therefore you will need to reboot your phone manually even if you have cancelled the language pack update procedure on the following steps The next page displayed will show verification of the language pack being uploaded and asks for confirmation to overwrite the existing custom language pack if applicable After final confirmation Quadro will upload the selected custom Language Pack to your IP phone You should then reboot your phone to make the new language pack active Fig Il 64 Update Langu
186. dministrating application for successful SNMP management A group of radio buttons is used to select the SNMP protocol version used for events notifications delivered by the Quadro to the administrating application Fig Il 56 Add SNMP Traphost page Diagnostics The System Diagnostic page gives a possibility of running Network and WAN protocol diagnostics to verify Quadro s connectivity and to download all system logs for possible problems recovery The Start Detecting WAN Protocol button is used to initiate WAN diagnostics that will detect the WAN IP configurations static or through DHCP and PPP servers For static WAN IP configuration gateway availability is checked When acting as a client DHCP and PPP servers accessibilities are being verified The Start Network Diagnostics button is used to initiate network diagnostics i e to check the WAN link and IP configuration to verify gateway DNS primary and secondary if configured servers accessibilities The Start FXO Diagnostics button runs FXO diagnostic tests to determine the optimal value for the FXO country sa C epysi specific regional setting CSRS appropriate to your PSTN provider Once the FXO diagnostic is complete the EY SURO recommended value should be set manually on the fxocfg Sted detecting WAN Protaect Greate ieee hidden cgi Setting this value may resolve echo or poor audio atin no Diagnoses CENA quality issues on FXO lines Sacer The Reboot this
187. dress should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the pickup service for the extensions included in the Pickup Group Call Park Extension Settings For Call Park extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings Advanced SIP Settings Park Access List and Retrieve Access List pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 45 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide 1 General Settings for call park extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed or a voice mail is sent Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Administrator s Menus pysi Ai ai nmg Maim Syetem User tonerencas Telephon imeiner ela Herak Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings 783 Displey Hama Subject CaP ak it Passwor
188. dresses for this rule Since the filtering rules specify the operation mode of the firewall they only take effect if the firewall has been enabled additionally NAT should be enabled to use the Port Forwarding function in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering rules The filtering rules are independent from the security level so they will work if enabled no matter what security level has been selected Please Note Applying firewall rules will prevent the establishment of new connections that violate the rules Applying rules does not kill existing connections that violate the rule Attention The newly created blocking filtering rules will take effect immediately if there is no any active connection matching to that rule Otherwise if there is an active connection matching to the created blocking rule please restart the Quadro to make the newly created blocking rule effective immediately However if you are unable to restart the Quadro you may need to stop an existing active connection to make the newly created blocking rule effective Please note that in this case the blocking rule will take effect only in 3 minutes View All displays all configured filters specified by their State enabled or disabled the selected Service the set Action allowed or blocked the IP addresses the filters apply to if Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Since it is read only no
189. dro s setup by selecting the corresponding action s checkbox and pressing Save System Menu Users Menu Telephony Menu Internet Uplink Menu e System Configuration Wizard e Extensions Management e Call Statistics e PPP PPTP Settings e Internet Configuration Wizard e Receptionist Management e SIP Settings e VPN Configuration e Redundancy Settings e Extensions Directory e RIP Settings e Dynamic DNS Settings e Status e Authorized Phones Database e NAT Traversal Settings e Firewall and NAT e P Routing Configuration e ACD Management e Line Settings e Filtering Rules e Configuration Management e FXO Settings e IDS Log e Events e ISDN Settings e Time Date Settings Conferences Menu e External PSTN Gateways Network Menu e Mail Settings e Conferences Management e Gain Control DNS Settinas e SMS Settings e Mail Default Settings e SIP Tunnel Settings e DNS Server Settings e Firmware Update e Call Routing DHCP S tinas forthe LAN e Networking Tools e VoIP Carrier Wizard Interface e SNMP Settings e RADIUS Client Settings e DHCP Settings for the VLAN e Diagnostics e Voice Mail Interface e Features e Dial Plan Settings e Upload Language Pack e 3PCC Settings Registration Form e User Rights Management e RTP Streaming Channels in menu tree only e Call Recording Settings Logout The functional button Renew Wan IP Address appears on the administrators main Quadro Management page if the Quadro device acts as a DHCP client The Renew WAN IP Address button is
190. droM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 123 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Port Translation text field is available for Allowed action only and optionally requires the port number that will stand instead of the original port number when incoming packet is being forwarded If this field is left empty the original port number will be used when forwarding the packet Restriction radio buttons e Selecting Any blocks or allows all host IP addresses This selection is not present for the Management Access Blocked and Allowed IP List rules e Selecting Single IP will require the IP address of the allowed Main System User Conferences Telepheimy merna Uplink Nebaotk Add Filtering Rules Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding In ondar le prevari Malconfquation an cid Pu par Service i ited POW Can use Farag 16 inthpdd soetnal IPaddnas erpeaons amp Slicy a lhe g Filter Administrator s Menus Eep yal Toeka 6 fr thig PUR You Shoo oih Create nalga Tat and or blocked host Service ALON e Selecting IP Mask will require the subnet to be allowed or blocked specified by an IP address and the Maskbits The following are Maskbit examples 255 0 0 0 8 255 255 0 0 16 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 255 32 e Single URL requires the hostname of the allowed or blocked host Faraid fox IF Pod Trarnetatigrn Rasiichon Desorption For omet w hone Swe Bac
191. e A me en 96 AN T E EEE S E EE E S 102 Global Speed Dial Directory sssssssrressrrrresrresrrrrsrrrrorrrrrrrrrrstrrrotnrrttn rtnn rrer r rror n rrer rnrn Sr rEr S rnrrRP REENER NENDE NEER n Enn rn nnnt 103 Allowed Characters ana WHOCaTOS reer er eer ere rere rere rer ere rrr er errs artnet EEEE EEE EEE 104 Bost Par MT FL ON NM assier ii AAAA AA AAAA AAAA AAAA EE E uaa aaa E a 105 VOPR Caren Na E E T E T AT 107 RADIUS Chent SeN se nh eee E EE E eer ee E E E 108 Voice Mail Common SettingS ssssssrrsssrrrrsrrrrerrrrrsrrrrstrrretnrrr trti otr DDE AEE SEEDED EEE SEED DEE E SESS SESE E SESS DEES ESS SEEEE EES S GEESE EEEE nnne 109 Bite Bd slags scale a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee E 110 PECA N eee Te Terre Teer rr Terr err eT Teter te ee rer errr rere rrr TT rte 110 PSP Slee NC e WIS sooo pcc secs ssceceessucscunsasenueceesseueueceenesneoeeseraescoeareseeoeeegesateecccuceuacscesccis lt eeeaneseceuneeuneseenacaeeene 111 Call Recording Settings retiree nese nee cae tends NENN ENANA AAN ARAALE REAREA ARERR RANNAALA AARAA 111 TE e E a E E E E E 113 PRPA od ce UN cameo 8 16 A AE E A A E E ETE E E E E AE 113 Advanced PPFP SCINS en a A A A A AE ae ne eee 113 VENC OTOU O E ER E E E E E A S 114 Dyna Mic DNS SEUNG Scere cece NRTA AEE send AE EEEE EERE ERRER E EE TA 120 alga el A NAT aa E A 121 Advanced Fire wall SeN serrer i ae Tee TECE EEA ia AAA EAA ltl AAAA EAA EEE EE EE a kbp e a 122 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide PU
192. e IP Policy Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Specify the policy routing rule priority in the Priority text field Enter the packet source IP address and subnet mask in the From text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previously entered IP address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address To text fields Press the Save button to make the policy route with these settings oS To Add a VPN Route Select the VPN Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the VPN Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the VPN connection from the Route Via drop down list Enter the destination IP address and the subnet mask into the Route To text fields Press the Save button to make the VPN route with these settings le male ll a Configuration Management The Configuration Management page assists the administrator with managing the system configuration settings and voice data For example the administrator is able to backup and download the settings to a PC and then upload and restore them back to the Quadro Additionally this page provides the possibility of restoring the factory default configuration settings don fini ike fees lsbpnak Baspa igih Waat Configuration Managenent eo eee he ee aa The Backup amp Automatically Download all config amp voice data link leads to the Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page where the
193. e Quadro in the way of legible file to make necessary changes in that file and to upload it back to the same or different Quadro s With this service some pieces of configuration like extension settings NAT settings etc of one Quadro can be used on another Quadro This also helps to apply the same group of settings to the several instances for example to apply the same SIP settings to multiple extensions on the Quadro on the same or different Quadros avoiding manual configuration of each of those instances i e extension from the web management on each of the Quadros The Quadro reseller distributor ISP or carrier usually uses this service The Download current configuration in a legible format link refers to the Configuration Summary page where a partial or complete configuration can be defined and downloaded or viewed The Configuration Summary page is used to generate a piece of legible configuration and to download it to a PC or to view it directly in the browser This page consists of the following components The manipulation radio buttons are used to select between particular CGI or a named group of CGls for which the legible configuration file will be generated e The Specific CGI selection allows you to choose a certain CGI from the list of Quadro s Web management pages for which the legible configuration can be manually managed For example selecting RTP Settings will generate a legible configuration file with parameters pres
194. e at once The page consists of the following components Type checkbox is used to select the type of the extensions User Extension Pickup Group Call Park Paging Group or Attendant to be created QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 56 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Quantity text field requires the number of extensions to be created at once For example inserting 5 in this text field will add 5 new extensions to the Extensions Management table Start from the Extension text field requires the number of the first new extension to be created Depending on the value in the Main Sreem Users Conferences Telephony antermeL Ugak Network Quantity text field the next extensions to be created will have subsequent numbers For example if you have inserted 41 in Extensions Management Add Multiple Extensions this text field and the Quantity text field contains the value 5 then extensions 41 42 43 44 and 45 will be added to the Extensions Management table If non digit symbols have been entered the error Incorrect Extension no symbol characters allowed will appear If an extension with the given numbers already exists in the Extensions Management table a next subsequent not used extension number will be used instead Please Note Extension cannot start with the digit 0 You can add extensions of up to 20 digits long However the Call Routing won t be adjusted automatically you may need to manu
195. e es aie ee ees eee oe oe cannes ee eaeuneeeneneane 77 Generate And Install New CA ROOU Certificate vic vessceceaessereveree ewes evaseesyesereeeseyeyeseeenee evan EED A NE Ea EEE EEEE E 77 PE a RNG a T E sg eas soeeaadaseoscasaqecoo 77 IOP Var a a S a E EE ATTS 79 GNE a I E EEE EE E E E E e rrr E EEEE E ee ee ee 80 Onboard Line Settings cece cee een EEE EEE EE EE DEE otr EE DEE EE EE EEE DEAE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE DEES EE ECDSA EE ESSE SESE E SESS EEE REENER EEEE 81 Magea ERE a E e EPEE E E E et E E N T E ee ee ee ee eee 82 PO Ch aP PHONG areren esanean essa estes T EEEE 84 Programmable keys ielaiile Ulgcia lol Seen nett eke EAEEREN E 85 I POSS TEND SS eects ere a tcdicescauedyetet cesta teetidatendaeiaes E 85 IE PRODO C OG tree E EEEE crane nearer eka Lda E E E E E EEA 86 FXS Gateway Management ssassassanssnsansnnsnnsnnsensnnsnnsnnsensnnransnnsensnnsnnsnnsansnnsntsntnntNAnNAENANNANNANANAARSARSRRSRRSRRDnRO 86 Loopback SettingS s sssrrssrrsrsrrrrsrrrretrrrrtrrrrstrrretnrre tnr rr errr Str rr Enr EPA EEEOEAEESENEEEEAEEESAEENSEAEEEEEAEEESEEEESEAEEEEEEEEE REENE EEnnt 87 HOEDE I eea A A AA AAAA TAAS E S E EAA 88 POS EN O aE E A A AAAA TEA 88 ODN SSCA Sy e a S E EE A 89 External PSTN Gateways cccicccsnekcnnansivcnsiccnecsnctsndnsueksl Sadniededads madaledaseieialadatnbeledatedadaietedtanasesenaecdentesnbaledaaeieladanebedeieaass 94 O O O a E E EE AE EAA E E 94 MPR TUNNEL SENG aea A E ENE E EENE EE E E E EEEE E E EEA 95 CROO a
196. e on the first page of the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration page both for Aastra and Snom phones is used to set the correspondence between the selected Functions and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so assign a Function to each programmable key from the drop down list on this page The following options are available in the Functions list e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro and a possibility to pickup the call addressed to that extension e Call Park Ext watch the calls parked to the corresponding extensions and a possibility to retrieve the calls parked to that extension This list also contains a number of PBX services available on the Quadro and accessible with the key combination see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this page the key combinations become transparent for the IP phones too e Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call e CallBack calls back to the last caller e Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro e CallBlk
197. e recording is started stopped paused or resumed Recorded conferences are listed in the Recorded Conferences page accessible The Recorded Conferences page displays a table where recorded conferences are listed The recorded conferences can be played and deleted from this page The Recording free space field displays the free space allocated for the aor CREST CE Ramen Eep ygi corresponding conference aundi The New recordings field displays the number of new recorded conferences in the recording box All new recordings are marked in bold Recorded Conferences The All recordings field displays the number of all recorded conferences in the recording box including new and played recordings Conference ID 111 The Check Recordings functional link refreshes the recording box with any latest recordings if any Recording free space 6hour 38 min 59 sec Check Recording N lings 5 All lings 5 The Recorded Conferences table displays all the recorded conferences ies mined with the following parameters Delete Select all Inverse Selection Date amp Time shows the initiation date and time of the recorded conference 29 Feb 2008 11 23 53 7 min 20 sec Duration shows the duration of the recorded conference in 27 Feb 2008 15 41 34 59 sec minutes seconds 27 Feb 2008 15 39 29 7 sec Play by clicking on the speaker sign beside every record in the table PEPEE as the recorded conference will be played using the available media iaia cas pla
198. e users to use the pickup service can be defined ha r Main Syelern Users Conferences Teleparorey bdiarmei Liplink Het era C Py H Access List of Extension 67 Add Cii pahis Sajati j bree oe iaer ql The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to pickup the calls ringing on the extensions from the Pickup Group Fig Il 85 Access List of Extension page for Pickup Group The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the available call types PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions Mam System Users Conferences Telephony internet Uplink Net woik Access List Add Entry SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls from global telephone network Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be parsed through the Fig Il 86 Access List of Extension Add Entry page for Pickup group Call Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP ad
199. eckbox to allow the system to identify the modem tones correctly Otherwise the modem connection may fail Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls checkbox enables the usage of your own preferred codecs if available on both peers Secure RTP Settings are used to configure secure voice over IP communication on the Quadro The SRTP Policy drop down list is used to select the secure IP connection policy For IP phones the following options are available e Make and accept only secure calls only the secure calls will be generated and accepted e Make and accept only unsecure calls only the unsecure calls will be generated and accepted e Try to establish secure calls accept anything system will try first to establish secure call but will fallback to unsecure call if party doesn t accept secure calls both secure and unsecure incoming calls will be accepted as requested by remote party with the preference given to establishing secure call e Make unsecure calls accept anything system will establish unsecure outgoing calls but both secure and unsecure incoming calls will be accepted as requested by remote party For Auto Attendant the following options are available e Accept only secure calls only the secure calls will be accepted e Accept only unsecure calls only the unsecure calls will accepted e Accept anything both secure and unsecure incoming calls will be accepted For bandwidth used by secure calls see Neede
200. ection of an IP address ree that has been previously used This will avoid SIP Clipboard the user needing type it again The clipboard can hold up to 10 SIP addresses and a new SIP address will replace the oldest one from the list In connection with the tables the following are the few buttons you will see Functional Button Add Allows adding a new record to the displayed table A new page will be displayed to enter any new settings Allows modifying the settings of the record selected by a checkbox Normally only one 1 record may be selected A new page will be displayed to enter the modified settings Deletes the selected entry s of a table A warning message will ask for confirmation before deleting an existing entry Select All Selects all table entry s for example for further deletion Inverses opposites an existing selection of table entry s If no entries are selected clicking the button will select all records May be shown in the upper right corner of a page It displays the number of seconds remaining until the next refresh of the Refresh in l page will occur It may be used to reload the page manually Most of the tables offer the option to sort the entries in ascending or descending order by clicking the headings of the columns A small arrow next to the column heading indicates the direction of sorting upward or downward The entries of the table can be selected by using the corresponding Inverse Selectio
201. ectivity and the destination must be reachable Non Permanent Call Back configuration service allows trusted caller to organize one time Call Back to the defined destination In this situation no entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller can use 0608 menu see Feature Codes to modify the Call Back destination for already registered callers in the Authorized Phones Database The system will ask to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in the Call Back settings After login caller should follow the voice instructions for reconfiguring the existing entry in Authorized Phone database The caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the caller will be reconnected to the Quadro s Auto Attendant QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 66 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note For both Permanent Call Back and Non Permanent Call Back the detected caller number must correspond to the one configured for trusted caller In case of PSTN call back at least one PSTN line must be available on the Quadro There must be network connectivity and the destination must be reachable ACD Management Attenti
202. ed After the reboot of master device the Active Device T Mode on the backup device should be changed back to Active TAEAE to restore the redundant network functionality Manati Radundancy R utir D FCapbood Srenchnonization inira Back Router ID text field unique ID values 1 and up identifying master and backup devices The same value must be set on both Quadros Virtual IP Address text fields require the virtual IP address of the device where the configuration is done Virtual Subnet Mask text fields require the virtual subnet mask of the device where the configuration is done These two parameters identify an alternate IP network of the LAN interface which stays unchanged when the device switches its mode from master to backup or vice versa The configuration and voice data synchronization daemon uses this IP address to communicate with the second Quadro Redundant Device Virtual IP Address text fields require an alternate IP address of the LAN interface of the second Quadro Synchronization Interval text field requires the period of time in seconds between two consecutive configuration and voice data synchronizations from master to backup device Backup Device GUI Access Port text field is present on the master device only and requires the port used for accessing the GUI of the backup device through master Swap Master Device button is used for manual swapping of functionality of master and b
203. ed and submitted The Codec Properties table lists all codecs with the corresponding packetization interval and information about silence suppression Edit opens the Edit RTP Settings page where the codec settings can be modified To use Edit only one codec may be selected at a time otherwise the One record should be selected error message appears QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 77 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Packetization Interval is the time interval between two RTP packets of the same stream If the interval is increased the overhead is decreased but the voice quality may deteriorate as a result If the interval is decreased the network load is increased and the delay is reduced Silence Suppression disables RIP packet transmission in case of no voice activity This feature helps to avoid extra traffic if the RTP stream contains no voice activity It is activated after two seconds of silence and restarted immediately if any audio appears The G 726 Standard radio buttons are used to select between packaging the G 726 codewords into octets If you experience problems with the G 726 voice quality when one of these Man System Users Confaences Teh mermat Uplink RTF Settings Elit Pr opetnties Administrator s Menus Hataeik Packetization interval Since suppression the ADPCM Speer hi piding Al AA Ko ra GTIP ADPCM speech ooding af 37 khia r
204. elect whether a specific or any available FXO line will be used to route the call The Any Any selection indicates that the call will be routed through the first available FXO line The Specific Ports selection is used to select a group of routing settings for shared FXO lines Each Shared Gateway Ports radio buttons group is dedicated to one shared FXO device and is used to configure shared FXO lines usage when using the corresponding routing entry None selection means no shared FXO lines will be used for the call routing of the specific routing rule Any Port ipaddress where ipaddress is the IP address of the FXO gateway that shares its FXO lines selection means the call will be routed through the first available shared FXO line FXO ipaddress port checkboxes are used to select those which shared FXO ports will be used for the corresponding rule routing In case if multiple shared FXO ports are selected here the first available port will be used The FXO Lines Load Balancing drop down list is used to enable load balancing mechanism on the PSTN lines The None selection in this list means that no load balancing will be applied and the call will be routed through the first available PSTN line among the selected ones The Round Robin selection means that according to an internally gained statistics of most used PSTN lines the call will be routed to the less used and currently available PSTN line among the selected ones For ISDN destination type the
205. eleph erme Uplink Mert evon epysi system Events Sate Gems Event Settings unnt ysha Tine Mon Sep JA 15 51 54 F004 Erai Tii ia Piiri Apri aion Hmp poe Koprino The System Events table is the list of new and read system events System events have corresponding coloring depending on the nature of the event success priority 1 color green low importance failure priority 2 color yellow critical failure priority 3 color red The table shows the Status of the event new or read as well as the name of the application the event refers to event description and the date when the event was received For example if the event was caused by the IDS service the Check IDS link appears in the reference row that will lead to the IDS Log page or if the event has occurred due to incorrect mail sending or SIP registration the corresponding links will be seen in the Reference column of the table The administrator can view the detailed log for each event that has occurred The System Events page offers the following components Current System Time displays the local date and time on Quadro Mark all as read marks newly occurred events as read Reset LED switches off the flashing LED if applicable on the board An LED notification may appear depending on the notification type given in the page Events page when a new event occurs Fig ll 41 System Events list QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 24 QuadroM8L
206. elow e WAN IP Configuration e WAN Interface Configuration see below e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Seitings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Settings e DNS Settings The Switch to Auto Provisioning link moves you to the Automatic Provisioning page where Quadro can be configured automatically The Uplink Configuration page allows you to select the Quadro s WAN interface connection type and its bandwidth settings These settings will make Quadro available to the external network Man Sytem Users Comerences Teleqtruy fiternet Uptnk Netwotk Depending on the Uplink Interface Protocol selection the page following the Uplink Configuration page is different Thus if PPPoE is selected the next page will be PPP Configuration while selecting Ethernet will bring up the WAN IP Configuration page Internet Configuration Wizard Uplink Configuration The Uplink Configuration page offers the following components The WAN Interface Protocol radio buttons are used to choose the protocol depending on the requirements of the ISP Internet Service Provider PPPoE turns on the PPP over an Ethernet connection PPTP turns on the Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP interface used for the connection between Quadro and ADSL modem A fixed IP address configuration is needed in this case Fig Il 8 Internet Configuration Wizard Uplink Configuration page Ethernet turns
207. em default values The ISDN Wizard L2 amp L3 Settings is used for advanced configuration only and contains L2 amp L3 Settings This page only appears when the Advanced Settings checkbox is selected on the previous page of the wizard This page contains the following components ISDN L2 Timers e Excessive Ack Delay T200 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 500 to 9999 between the transmitted signaling packet and its acknowledgement received e Idle Timer T203 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 99999 for the ISDN client idle timeout ISDN L3 Timers e The T302 Timer text field requires the value for the T302 timer in milliseconds digit values from O to 15000 It indicates that the time frame system is waiting for a digit to be dialed When the timer expires it initiates the call e T309 Timer requires the value for the T309 timer in milliseconds numeric responsible for call steadiness during link disconnection within the period equal to this timer value If the value in this field is zero 0 the T309 timer will be disabled e T310 Timer requires the value for the T310 timer in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 120000 It is responsible for the outgoing call steadiness when CALL PROCEEDING is already received from the destination but 5 ALERT PROGRESS has not yet arrived e Alert Guard Timeout requires the value for the Alert Guard Timer in milliseconds
208. en tn ane ete eer ee err 56 Extension COdecS Sean rriro trnto tn rrt tnr rr errr Sr AENSPAEEESEEEEEAEESEAEEEPAEEESAEENSEAEESEEAEEEOEEENSEEEEEEREEEE EEEN rE EEnt 57 CaP S E O EE EET EA A open E E A T EEE E EEE ENEE EEE EEE E E A AE 58 Bare MS Ch VICE ET E AATA TT 59 uUplgad Universal Extension RECOrdINOS seater ttt rata ttt hati ae e IN 59 POCONO BO ea AAA A A E 60 Receptionist Management ssssrsrsrrrserrrrerrrrrsrrrrotrrrrtrrrrt rriro trnto tn rrt tn rrrS PENSE AEESENEEEPAEEEOAEEESEAEEEEAAEENSEEEESEEEEEE EEEE REENE EE EEnt 61 Esten Os Uy a EEE EAEAN AA ER EEA E A AAE ETEN AAA AE AEAEE 64 A thorized Phones Database siss asea assinnate akakaa E E EEA AAAA AAA AAEE EES 65 CBC e a T E E E E er ee ee eer 66 PED M M E r eee nema se ean enaneagaaageaagaaaganagaaageaagaaaaeaassaagaasansscemaaemaaem enema nee emeneeees 67 RO ttt YN Sc MN EA A AN AAA A A N AA A A E ANAN A A ed detocei det aontcet aces 70 Conterences Management assiriasirsriraisni ia A EA EEEE EAEE EEEE AATA ARRA 70 Mal BETE SUNOS a E I EEE E E 71 Telephony Menu vcicsaiciacciesasaastaseimencesasadasatnie saan cucatdantdeesasedaatdaadbansdeatdaatdeastastdaadsukecawepedasameldinend dead taatdasidaadbanidentiaakioas 72 Gre Mee es a i ol eee re eee E E eee 72 RIP S E a A E E A taNada aaa aad anAaaadaeaa 75 CE SNS a A A A CA eae raeeliiaes 76 SCA aes a eres ee van E clea ncsta ody Gaba basa edadsdacenenadnene ieee weeaeeweness 76 PO eM hs Os OE cic rire ieee ce eo ee ee cee ms ce ees ee
209. ence access to the conference The password inserted here should be used Moderator Password eeeeeee Confirm eeeeees by the moderator to join the conference Moderator is able to use conference codes during the active call conference as well as to access conference specific GUI pages and coordinate the conference Participant Password eeeeeee Confirm eeeeeee Max Duration minute 50 g view change conference properties activate deactivate it Seley ici A a contre start stop resume recording view conference statistics Confirm text L Leave Active field requires the confirmation of the Moderator Password Error appears if the password inserted in the Confirm text field does not ygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved match the one inserted in the Moderator Password text field Fig ILS General Settings Page Participant Password can be entered to require a password for participant access to the conference It has to be entered twice for confirmation The password entered here should be used by the participant to join the conference The participant can participate in the conference only according to the rights speaker or listener granted by the moderator Max Duration sets the conference to be limited to a maximum duration in minutes Leave the field empty for unlimited conference duration With the Play Hold Music Until Moderator is Connected checkbox selected participants connected to the conference will lis
210. ensions Such as phone numbers phone lines IP addresses and SIP numbers To get a word form that may be edited and sent by mail double click on the paperclip sidewise Welcome You are using a Quadro Voice Router made by Epygi Technologies Ltd This product incorporates SIPVoice Digital Signal Processing technology to send crystal clear voice around the globe without associated fees for long distance But you will soon learn it does much more Your Quadro Voice Router The Global Phone Network in a Box operates in much the same way as systems with which you are already familiar a telephone a PBX voice mail a phone book et cetera Beyond that the Quadro Voice Router provides capabilities you never believed were accessible in a customer premise telephony product Soon you will experience the freedom and power of the Quadro Voice Router The Global Phone Network in a Box To get started the following information is helpful PHONES Your extension number is lt extension number gt and your password is lt password gt optional Remember to type 00 when you pick up your phone receiver to find THE WELCOME SPOT 0O will take you directly to voice mail for your extension 74 will confirm your extension number LOCAL PHONE LINES QuadroM8L M26x offers two external phone lines They are lt 1 local phone line gt lt 2 local phone line gt IP To reach your Quadro Voice Rrouter from a network connection inside your office h
211. ent can be enabled for both custom and default attendants Please Note The Attendant Ringing Announcement is played to SIP to extension and PSTN to extension calls only The announcement can also be played to SIP attendant SIP and PSTN attendant SIP calls if they are made by a call routing rule for which the RTP proxy is enabled The group offers the following components The Enable Ringing Announcement checkbox enables disables the Auto Attendant optional announcement message When this checkbox is selected but no custom announcement message is uploaded the default message will be played to callers Upload new Attendant Ringing Announcement indicates the file name used to upload an announcement The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new announcement The Download Ringing Announcement and Remove Ringing Announcement links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Ringing Announcement link is used to download the announcement file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specif
212. ent on the RTP Settings page e The Named Group of CGls selection allows you to choose among the four predefined groups Internet Connection Settings LAN Configuration Settings Telephony General Settings and Extension Settings Each of these groups refer to all CGls characterized by the selected criteria e g Internet Connection Settings group contains all parameters on the CGls related to the networking and WAN configuration Configuration Summary The Extension drop down list allows you to limit the settings in ppr 5 the generated legible configuration file to one specific extension For example each of the extensions on the Quadro have own z SIP settings or Codecs To download the settings for a particular ean prertng uptet cniemoe na extension only you need to choose the corresponding extension from the list The drop down may also have a blank selection In that case the legible configuration file will contain the parameter of all available extensions on the Quadro if the selected parameter applies to the extension and not to the overall system like RTP settings The Start generate a legible configuration file button start parsing the configuration structure of the device for the defined parameters The progress will be displayed in the area below Fig Il 38 Configuration Summary Parameters page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 22 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Cancel generation process button
213. ern al Settings Reasons Authentication Caller ID Modification Type UES LURP eri Description E111 1 Enameni Sta trunk E1 T1 Trunk1 Timeslots 1 15 17 31 Any PBX LI an casos E1 71 a Of 2 Enabled 9 NDS 1 trunk E1 T1 Trunki Timeslots 1 15 17 31 Any PBX 10 Make PSTN Call O 3 enabiea 8 SIP Nps sip epygi com 5060 None URP Yes 10 Make SIP call 8 C 4 Enabled 00 None Call To Attendant O s Enabled None No Call to Extensions NDS Number of Discarded Symbols UES Use Extension Settings RNSC Restrict the Number of Simultaneous Calls URP Use RTP Proxy AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting DT Date Time Back Copyright C 2003 2009 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 183 Call Routing table brief preview Defining patterns in the Call Routing Table avoids registering Quadro at the routing management server and gives you an option to establish a direct connection to the destination or to use a SIP server for call routing The Call Routing Table lists manually defined routing patterns along with their parameters pattern number state routing and source caller settings RTP Proxy and Date Time period settings metric and description as well as automatically created and undeletable patterns created from the system Configuration Wizard If the ISDN trunk settings ISDN interface type signaling type etc have been changed after defining the corresponding route i
214. erver awe Tack peta Beg Tar a a La ig hs beer Fig Il 102 Extensions Management Edit Entry Recording Box Storage Settings The FTP Settings group is used to define the FTP server settings where the recordings will be uploaded if configured accordingly Server Name text field requires the FTP server name Server Port text field requires the FTP server port number Username and Password text fields require the FTP server authentication parameters Path on Server text field requires the location on the server where the recordings will be stored Naming Scheme text field requires the naming scheme of the files to be uploaded to the FTP server This scheme helps to distinguish files among others and to avoid possible overwriting of the files This text field may contain any distinctive text and also offers a list of variables caller_dispname caller s display name caller_username caller s username caller_fullname caller s full name in the username host port format callee_dispname called user s display name callee_username called user s username callee_fullname called user s full name in the username hosi port format duration duration of the call time_hour hour when the call recording started time_min minute when the call recording started time_sec second when the call recording started date_year year when the call recording started date_month month when the ca
215. es Telephony ivteneet Uplink Network pyel qn FA Pe cared aul Conferences Management Ach EE Astin Eereeie iima Sebel a ee Seber aon Dis p l ay Name an y O pt ional information about the Duscription FIP Address Pacemmga of Syste Memory Codecs CO nfe re nce g O abe Windy cali Discussion of Wieoky issues SHARES ip oppo com Aad boicie 44h Description any descriptive information about the Ow Remote Training Reseller Training ansan emoioesesn Jame 1 conference O 485 Wtarkoting call Sales and Marketing Cuscussion 20844atsip epepi loc Sii fod acy a mak SIP Address displays the SIP address of the conference Tl Mbit ree ee or hij Ai ighi iriaren Fig Il 131 Conferences Management page Status indicates the status of the conference Active Non Active or Waiting Clicking on the conference status link will display the Conference Progress page with detailed information about the conference status participants in the conference and description of each participant This page additionally allows the administrator to drop a participant from the conference or invite new participants It also allows the moderator to start stop resume pause the conference recording and to terminate the conference Percentage of System Memory indicates the conference related memory space in percents dedicated to conference recordings and the conference specific custom system messages Codecs column lists the short information f
216. es in the list Only one VLAN interface can have DHCP service activated Edit functional button opens a page where the corresponding VLAN interface can be configured and controlled This page contains all the same components as the DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface page does VLAN Settings link moves to the page where virtual LAN WAN interfaces may be created VLAN Settings page lists all existing virtual interfaced created on the Quadro and allows you to create new interfaces Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to correspondingly enable and disable the selected virtual interface s Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new virtual network can be defined The page consists of the following components Enable checkbox is used to select whether the corresponding virtual interface will be enabled or disabled after it is created Interface Type manipulation radio buttons selection allows to choose whether the virtual interface will be LAN or WAN VLAN ID text field requires the virtual network ID Numeric value in a range from 0 to 4094 is allowed in this field Priority drop down list is used to select the priority of packets in the corresponding interface Packets with the lower priority 0 will be delivered first IP Address text field requires the IP address of the virtual interface Subnet Mask text field requires the subnet of the virtual interface Registration Form The Registration Fo
217. es will list either the MAC address corresponding to ren each network interface on the Quadro or the PPTP L2TP and SIRT IPSec peer IP address if an active VPN IPSec or PPP IP Links Reniatranon Status interface exists License Status Monitor includes links to survey LAN WAN IPSec and PPP traffic correspondingly The VPN traffic link will be displayed only if a VPN has been configured The selection of these links will open a new window with a table of network traffic statistics on the following selected interfaces e Received Bytes e Transmitted Bytes e Received Packets e Transmitted Packets e Received Errors e Transmitted Errors e Received Drop Errors e Transmitted Drop Errors e Received Overrun Errors e Transmitted Carrier Errors e Received MultiCast e Transmitted Collisions Fig Il 14 Quadro Status Network Status page Packets When opening the corresponding interface statistics window no traffic values are displayed at first After opening the window the tables will serve as a counter and traffic statistics will be updated every minute DNS Server Alternative DNS Server and Default Gateway these display the Quadro settings corresponding to what has been configured with the System Configuration Wizard Services NTP Server and Client DHCP Server and Client DNS Firewall NAT PPP IDS statuses shows if they have stopped or if they are still running The View VPN Status link refers to the VPN Configuration page whe
218. essly provided for by this Agreement 2 Ownership By paying the purchase price for the Licensed Materials you are entitled to use the Licensed Materials according to the terms of this Agreement The Licensor however retains sole and exclusive title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials regardless of the form or media in or on which the original Licensed Materials and other copies may exist You acknowledge that the Licensed Materials are not your property and understand that any and all use and or the transfer of the Licensed Materials is subject to the terms of this Agreement 3 Term This license is effective until terminated This license will terminate if you fail to comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement or you transfer possession of the Licensed Materials to a third party in violation of this Agreement You agree that upon such termination you will return the Licensed Materials to the Licensor at its request 4 No Unauthorized Copying or Modification The Licensed Materials are copyrighted and contain proprietary information and trade secrets of the Licensor Unauthorized copying modification or reproduction of the Licensed Materials is expressly forbidden Further you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or electronically transfer the Licensed Materials or translate the Licensed Materials into another language under penalty of law 5 Transfer You may sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials
219. estination The IP Static Routes table displays all established IP static routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route SO IO Seo ONEN TY OTIRA Sener connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet where the incoming packets should be routed to and Via IP Address for the router IP address where incoming packets should E Sti Howtos be routed through Se S Aa S Da DSa IP Static Routes Add opens the Add IP Static Route page where a new static route can be established Enable Disable is used to activate and deactivate a selected route s At least one route should be selected in order to use these functions otherwise the following error message will appear No record s selected Fig Il 30 IP Static Routing table Man System Users Conferences Teleploty beter net Uipiedk Network The Add IP Static Route page offers the following components Route To requires the IP address and subnet mask for the Add IP Static Route destination the IP packet should be forwarded to 16 IP Clipdoard Via IP Address requires the IP address of the subsequent router 2 ie ls Ce ietoaed_ for IP packet forwarding to the specified destination Attention The rule with the longest subnet smallest IP range will take effect when having two or more IP Static routing rules i a an ye Fig Il 31 Add IP Static Routing page with the coincidi
220. et ee PPTPILZTP Configuration paidon PEIE Sere Confimnations LiTE Serer Conigurabons Please Note The first address specified in the PPTP Subnet suse 172 iio will be assigned to the PPTP server others will be assigned to the clients The PPTP server subnet should be different from the L2TP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error message will appear Aniem iin LE The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are used to select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected Hap Fig Il 218 PPTP Server Configuration page The L2TP Server Configuration page is used to configure the L2TP server settings and provides the following input options The L2TP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address range for the L2TP server and clients within the L2TP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict the possible number of clients for the L2TP connection Man Sian User Conferences Teleqlinnany helen rrei iink Haiek epygi ia ude Ss PPTPILZTP Configuration AOUMbon LEIP Gime Comtane mii Please Note The first address specified in the L2TP Subnet will be assigned to the L2TP server others will be assigned to the clients The L2TP server subnet should be different from the PPTP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error
221. ettings page 4 Remote Settings This group is used to configure SIP Remote Extension functionality This is an advanced telephony feature that allows Quadro users to remotely operate Quadro Users need to register a hardware or software SIP phone on the Quadro by defining the Quadro s global IP address and an appropriate Username Password A registered SIP Remote phone can act fully as a phone connected locally to Quadro i e it can use Quadro s PBX features place and receive calls access voice mails etc The Enable checkbox activates the SIP Remote Extension s functionality Please Note SIP Remote Extension functionality may be enabled only for active attached to an onboard FXS or IP line extensions Identification parameters used by the remote SIP device for registration on the Quadro should be defined in the Username and Password text fields Line Appearance text field requires a number of simultaneous calls supported by the SIP phone When the Enable RTP Proxy checkbox is selected incoming and outgoing RTP streams to and from the remote SIP phone will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will be moving directly between peers When the Fallback To Local Extension When Not Registered sn i ee me AE TORET sani checkbox is selected incoming calls towards the corresponding extension on the Quadro will be forwarded to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise when the remote SIP
222. executed depends on the radio button selected above a Mande a TED is Di eS OE Fig Il 52 Upload Configuration page Networking Tools The Networking Tools page provides the possibility to check the Internet connection Ping sends four ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol requests with a default size of 64 bytes to the destination IP address or host name specified in the text field Ping Target The response times are logged and the round trip time the time required from being sent until being received again is measured The minimum and maximum round trip time and its average as well as the percentage of lost and of received frames results are displayed in the lower area of the page Traceroute checks the Internet connection by triggering the routers hops that are passed to reach the destination specified in the Traceroute Target text field Trace routing gives feedback on the routers passed by packets on the way toward the destination and the round trip delay of packets to these routers Attention No Traceroute is possible if a high priority Firewall has been enabled see chapter Firewall and NAT For the purpose of tracerouting several IP packets are sent out UDP User Datagram Protocol is used to send packets and ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is used to receive information about the routers In their headers the TTL Time To Live value increases from 1 to 30 When the first IP frame is received by the fir
223. f Missed Call Records 700 The Download All Call Statistics CSV format link is used to download whole displayed statistics in CSV Comma Separated Maximal Number Of Unsuccessful Call Records 500 Values formatted file Download All Call Statistics Download All Call Statistics CSV format The Download All Call Statistics old format link is used to bownioasan can satses is torman download whole displayed statistics in an old formatted file This file can also be viewed with a simple text editor but contains more intricately aligned content Copyright C 2003 2009 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved The Clear all Records button is used to clear all statistics Fig Il 137 Call Statistics Settings page records When the number of Call Statistics entries exceeds the numbers specified in the Statistics Settings page the oldest entries are being automatically deleted In order to keep the call statistics entries safe Quadro allows you to configure an automatic download service of the call statistics QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 72 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Automatically Download page is used to configure the automatic downloading of the call statistics Two options of downloading the call statistics are available uploading the call statistics file to the server or sending it to the mailing address This page consists of the following components The Enable Automatical
224. f configured receptionists with information about the attached IP lines and watched extensions Fig Il 111 Receptionist Management page Add opens the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard where the new receptionist phone can be created and configured The wizard consists of several pages The Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard IP Phone Model page has the following components ayy i Man Sean Uses Conferences Telephony iben met Uplink Beleak Py Sl Tia dies Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Description text field requires the description of the receptionist to be configured IF Frome Model The Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist The MAC Address text fields require the MAC Address of the corresponding IP phone MAC Address 12 Based on the selected IP phone model and the inserted MAC Flue Kickback Address the IP phone can be automatically configured by simple reset reboot for more information about IP phone configuration refer to the corresponding IP phone s users manual E Caneel The Attached IP Lines text field requires the numbers of Quadro s IP lines used by the receptionist The IP lines should be separated by commas Copyrigh C SO a Caw Teala r Lie Al righi rarahi Fig Il 112 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Phone Model The Use Session Timer enables the SI
225. features and functionality the example screens shown may not appear exactly the same for your particular Quadro IP PBX as they appear in this manual The example screens are for illustrative and explanatory purposes and should not be construed to represent your own unique environment Quadro s Graphical Interface describes to the Quadro s graphical user interface and explains all recurrent buttons Administrator s Menus explains the Administrator s management pages according to the menu structure shown on the main page of the Quadro management Administrator s Additional Features explains some input options for administrators only that may be selected from the extension user s main page Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator explains PBX features for administrator accessible from the handset Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page includes a form that allows the administrator to inform his extension user with all individually needed addresses and phone numbers Appendix System Default Values lists all factory defaults Appendix Moderator s Menus explains all menus that can be accessed and configured by conference moderators Applicable if the Conference Server feature is activated on system Appendix Software License Agreement includes the contract for using Quadro s hardware and software QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Quadro s Graphical Interface Quadro s Graph
226. ference itself and enables the correct behavior of conference termination e Allow Duplicated Participation checkbox allows multiple participants with the selected Caller ID calling address to join the corresponding conference This is applicable when different participants are using the same shared number to place a call The Edit functional button provides a possibility of editing multiple participants at the same time A Select to modify fields checkbox alongside the fields to be modified needs to be selected to submit changes otherwise the fields will not be updated New Participants Configuration Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technolog cpygi quadro Main Conference Conference Properties Participants Edit Entry Conference ID 308 Participant Name E SIP Address Tel number 20232 sip epygi com 11308 11248 sip epygi loc Epygi user Mail Address K oO Participant Type Speaker vl KI Confirmation Type Star b K O Dial Out K F Activate On Dial In K M Participant Indication K Cl Nested Conference oO O Allow Duplicated Participation ies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 14 Participants Multi Edit Entry Page This page is used to configure settings of participants independently dialed in to the conference Once the new participant connects the conference he will automatically appear in the Conference Progress table and remain there unless di
227. fers to the page where voice messages used in the uploaded custom scenario should be managed QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 55 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Predefined manipulation radio button selection allows you to switch the Attendant to the ACD Agent Scenario see ACD Management Attention This selection is only available if the ACD feature is previously activated from the Features page Main Syaa Whara Conferences Telephony iineinen iplik Hanank Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages This page provides the possibility of uploading voice messages to be played in the custom Auto Attendant scenario It also removes Attendant 00 and downloads the uploaded files to a PC The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page contains a table where uploaded custom voice messages are listed Use the Download functional button to download and use Remove to delete the corresponding custom voice message inadiaihalle war Browse opens a file chooser window to browse for a custom voice message for an archive file with the tar gz extension containing the custom attendant scenario and the voice prompt recordings Fig Il 105 Upload Custom Voice Messages page The Attendant Ringing Announcement group allows uploading an optional voice message that is played to callers instead of ring back tones when making calls through an auto attendant The Ringing Announcem
228. field Enable SMTP Authentication if it is required on the server Insert into the corresponding text fields an authentication User Name and User Password defined by your SMTP server Press the Save button to submit these settings Use the Send Test Mail button to send a test e mail with the configured settings Sey PSPS SMS Settings The SMS Settings are used to configure the SMS parameters that will allow Quadro to send the voice mail notifications or event notifications via SMS to the extension user s mobile phone Every extension user can enable voice mail notifications when a new voice mail is received and they can to define their own mobile numbers from the Voice Mail Settings or to set the certain Events notification to be delivered per SMS However for Quadro to deliver SMS notifications the SMS service should be enabled and SMS settings should be configured from this page Man System Users Confenences Tepid fmerniat Uplink Hetecak SMS Settings Ucar Marne Feanl_wandanyan Passverond SME Sander Address rhe KCK a OMS RecipienlAddrete JTF IT HFS Enable SMS Service enables the SMS service on the Quadro User Name and Password text fields require the authentication settings of the SMS server SMS Sender Address requires the source address for the Quadro notification SMS The address defined in this field will be seen in the From field of the SMS delivered to the mobile phone SMS Recipient Address requires a de
229. figured Call Back and Remote Call Back Configuration Pre Configured Call Back For Pre configured Call Back a list of trusted callers must be configured in the Quadro s Authorized Phones Database using Web Management The Call Back service should be enabled and a valid callback destination should be specified for each caller To use Pre configured Call Back the caller registered in the Authorized Phones Database should simply call to the Quadro s Auto Attendant through SIP or PSTN let the call to ring twice and then hang up Call Back will be instantly activated and Quadro will call back to the defined Call Back destination By answering the incoming call caller will be connected to the Auto Attendant menu Please Note Depending on the call back destination make sure that there is at least one PSTN line routed to the Auto Attendant from the FXO Settings page or Auto Attendant has a proper SIP registration see Attendant Extension Settings Remote Call Back The Remote Call Back Configuration service is used by authorized callers to configure or reconfigure existing call back configuration on the Quadro Remote Call Back Configuration is divided into two modes accessible from the Quadro s Auto Attendant Permanent Call Back and Non Permanent Call Back Please Note Remote Call Back Configuration services are only available when the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox is disabled in Authorized Phones Database for the trusted user
230. from the ACD Agents Table with the exception of DND and busy states or by agent from the handset except for busy state The agent for changing the state to online offline away from the handset needs to call the predefined Auto Attendant see Attendant Extension Settings and on attendant s prompt enter the agent ID password and the status code The state changes from online to busy or vice versa automatically when the agent starts or finishes conversation Calculation of Composite Skill Grade Usually before the call arrives to the agent group it is first answered by ACD specific IVR The main function of IVR is follows via short questions to calling customer determine the set of skills required from the agent for best serving the customer On IVR s questions the customer answers by phone keystrokes DTMF digits each keystroke corresponding to some required skill After finishing the quiz IVR routs the call to AG along with information about the required skills set QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 67 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide To calculate the agent s composite skill grade AG sums up the grades of those skills of the agent that are included into the required skill set received from IVR The grades of the non required skills are not considered The composite skill grade of AG is the sum of composite grades of the online agents of that group Interactive Vo
231. g actions can be available Fig Il 43 Edit Event Settings page e Display Notification A notification link will be displayed on the bottom of all pages and a record is added into the Events table The notification is executed as a link Please Check you pending events The link leads to the System Events page This action also will take place if Flash LED or Send Mail has been selected even if not specifically selected e Flash LED The second LED yellow will blink every second and a notification will be displayed on the bottom of all pages For some events the LED will start flashing after a delay e Send Mail an e mail notification about the new event on the Quadro will be sent to the e mail address specified in the Mail Settings page e Send SNMP Trap an SNMP notification will be sent to the traphost s listed in the SNMP Trap Settings table see SNMP Settings Send SMS an SMS notification about the new event on the Quadro will be sent to the mobile phone specified in the SMS Settings page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 25 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Actions that are not allowed for the selected event like mail notification if the PPP link is down or the mail server has been configured improperly are hidden For multiple events editing actions that are not appropriate for least one of the selected events will also be hidden Please Note In case of an IDS In
232. g the file path to upload and to restore it immediately Pressing Save will restore the selected backup file and delete all current user defined greetings and replace configuration settings The Restore Default Configuration functional button resets all configuration settings and restores the board s factory default configuration By restoring the default configuration you will replace your current configuration lose all voice mails and reboot the device You will not be automatically redirected to the GUI start page After the successful reboot you will need to enter into the management page and login again to access the Quadro s configuration A warning message will ask you to confirm your selection before restoring the default configuration Please Note Unlike the factory default settings restore procedure initialized from the Reset button on the Quadro board this link will keep the following data e Call Statistics e Transfer Statistics e System Events e Feature Keys Device Registration state The Download current configuration in a legible format and Upload a legible configuration file links leads you to the Legible Configuration Management page where legible configuration can be downloaded and uploaded back after the required edits Legible Configuration Management The Legible Configuration Management is used to manually manage the configuration on the Quadro This will allow you to download a piece of configuration from th
233. ge in the list press No Line Settings The Line Settings are used to configure Quadro FXS and IP Line if available on the board settings The Line Settings page consists of two pages Onboard Line Settings page for onboard FXS lines configuration and IP Line Settings for IP Lines configuration QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 80 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Onboard Line Settings The Onboard Line Settings page is used to configure Quadro lines and to define the caller ID detection type configure remote party disconnect indication and select the ringer type on each of them Additionally this page provides an option to enable Loopback diagnostics on the lines The Onboard Line Settings page shows the table Available Lines where all active lines of Quadro are listed with their Attached Extension If the line is attached to an extension the corresponding extension number is displayed in this column otherwise none is displayed if the extension is not attached to the Man Syon Usas Conmerences Telephony eeemet pant Miniveni line By clicking on the extension number the Extensions Management General Settings page will appear where the line ioe Seting attached to the extension can be reconfigured Additionally the tobe metL mre Seti Stn sa table provides information about the selected Ringer Type and Avstatte Line Ate test batemens ates Heee fate Calle
234. gi com Agent Agent is the call center user answering the customers calls and reachable via Quadro due to ACD To receive the calls agent needs to be logged into some Agent Group AG Agent is characterized by the agent ID password skills levels and termination phone number Agent can be logged into several agent groups at the same time and receive the calls distributed by those agent groups For easy login logout to all groups where the agent is subscribed agent should use the 83 feature code from the handset ACD allows the system administrator to define the set of skills adequate to call center profile and grade the professional capabilities of each agent according to each defined skill The skill grading range starts from 0 and goes up to 10 with O meaning the absence of that specific skill and 10 meaning the highest level The termination phone number defines the phone assigned to agent In other words the calls on some termination number assigned to agent should be answered by that agent The agent may have only one termination number and changing that number will result in answering the calls to that agent in different location Agents are being managed from ACD Agents Table see ACD Group Extension Settings Agent Group Agent Group AG is actually a Quadro extension with enhanced capabilities The type of that extension in Quadro configuration is ACD Group see ACD Group Extension Seitings Except for regular attributes i
235. ging This logging contains brief information about events on the Quadro The Enable Developer Logging checkbox is used to enable developer high level logging This logging contains detailed information about events on the Quadro QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 32 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Log Lines to Show drop down list is used to choose the maximum number of log lines to display on the View System Logs page The Mark all Logs button is used to set a line marker in the logs if Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepyzi you need to follow a certain piece of log push this button to set a sate starting mark in all logs and then perform the needed actions over System Logs the Quadro When the actions are done push this button again to set an ending mark in all logs This way you shall clearly see a System Logs Settings System Remote Logs Settings View System Logs piece of log between the staring and ending marks generated Wi Enable User Logging during the certain actions taken over the Quadro The Comment text field is used to insert some text information which will be displayed next to the marks inserted in the logs This comment Log nes to Ghow 25 a may describe the problem captured in the following logs and may easement be useful for the Technical Support The Download all Logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar arc
236. h Quadro provider s NAT a e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer connection between _ crmacsesws Eim tissi ii nt nts men Quadro and peer over Internet through peer provider s Fig Il 209 IPSec Connection Wizard Add IPSec Connection NAT QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 115 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The next page of the wizard is IPSec Keying Properties which is used to select IPSec connection s security encryption settings Auto Keying requires the IKE Internet Key Exchange and ESP epvei Encapsulated Security payload settings defined Encryption Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepysi and Authentication parameters should be defined IPSec Configuration Wizard The Encryption drop down list offers the following standards for selection IPSec Keying Properties dsgfsd e Triple DES uses three DES encryptions on a single data block with three different keys to achieve a higher Internet Key Exchange IKE security than is available from a single DES pass block Aiai A cipher algorithm with 64 bit blocks and a 56 bit key PAn nRa MOS i Diffie Hellman Group Group 2 1024 bi e AES 128 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block ee een ee cipher which encrypts and decrypts 128 bit blocks of Encypton Triple DES _ data Authentication MD5 e AES 192 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block cipher which encrypt
237. h and within a Quadro are made according to call routing patterns that specify a destination based on a dialed number When a user dials a number to make a call the Quadro matches the dialed number against the existing patterns that are specified in the Call Routing table If the dialed number matches only to a single pattern this pattern will be used to set up a call If several patterns have been found to match the number the Quadro uses the Best Matching Algorithm to prioritize the matching patterns Once the patterns are prioritized the pattern with the highest priority will be used as a preferred route for call setup The successive patterns will be used only if the destination specified by a higher priority pattern is unreachable To prioritize the matching patterns the following criteria are sequentially applied to matching patterns The criteria are ordered by their priorities Each consecutive criterion is calculated only for the patterns that take the same value for the preceding criteria that is Criterion 3 is calculated only for patterns that take the same value for Criterion 1 and Criterion 2 a The presence of asterisks in a pattern Criterion 1 var The patterns without have a higher priority S The total number of matching digits symbols inside and outside the braces brackets riterion The more matching digits a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of matching digits symbols outside the braces bracke
238. has one Auto Attendant extension 00 which is undeletable Attention The system is limited to 400 extensions Once the number of extensions in the Extensions table reaches 400 there will be no more possibility to add new extensions The Extensions table is a list of all extensions and their parameters QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 37 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Main System Users Conferences Extensions Management Telephony Internet Uplink Network Add Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Hide extensions attached to disabled IP lines Reset SIP Settings Extension Display Name l Is S O G O _ Marina Manukyan Ashot Sargsyan Anush Mkhoyan Artyom Ghukasyan Upload Universal Extension Recordings Add Multiple Extensions Attendant Attached Line SIP Address 11000 sip epygi loc 5060 11010 sip epygi loc 5060 30256321 Proxy sip epygi com 5060 fF 11011 sip epygi loc 5060 IP Line 2 11020 sip epygi loc 5060 IP Line 9 11105 sip epygi loc 5060 IP Line 4 11151 sip epygi loc 5060 IP Line 5 11236 sip epygi loc 5060 Percentage of System Memory 1 1 hour14 min 11 sec 1 1 hour 14 min 11 sec 1 1 hour 14 min 11 sec 2 2 hour 28 min 22 sec 1 1 hour 14 min 11 sec 3 3 hour 42 min 34 sec 0 5 37 min 6 sec 0 5 37 min 6 sec Administrator s Menus Cepygi TQuadroM46 Call Relay Yes WWARNING password is empty PCMU 4
239. he System Configuration Wizard Add functional button opens an Add Host page where a new static MAC address binding can be defined The page consists of the following components Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in Main Systemi Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Habeak the Quadro s LAN MAC Address text fields require the MAC address of the device in the Quadro s LAN DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Add Host Hasinima quad eo Static IP Address text fields require a fixed IP address of awra GEG 7 aca the device in the Quadro s LAN Please Note If you leave this field empty the device in the Quadro s LAN will get the first available IP address from range defined in the DHCP Settings page see above Fig Il 239 Static MAC address binding Add Host page View DHCP Leases leads to the page where the DHCP leased LAN IP addresses are listed The DHCP Leases page includes a list of the leased host addresses that are part of the Quadro s LAN For these hosts Quadro acts as a server supplying them with a unique IP address It displays a read only table describing all the leased IP hosts and their parameters The table contains the following columns IP address host IP address assigned by Quadro MAC address host MAC address provided by the host itself DHCP Leases Main Syste lisma Conferences Tedegaliciny ienn pink hetrik Lease Start date and time when the leased IP addre
240. he available call types e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions e SIP calls through a SIP server e PSTN calls to a global telephone network e Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number a SIP address or a PSTN number will be reached through the Call Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address where the call will be redirected The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here For the Auto call type a routing pattern needs to be defined Upload new call queue welcome message allows updating the active Call Queue welcome message played when a caller joins the extension s call queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified
241. he handset or by downloading it from the Web management Please Note This service will work only when System Mail is enabled on the Quadro see Mail Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail delivery via email QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 133 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Additional Feature Send new voice message notification via SMS allows voice mail notification delivery via SMS to the defined mobile number Checkbox activates the following input options Mobile Number text field requires the destination s mobile number The next two fields are used for retransmission of SMS notifications The Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If notification is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field Please Note This service will work only when SMS Service is enabled on the Quadro see SMS Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail notifications delivery via SMS Send new voice message notification via phone call enables the voice mail notification delivery via phone call to the defined phone number The checkbox activates the following input options e Call Type drop down list includes the available ca
242. he selected template s settings can be adjusted Fig Il 160 IP Phones Templates Add Entry The Edit Entry page contains several subpages for each supported IP phone model for which the template can be managed Aastra configuration page contains the following components QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 85 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Local Dial Plan indicates the number and pattern of digits dialed by the user in order to reach a particular destination Send Dial Plan Terminator is used to switch a dial plan terminator or timeout When the IP phone is configured to use a dial plan terminator such as the pound sign the phone waits for 4 or 5 seconds after the handset is picked up or a key is pressed to place a call Play a Ring Splash is used to switch a call waiting tone when there is an incoming call on the BLF Busy Lamp Field monitored extension If the host tone is idle the tone plays a ring splash Snom configuration page contains the following components Dial Plan String indicates a dial plan string used to match dialed digits from the handset to the certain actions e g dialing Dialog Info Call Pickup is used to switch a subscription to the status information of SIP URLs mapped as Destination Extension on the programmable keys Transfer on Onhook is used to switch the call transfer when the handset is placed on hook Call join on Xfer 2 calls when this opti
243. hen the remote party being called is disconnected The Busy Tone Duration drop down list is used to select the period in seconds when a busy tone will be transmitted to the FXS port e The Enable Power Disconnect Indication checkbox enables the power cycling on the FXS line when the remote party being called is disconnected Power Disconnect is applied after the busy tone transmission on the FXS line The Disconnect Duration drop down list is used to select the period in milliseconds when the FXS line power will be down The Ringer Type drop down list allows you to select the frequency of the ringer supported by the phone attached to the line Information can be found on the phone enclosure or in the phone s manual Problems with the ringer might occur if the ringer type selected here does not correspond to the one supported by the phone Please Note The supported ringer type can be found on the bottom of the phone in the Ren x xN value where N is the ringer type supported by the phone For example if N A the TypeA ringer type should be selected if N B the TypeB amp Z ringer type should be selected The Enable off hook Caller ID checkbox enables Caller ID transmission to the phone in the off hook state attached to a certain line Service is applicable to the phones supporting the Call Waiting Caller ID feature The Enable Hot Desking Capability checkbox is used to enable the Hot Desking feature on the corresponding onboard analogue FXS
244. her type of uplink to the ISP A connection is needed to set up and make or receive calls through PPP over Ethernet The connection may be configured for manual setup or always up Once a connection has been established between the Quadro and the provider Quadro users will be able to make and receive calls at any time The PPP PPTP Settings page offers the following components The Advanced PPP Settings link refers to the same named page where certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment can be adjusted This link is not available when accessing this page through the Internet Configuration Wizard The PPTP Server text fields are only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and require the IP address of the PPTP server The Encryption drop down list is only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and it is used to select the encryption for the traffic over the PPTP interface Authentication Settings require the Username and Password used for the authentication on the ISP server Dial Behavior radio buttons enables the following selections e Dial Manually if this radio button is activated a button will be displayed in the main management window that Man System Users Conferences Todepthnny erred Uplink Meteor serves to switch the Internet connection on off When accessing the Internet every station of the connected LAN has to connect to Quadro first PPP PPTP Settings e Always
245. hive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro Cl Enable Developer Logging Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 58 System Logs System Logs Settings page Main Sysiem Usea Conferences Telephony ingeni Uplink Hietveork The System Remote Logs Settings page is used to adjust the l System Logs system logging settings and contains the following components HC LAGS NOS Siia eiai Laga i ii i Loss The Enable Remote Logging checkbox is used to enable remote EAA ES 5 Grable Cal Contreliieg Leg F Grable SIP User Ament Log monitoring of Quadro s logs When this option is selected remote administrators may connect Quadro with Telnet protocol port number 645 and access the logs selected on this page This is e Grable Media Seam Log yl Grane OSPF Log F Enable SIP Registration Log F Enable System Messages Log f f E Enable FOF Log H Grable Voice Mall System Lag done for remote Quad ro S diagnostics and IS mainly used by F Enable SPUC Agent Leg E Enab CAS User Log Epygi s Technical Support Office To make the Quadro s logs open E Enable CAS Net Log Enable ISON L Log for remote access appropriate Firewall level or Filtering Rules Enable ISDN LI Log must be created see lise Checkboxes below on this page are used to select those log types that should be ac
246. hrough the WAN an appropriate Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Filtering Rules should be added on the Quadro The Advanced link in the Details column appears for the Snom and Aastra IP phones and takes you to the Programmable Keys Configuration page where programmable keys for the corresponding IP phone can be configured QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 83 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Reboot link in the Details column appears for supported IP phones and is used to remotely initiate a reboot of an IP phone attached to the line Supported SIP Phones Below is the list of IP phones supported by Quadro and officially compatible with it The Plug and Play PnP feature is working for all IP phones listed below while Firmware Version Control FVC feature is working only for those phones which have a corresponding notice snom 190 Aastra 6730i also supports FVC snom 200 Aastra 6731i also supports FVC snom 220 Polycom SoundPoint IP 300SIP snom 300 also supports FVC snom 320 also supports FVC Polycom SoundPoint IP 330S IP snom 360 also supports FVC Polycom SoundPoint IP 331SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 335SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 450SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 501SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 550S IP Polycom SoundPoint IP 601SIP Polycom SoundPoint IP 650SIP Polycom SoundStation IP 6000 Grandstream BT200 Grandstream GXP2000 snom 370 also supports
247. i Subject lt subject gt Participants List Please Note Changing the body of the token will disable the Description lt description gt D A A i ici I I lt emained lime 0 Activation token functionality and will be implied as a simple text Participant passvord lt A tpessvora a eee ee The Restore Defaults button is used to restore the default mail i i i A a Save Back templates Using this button all user defined mail templates will be lost Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 134 Edit Entry General Settings page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 71 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Telephony Menu aE latii iie i Man System Users Conferences Telephomy kdenediipink Hetenah Ca epygl feeder Spek mh BS seed hi Sane Quadro 32x Management ATP Gems RAT Thrarisi Semmgi Achve Gallt Limp Dpming FAO Saige Cal ie tien Coll hack E T m Paty Chent Gair Wokoe kia Beco cing Coda Dia Timea IPCC Singa Ditt Cuitestly Logped bas Gein Cite Les LeU eee LEE Le AP Eriimira Carrel a X j l J k aG ein Etom LSS eE Ul expires LISI hnil Doren iius DHCP Chiar en P a idee 7 Gath Cig Lee Lee sle Sepited Lage Fee BR P aces Caprag a ee fee Dale Fig Il 135 Telephony Menu in Dynamo Theme Fig Il 136 Telephony Menu in Plain Theme Call Statistics The Call Statistics page displays four table
248. i infennalion message configurations per extension M Sand datetime intsemaden messspe Grable Fa Redirection E Sand beep atthe end of mas Rage Each Voice Mail Profile may have custom voice mail greeting Redirect extension maximum voice mail duration new voice mail notifications and Fl sient vu recordin TETES Zero Out settings The Voice Mail Profiles are activated based Fiend new voice massages wia e mai a on the call routing rule used to establish a call This is limited maiste A Upload new oul of oios greeting fle iimedaaoiici wav to the PBX Voicemail type of calls used for a direct access to the extension s voice mailbox The Voice Mail Profile name a ad ue should be provided in the Call Routing wizard when defining a wee ard ET PBX Voicemail routing rule When the rule is used caller a ae a accesses the called extension s mailbox with the settings ieee configured in the corresponding voice mail profile a aii Repeat ewer 1 m n With this service you can pre configure several versions of maiman 1 nmas Voice Mail Settings and save them as Voice Mail Profiles For example if a call is originated from the PSTN network to the corresponding extension s voice mailbox the greeting message can tell the caller You have reached the company please leave a message and the maximum voice e Send rew voice message nolficalions via phone call Calpe Sire ms Calio Daigai com S1F Capeoand mail duration is configured to 15 m
249. iad The Hardware Status table displays a list of the hardware devices and parts present and currently available on the Quadro board The hardware device version number and additional comments about its state are indicated here Fig Il 26 Hardware Status page SIP Registration Status Map Sya Users Comte ences Teheplronry bAernat Uptrd ACTELE Quadro Status SIP Registration Status 7 f Frege Hien om SIP Servers The SIP Registration Status is a table displaying the SIP registration ath Crtenaten Gentes Senne information of the Quadro extensions Ser 677508941 sipit tothoesa Reaetered featst ation Tane The table contains a list of all the registered extensions of the Quadro SIP registration name for each extension addresses of SIP servers where they are registered if applicable whether or not it is registered for each extension and the registration date and time By clicking on the row heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading YP Remte ation Stata The links inside the table will link you to the Extensions Management page where the SIP registration settings may be altered The Detected Connection Type field displays the connection type Quadro currently is acting in direct connection or behind NAT If Quadro is acting behind NAT the NAT machine IP address is also displayed The Registered IP Lines t
250. ical I nterface Administrator s Main Page When the administrator logs in the QuadroM8L M26x Management page is displayed with a table of active calls including information about call peers call duration and start time at the startup The number of total active calls is displayed above the table The button Terminate next to each active call is used to terminate the corresponding call The Start Recording button next to each active call except for calls to Auto Attendant is used to manually start the recording of the corresponding call Once the call recording is started the button changes to Stop now used to manually stop the call recording The call recording can be restarted again if needed him Spite ied Cole mi SuadroM 32x Management tive Cali yip Cali beeing ec cael Sep ees Fig Il 1 QuadroM8L M26x Management Here the administrator may access the following settings and perform the actions By clicking on System Users Telephony Internet Uplink or Network the administrator may access the following settings in each respective category and perform actions specific to each category The Install Checklist option in the Main Menu opens a page that lists the most useful actions and the corresponding hyperlinks for the Quadro s initial setup and configuration procedure From this page you can be linked to the appropriate pages where the corresponding configuration can be done Here you can also save your progress of Qua
251. ice Response system ACD IVR is a custom Auto Attendant see Attendant Extension Settings configured on Quadro with VoXML script and voice prompts designed for quizzing the customers determining the set of required skills as described above and routing the call to the agent group having the maximum current value of the composite skill grade for required set Since the general skill set is configured by ACD administrator and is application specific call center specific the VOXML script and voice prompts of IVR should be built taking into account the skill set configured by administrator ACD IVR is needed mainly in case if there are Agent Groups that are configured to do skills based call distribution between agents In such circumstances the IVR is quizzing the calling customer to determine the set of required skills and when handing over the call to ACD module it passes the set of skills required by calling customer Having that set the ACD module calculated the composite skill grade of each AG in the system and sends the call to AG having the highest value of composite skill grade The call in AG is handled according to call distribution type configured with that AG For example if the call distribution type of AG is skills based then AG will try to connect the call to the agent having the highest composite skill grade and if it is not answered within timeout the AG will try to connect to the next agent with the highest grade etc If the call di
252. ics page provides detailed information about the established call is provided When Quadro serves as an RIP proxy this page displays two groups legs of RTP statistics For example when calling from an IP Phone attached to the Quadro s IP line to an external SIP destination or from one external SIP destination to another through the Quadro s Auto Attendant Each group of parameters describes characteristics of a piece of RIP stream composing an overall SIP session Normally one leg describes the RTP stream from caller to the Quadro and the other leg describes the RTP stream from Quadro to the destination Quality estimated call quality which depends on RTP statistic Telephrorty derne Uplink Network Quality 1 excedenm Loca 172 50 58 15346 Remote 172 50 58 250 3000 Guatity 1 excellent Ax Codec PCM TX Codec PCM Received Packete 1248 Tranemitted Packets Received Packet Sire 160 Tranemutted Packet Sime 160 RX Lost Packets PX Jitter RX Maximan Delay RX Delay Increase Comi D RX Delay Decrease Count 0 Local 192 160 95 30346 Remote 853 139 17 1 7310 Ouaiity 1 bexcetient Ax Codec PCM TX Codec Received Packet 1768 Transmitted Packets Received Packet Sire 160 Transmitiad Packet Size 150 RX Losi Packets PX Jitter RX Marta Del PX Delay lncaease Count 0D Below is the legend for Call Quality definitions on the displayed RTP PX Detay Decrease Count 0 Statistics ISRAELIS excellent
253. ied The Remove Ringing Announcement link is used to restore the default ring back tones The Edit functional button provides a possibility of editing multiple Man System Uses Conferences Telephony termes Uyak Network extensions at the same time In this case fields that cannot be edited for multiple records have Multiple values in the Edit Entry page Extensions Management Edit Entry When editing user and attendant extensions together the Edit Entry page displays only those fields that are for both user extension and attendant settings Additionally for the fields that need to be modified a Select to modify fields checkbox alongside the corresponding field needs to be selected to submit changes otherwise the fields will not be updated ena si General Settings 1172 13 Contin Patsowond Delete removes the selected extensions If no records are selected i Allow Call Relay an error message occurs Deleting an extension from the Extensions Sree Table will automatically remove the name attached to the deleted y Porcuna orTowinimor E iy extension in Extensions Directory aa E The Upload Universal Extension Recordings link leads to the PERENNE E TEE page where universal default voice messages for all extensions are defined Fig Il 106 Extensions Management Edit Entry page for multiple edit operation Add Multiple Extensions The Add Multiple Extensions is used to add multiple extensions to the Extensions Management tabl
254. ied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with wildcards e lt dialednum range gt used to apply the complete or a part of dialed number the number dialed by the caller to place a call as a prefix For example lt dialednum 1 3 gt indicates that the first 3 digits of the dialed number will be considered as a prefix lt dialednum 3 end gt indicates that the dialed number from its 3 digit and up to the end will be applied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with wildcards The syntax aaa bbb in the Prefix field allows for two stage dialing The aaa and bbb are the numbers to call bbb can also be a series of digits to inject a comma indicates a delay of one second The syntax can be applied to include more call destination numbers separated by time intervals A two stage dialing allows successive numbers to be dialed one after another with a delay in between For example 11 11018 will call 11 wait until the call is established wait for three seconds and then dial 11018 The capability of automatically dialing successive numbers allows the caller to bypass the IVR system on the call path and establish a direct call The two stage dialing is available for PBX and ISDN destination types Suffix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be
255. ilt Incoming Calls and Outgoing Calls checkboxes are used to select whether the ISDN traffic statistics for only incoming or outgoing or for both type of calls should be displayed in the diagram chart Maximum Active Calls checkbox is used to have the number of maximum active calls displayed in the diagram chart At least one of these checkboxes should be selected otherwise error message appears Fig 11 23 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics page Mem Sy Uses Comteromces Tebepatentey Aesir pte Net woh Eep gl ISDN Channel Usage Statistics t Taree im test w A tela Aspiy Show button is used to generate an ISDN channels usage diagram chart over the parameters selected above When this button is pressed ISDN Channel Usage Statistics chart appears It represents dependency between the time frame and the number of calls performed during that period Additionally it may display the maximum number of calls performed in the selected time frame Fig Il 24 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics chart Memory Status i ri Man ymem Use Coferences Telephony Pyg Padah Findinsby ba BE hiara Quadro Status Memory Status Wair be 11 Gi 1a Aa 1 min a dec hers Space Tot Cetera aioa Malia Sien Mente er Sec Lota Spee NIG 7 her 0 rein ii see Maie Simit 2 cae 27 min 17 ga l 2 heer 29 pein 26 ger de it dh ur t min 40 det i Fear 48 min 40 dee EP Aeoraion c
256. indicates the interval in seconds between the NAT IP checking attempts used to distinguish the possible NAT IP address changes and to perform registration on the new host The value should be in the range of 10 to 3600 The NAT Exclusion Table lists all possible IP ranges that are not included in the NAT process but may be accessed directly IP addresses that are not listed in the NAT Exclusion Table are accessed over NAT For example if a Quadro user needs to make SIP calls within the local network as well as outside of that network all local IP addresses are required to be excluded from NAT traversal settings by being listed in this table Otherwise a malfunction may occur in SIP operations The NAT Exclusion Table page offers the following input options Each record in the table has a corresponding checkbox assigned to its row The checkbox is used to delete or to edit the corresponding record Only one record may be edited at a time An error message will appear if no selection is made or more than one is selected Each column heading in the table is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading Add opens the Add Entry page where a new IP range can be added The Add Entry page includes the following text fields IP address requires the IP address that is placed behind NAT within the local net
257. ing Wizard page 6 Men fete leer Br l Beet EE rk Can PYE Call Routing Wired Please Note Established patterns based on the Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings in the System Configuration Wizard will be marked in bold and will be placed in the first position in the Call Routing Table Additionally they cannot be modified and deleted from the Call Routing Table The Duplicate functional button is used to create a routing pattern with the settings of an exiting one This is to avoid configuring a new routing entry completely by duplicating an existing entry with different settings To use the Duplicate button only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row should be selected will appear The Duplicate button opens the Call Routing Wizard where all fields except the Pattern field are already filled in A Pattern for the new route will be required anyway The Move Up and Move Down buttons are used to move call routing patterns one level up or down within the Call Routing table The sequence of the routing patterns is important when making routing calls because the Call Routing table is parsed from the top down and routing will take place according to the first pattern that matches the dialed number The Move To button is used to move the selected entry to a different position in the Call Routing Table This will increase or decrease the selected pattern s prio
258. inistrator s Guide The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard consists of several pages and allows you to create a new PPTP or L2TP connection The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 consists of the following components Connection Name text field requires a connection identification name The name of the connection cannot start with a digit symbol however it can contain digits further in the name Connection Type drop down list allows to select the type of the connection PPTP or L2TP The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 2 consists of the following components The Peer Name text field requires the connection peer name If you are about to create a client connection then the server s name should be defined here If you are creating a server connection then the clients name should be defined here Please Note When creating a connection with a Windows Server ensure that a user with the Quadro s host name and Dial in access exists on the server When creating a connection with a Windows Client ensure that the Peer name specified on this page matches the Dial in connection s username Please Note The input in the Peer Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and no connection can be created The Password text field requires the password for the connection establishment Please Note These authentication settings should be identically configured on both peers for the successful connection e
259. into the corresponding text field Choose the needed value from the Source Type drop down list as well as the Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix values 18 Press the Next button 19 If IP has been selected on the previous step in the Source Type drop down list then Source Host should be inserted in the current page If FXO or ISDN has been selected in the Source Type drop down list then the ISDN trunk or the FXO line number should be selected here 20 If the Set Date Time Period s checkbox has been selected on the first page pressing Next will open the Date Time Rules page where route validity should be defined 21 Press the Finish button to establish a local route with the inserted settings a a cal T To create a local AAA entry Click on the Local AAA Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Local AAA Table page Choose the Authentication type Enter the Phone Number or the Username and Password depending on the selected Authentication type Use the Expiration Date and Time checkbox to enable the expiration timeout Select the Expiration Date and Time from the corresponding drop down lists Press Save to apply these settings ewes QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 103 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Allowed Characters and Wildcards The following is the set of characters and wildcards allowed in the Pattern and Source Number Pattern text fields of the Call
260. inutes This voice mail ns 1 me profile can be saved as ForPSTN and its name should be moim i ume defined in the routing rule responsible for incoming PSTN calls El Restore datsun Heascation Message distribution In parallel to this voice mail profile there can be Upload new Notification Message C medisinotiicabon wi Browse another profile designed for internal PBX calls It will play the a following voice mail greeting Hi you have reached Mike s voice mailbox please drop me a message and shall call you back the maximum voice mail duration is 5 minutes and nea there is a Zero Out feature configured to call Mike s cellular Ee CEE a phone This voice mail profile can be saved as ForPBX and cette 2008 evel Tachanat LAA Ae igen usar its name should be defined in the routing rule responsible for Fig Il 248 Voice Mail Settings for the Administrator PBX calls distribution to the local extensions O estore gHr gretig ile Upload naw greeting fie Cimadiagrestingiwa Bwa When the first routing rule is used and the call reaches the extension that has the corresponding voice mail profile the settings of the ForPSTN voice mail profile will be activated For the second routing rule when the call reaches Mike s voice mailbox the settings of the ForPBX voice mail profile will be activated QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 132 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Additional Feature The same p
261. ion in the rearranged list e f the multiple patterns with the same metric have been matched to the Best Matching Algorithm the pattern in the higher position in the table will get the higher position in the rearranged list The pattern in the highest position of the rearranged list will be considered as the preferred one The second and subsequent matching patterns will be used if the destination refused the call due to the configured Fail Reason The Enable Disable functional buttons are used to enable disable the selected route s Disabled routes will have no effect Enabled routes will be parsed when initiating routing calls The State column in the Call Routing Table displays the current state of the routes enabled disabled Add starts the Call Routing Wizard where a new routing pattern may be defined The Call Routing Wizard is divided into several pages Page 1 displays the following components The Enable checkbox is used to enable the newly created routing rule By default this checkbox is selected so the newly created routing rule will be enabled But if you wish to create a routing rule for a later use disable it from this page The new routing rule will be added to the Call Routing Table but will be disabled and will not be considered when placing calls through the call routing unless it is enabled again The Destination Number Pattern text field specifies calls to which the rule should be applied If a call either inbound or out
262. ion methods For Preferred channel selection the CO answers to the call request by the first available timeslot With the Exclusive channel selection the CO should feedback only by the timeslot asked in the call request The Bearer Establishment Procedure drop down list allows selecting the session initiation method on the B channel One of the following options can be selected for the transmission path completion prior to receipt of a call acceptance indication on channel negotiation at the destination interface e on progress indication with in band information e on call acceptance The Calling Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the origin of call The Called Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the subaddress of the called party of the call The Called Party Numbering Plan and Calling Party Numbering Plan drop down lists correspondingly indicate the numbering plan of the called party s and calling party s number The Incoming Called Digits Size text field indicates the number of received digits in a range from 0 to 255 required to establish a call When this field has a 0 value the system uses either the timeout defined in the T302 field or the Sending Complete Information element messages to establish a call Independent on the value in this field Sending Complete Information element and the pound sign always result in call establishment The Gene
263. ion should only be selected if the peer is not working properly and cannot handle requests from PPPD for IPXCP negotiation Fig Il 206 Advanced PPP Settings page VPN Configuration A VPN Virtual Private Network is established to connect two local networks intranets securely over the Internet securely The VPN routers manage authentication between servers and clients and handle data encryption for the connection Only authorized users may access the network and the data exchange cannot be intercepted VPN connections are in many ways like every Internet connection they are based on IP addresses which means the concerned VPN gateways must authenticate the IP addresses of their respective partner s VPN gateways Each time a specific VPN is to be established usually the same IP addresses are expected This will not create problems if both VPN partners have fixed WAN IP addresses There may be circumstances reasons to prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses To enable devices that use a variable IP address as part of a VPN they are turned into Road Warriors For example at this point they are able to reach their corporate network via authentication at the company s VPN gateway device This VPN gateway device must have a fixed IP address for Internet access Every VPN needs at least one VPN gateway with a fixed IP address The partner devices of a VPN must have different WAN IP addresses and if they are connected to local area networ
264. irewall cannot be enabled Py LCT F Men Sten Uses Conferences felephoiy ienr Hink Beem k Iy 5 t mig The Firewall Security radio buttons are the following Firewall Configuration e Low Security Everything that is not explicitly forbidden will be allowed This security level doesn t block anything by default It is recommended if the device is already located behind another firewall or if every filter has been configured correctly Grable is Enable aT _JEnabin Firal Eventhing is Hiyeag thats nel aeplicitty forbidden This policy doesnt block ihing per defaull You hime fo configure th re manually This aoii cimenied ifthis dence riid bahing acter Anawa or you ane gure tat yeu Pe Adding He i S80 preceeded with fet policy conbgere ha iie n ia retor e i Hrid locate ae paniy rad every iter conecity Magie protection againiat hs PRES GE SARENE OPE ERNE e Medium Security Traffic originating from the LAN side may pass and traffic from the WAN side will be blocked by default This is the recommended security level Tra crigiating fons Mi LAM reray pitt and Indic borm mi Meee wall Be blocked per defaull This e Ihi otis pity Sventhing tad is nod explicitly aliyan wil be blocked This includes trafic heen tee LAM side You have in contigum the fees fo open up thp drewall as deseod e High Security Everything that is not explicitly allowed will be blocked including traffic from the LAN side ey Fils
265. is smati eval tasnnsnsen it as niant mse selection enables the following fields to be inserted Fig Il 37 Configuration Management page The Server Name requires the IP address or the host name of the remote server The Server Port requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the backup files in The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FTP In case of FTP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Backup Interval Selection drop down lists are used to select the frequency and the time when the automatic backup of the Quadro s system configuration and the voice data will take place Backup Now button is used to perform a manually immediate backup of the system configuration and the voice data The Backup amp Download all config amp voice data link generates a backup file with all configuration settings and user uploaded greeting messages It opens a file chooser window for immediate download to the users PC QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 21 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Upload amp Restore all config amp voice data link opens a page that has a Browse button which opens a file chooser to select a backed up file and a Configuration to Upload field requirin
266. ism Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts of SIP registration server accessibility verification If a reply is not received from the primary SIP server within this timeout the secondary SIP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will continue to be sent to the server A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively require the host address IP address or the host name the port number of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers iian fie les i aw aa T Vor Caner Wizard VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 3 contains the following VoIP iin tier E TEE Carrier access code selection components The Access Code text field requires a digit combination by dialing which the corresponding VoIP Carrier will be reached The Route Incoming Calls To drop down list allows you to select an extension or Auto Attendant on the Quadro where incoming calls from the configured VoIP Carrier should be routed to For the selected extension there will be an unconditional forwarding set up which will care for incoming calls forwarding from the VoIP carrier to the corresponding extension Fig Il 194 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 3 The Emergency Code text field requires the emergency code supported by the specified ITSP By default is field is fil
267. k Geiger Ep SS HE Ep gi Ti e Group indicates the user defined groups that include IP addresses that should to be allowed or blocked The Description field is used to insert an optional description of the filtering rule Pura Wi Fig Il 224 Filtering Rules Page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic To Add a Filtering Rule 1 Select the Filter link Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Outgoing Traffic Management Access SIP Access Blocked IP List Allowed IP List or Restricting IPSec to add a rule for it The corresponding Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Click Add on the Filtering Rules page A page where a new rule may be added will appear in the browser window The page will be named corresponding to the selected filter 3 Select a service name from the Service list to configure a rule for it If the list has a default value do not change the default values 4 Select an action from the Action list that is used in the rule If the list has a default value do not change the default values 5 Enter the IP address in the Forward to IP field if an Incoming Traffic Rule is to be added 6 Choose the restriction type by selecting Any Single IP IP Mask or Single URL and enter the required information in the text fields or select a group 7 Insert a Description if needed 8 To add a rule with these parameters press Save To Delete Filtering Rules 1 Select the Filter link to delete a rule from its table
268. ks these LAN s must have different IP addresses As all Quadro devices have the same default IP addresses on delivery at least one of them must be reconfigured in order to set a new IP address Quadro supports several kinds of VPN connections such as IPSec L2TP and PPTP ak ue E r Man Sete Use Conferences Tehalininy tober med Uplink Hawk E py ot Tidus dinner The VPN Configuration page offers IPSec Configuration and PPTP L2TP Configuration links that lead to the corresponding feature settings pages VPN Configuration Attention It is strongly recommended not to run different types of VPN tunnels between the same endpoints simultaneously Fig Il 207 VPN Configuration page An IPSec connection includes authentication and encryption to protect data integrity and confidentiality VPNs are virtual in the sense that individuals can use the public Internet as a means of securely accessing an internal network Once the IPSec connection is established users have access to the same network resources addresses and so forth as if they were connected locally VPNs are private because the data is encrypted between two VPN gateways Encryption makes it very difficult for anyone to intercept data and capture sensitive information such as passwords The Quadro can be set up to act as a VPN router when connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address or as an IPSec connection Road Warrior when using dynamic IP addresses Establishing
269. l 11 Auto Provisioning page 10 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Needed Bandwidth for IP Calls The bandwidth required by an IP call depends on the codecs used and these specifications are listed in the tables below Required Bandwidth for Standard Packets Packet Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs Size in 7 msec a G 711 726 16 G 726 24 G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a A G 722 G 722 1 10 105 58 66 74 82 50 105 74 20 84 37 45 53 61 29 84 53 30 76 30 38 45 53 22 27 76 45 40 74 27 34 42 50 19 74 42 50 71 25 32 40 48 17 71 40 60 67 22 30 37 45 15 20 67 37 Needed Bandwidth for Encrypted Packets when using a SRTP Packet Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs Size in iLBC msec G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a 13 33 G 722 G 722 1 10 114 66 74 82 90 58 114 82 20 89 41 49 57 65 33 89 57 30 81 33 41 49 57 26 31 81 49 40 76 28 36 44 52 20 76 44 50 74 26 34 42 50 18 74 42 60 72 24 32 40 48 16 22 72 40 Required Bandwidth for Encrypted Packets when a VPN is used Packet Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs Size in iLBC msec G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a 13 33 G 722 G 722 1 10 148 98 105 118 124 92 148 118 20 105 59 65 74 81 49 105 74 30 90 43 52 60 66 35 41 90 60 40 85 38 45 53 61 30 85 53 50 80 34 41 48 56 26 80 48 60 74 29 37 45 52 22 26 74 45 Redundancy Settings Redundancy feature is used
270. l Server enables the SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol server on Quadro thus Quadro becomes the timeserver for its LAN Enable Simple Network Time Protocol Client enables the SNTP client on the Quadro thus Quadro becomes a client to an external timeserver A checkbox disables Date and Time drop down lists and enables the following parameters The SNTP Servers table lists all defined NTP Servers Mom System Users Conferences Telephony Time Date Settings The Add functional button opens an Add NTP Server page i where a new NTP server can be defined This page offers the bate NTP Server radio buttons that are used to choose between a Tii Giunta tidnnds ofai manual and a predefined NTP server E cnodie Simpie Network Time Protocol Caeat Manual requires the NTP servers FQDN Full Qualified Domain Name or its IP address Add Edt Delete Moveup Move down Predefined is used to select the NTP servers host address from the drop down list where the most common NTP servers are listed Fig Il 44 Time and Date Settings page The Move Up and Move Down functional buttons are used to sort NTP servers in the order they need to be accessed If the s l NTP server in the first position of the SNTP Servers table does Man System Users Conferences Telephony epygi not answer NTP server in the next position will try to be reached Add SNTP Server Please Note You can add another NTP server to the list if the defined NTP servers are not fu
271. l for callers to get direct access to the Quadro extensions by spelling the username with the help of the phone keypad The Extensions Directory can be accessed through Quadro s Auto Attendant Services and it has its own manipulation buttons to browse the directory The Extensions Directory Settings page allows you to make a list of names assigned to the extensions on the Quadro If the name spelled by the caller matches the one s listed in the Extensions Directory the corresponding extension user name s will be played to the caller for verifying the input and selecting the user to connect Each extension s user should record their name with the help of the handset see chapter Update System Messages or they can upload a wave file from the Account Settings page Main System Users Conferences Telephony hives eet Uplink Network cpyzi The Custom Greeting column in the Extensions Directory ERRnS One LISCO SANGS table displays whether or not a custom greeting user s name Acid Edit Qslte Selectoll Wwerse Selection Move up Mave idan is recorded or uploaded Users cannot be accessed through RORE the Extensions Directory and it is implied as being an inactive entry in the event a custom greeting is not recorded or uploaded Warnings will be seen in the Extensions Directory table for inactive entries Extension numbers in the Extensions Directory table are made as a link to move to the corresponding extension s Account Settings page This helps
272. l not be automatically redirected to the Login page To access the Quadro s Web GUI you need to connect Quadro again and login Attention After the firmware update all IP phones attached to the Quadro should be restarted Fig Il 51 Firmware Update page Automatic Firmware Update The Automatic Firmware Update page allows you to configure an automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image as it becomes available on the server When this service is enabled on the configured day and time Quadro will automatically check for a new available firmware on the server and will either notify the administrator or update the firmware right away depending on the configured settings The server configuration can be done manually or through the DHCP server In case of DHCP server replying configuration the corresponding adjustments should be done on the DHCP server to automatically point the Quadro to the destination where the firmware is stored Please Note Independent on the selected server type there should be an auto update folder in the root directory of the server Quadro will check for any new firmware in that specific folder only Besides the firmware bin file the auto update folder should contain supplementary file s to point to the correct firmware file The detailed instructions on the functionality of automatic firmware update as well as server configuration are described in the Automatic Firmware Update
273. lable call types PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls from global telephone network Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be parsed through Call Routing Table Mae Sei fhe O Dapy CELUS bint oath Paging Group of Extension 1010 Fig Il 92 Paging Group of Extension page Main System Users Coedetences Teleptrotry kernet Uplink Net work Access List of Extension 67 Selectioe Action Fig Il 93 Access List of Extension page for Paging group Mam System Users Conferences Telephony nternet Uplink Network Access List Add Entry Sip Allow w j Back Fig Il 94 Access List of Extension Add Entry page for Paging Group The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the Paging Group service for the extensions included in the Paging Group table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 48
274. lable for PBX Voicemail destination type routing rules The Next button will open the Call Routing Wizard Page 4 where different information about source caller will be required depending on the selected Source Type For the SIP source type the Source Host text field will require one or more IP addresses or host names of the SIP server where the caller is registered or the caller s device if they are direct calls separated by a space The Call Routing Wizard Page 5 appears if the Set Date Time Period s checkbox previously had been enabled on Page 1 of the Local Call Routing Wizard It will require information about the pattern validity period s This page provides selection between Typical and Custom date time rule definitions The Typical selection contains the following group of radio buttons Call Routing Wizard that are used to select the frequency of the corresponding routing pattern that is to take place DateTime Rules Add Entry Bin Sytem Users Conferences Telephony Date ved Upolinvk Melwork e Daily Sunday Monday Turiday e Weekly the preferred weekday s should be selected for Wednesday E Thursday 2 Friday this option E e Monthly the calendar day should be selected for this option TI Aitadl able monis Aeailable days e Annually the calendar day and month should be selected swede Thre Paci hs en th sere for this option oo oo 2a 8 sow In the Available Time Period drop down lists the
275. le might be optionally considered depending on the Fail Reason configuration on the corresponding pattern The Restrict the Number of Simultaneous Calls checkbox is only available for IP PSTN destination type and is used to restrict the number of simultaneous calls to the public SIP server with the same username at the same time This checkbox enables Allowed Call Count text field which requires the number of simultaneous calls allowed in a range from 1 to 64 If you leave this field empty no limitation will apply to the number of simultaneous logons The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is available for SIP and IP PSTN destination types and is applicable when a route is used for calls through Quadro between peers that are both located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected RTP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers The Call Duration Limit checkbox is available for SIP IP PSTN and PSTN destination types and is used to limit the duration of the call placed with the selected routing rule If this checkbox is not selected the call duration will be unlimited This checkbox selection enables the Maximum Duration text field where the maximum duration of the call in seconds should be defined Once the call duration reaches the value defined here the call will be disconnected without prior notice The AAA Required checkboxes are used to choose one or
276. led with the information defined in the Quadro s System Configuration Wizard but this field also allows to define an ITSP specific emergency codes In case your system has both local PSTN emergency codes and ITSP codes configured when dialing the certain emergency code Quadro will first try to reach the local PSTN allocated emergency destination and if failed will dial the ITSP emergency destination Please Note If the defined ITSP is 911 compliant then you have to bind this account with the geographical address of your device If the ITSP is not 911 compliant then the public safety agency will not be able to determine the address automatically The Failover to PSTN checkbox selection will route the call to the PSTN through the local FXO line in case if the VolP Carrier is not available When this checkbox is selected an additional entry will be added to the Call Routing table This maintains digit transmission to the local PSTN when an IP call towards the configured VoIP Carrier cannot be established Please Note A warning message will appear when the defined Access Code already exists in the Call Routing table or causes a conflict with entries already in the Call Routing table In this case when continuing through the VoIP Carrier Wizard the existing entry in the Call Routing table will automatically be overwritten by the new settings RADIUS Client Settings RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service specifies the RADIUS protocol u
277. link is used to restore the default Recurring Attendant Prompt Friendly Phones the Edit Authorized Phones Database link refers to the Authorized Phones Database page where a list of trusted external phones can be created If external SIP or PSTN users are added to the Quadro Authorized Phones database they are free to access the Auto Attendant Services without passing the authentication or to use the Call Back services The Custom manipulation radio button selection allows you to upload Attendant s custom scenario file and voice messages The selections are The Upload Scenario File indicates the file name used to upload a new scenario file The uploaded file needs to be in EpygiXML format the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support and is restricted to a 20KB file size Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a custom scenario file Please Note You may upload an attendant scenario file along with the voice prompt recordings as a single file To do this create an archive file of the tar gz type containing all the necessary files and upload it from the Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page The View Download Scenario link appears only when a custom scenario file has been previously uploaded and is used to view or download the scenario file The Remove Scenario link is used to remove a custom scenario file and return to the default Auto Attendant scenario The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages link re
278. link is used to download the message file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Recording Announcement Message link is used to restore the default recording announcement message QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 52 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Man Sysiem Uses Conferences Tele plronry interned Uplink Braak Extensions Management Edit Entry 3 Recording Storage Settings a i E Recording Sterage Settings 80 Mjaa This group contains recording storage settings and is divided into two groups The Modes radio buttons selection is used to choose the storage Criit Loea Mode iga locity When local space te fut dalea te oldest recordings option once the call recording is done Following options are kept iaaii hen nea itab Ha fu Abe Dae okie nataring ta FTP santt available e FTP Mode this option will send immediately recordings to the FTP server and delete from device This option will keep your device memory the most free e Simple Local Mode this option will recordings locally wan ame File Hamira Stheme Hrd fire houp Higie nes Stop recording when local space is full and generate an ives z event B e Cyclic Local Mode this option will keep recordings locally When local space is full delete the oldest recordings e Mixed Mode this option will keep recordings locally When local space is full move the oldest recording to FTP s
279. ll Duration current call duration in seconds The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics link is only present for local ISDN lines this option is not available for shared ISDN lines and leads to the page where diagram chart of ISDN trunks usage can be viewed QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x DVO Man System Users Conder emes Tebeqetrotny Satesivet Uyin Net woah C py SI FXO Channel Usage Statistics z Fig Il 20 FXO Channel Usage Statistics page Mase System Users Conferences Tebegdocany besimet Lpa Hetwat ep Si FXO Channel Usage Statistics TA Stetrete Tine ia ii weeh iakat Hs ptr Fig Il 21 FXO Channel Usage Statistics chart epys W Sande lai Conte a en leben hAsrnei Tipin Meinrak Quadro Status Lines Status Lees aia i Epia ma i Fig Il 22 Lines Status page 16 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics page consists of following components used to define the chart parameters Trunk checkboxes are used to select the ISDN line number s over which the ISDN traffic chart will be built At least one Trunk checkbox should be selected otherwise error message appears Man Syre Users Conferences Telephony Silecnet Upink Network ISON Channel Usage Statistics Time range of statistic table drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram chart that is to be bu
280. ll recording started date_day day when the call recording started extension recording box extension hostname Quadro s hostname Any combination of above variables can be used in the Naming Scheme text field along with the manually text inserted The following syntax applies Example MyQuadro caller_dispname duration time_hour time_min _business In case if the callers display name was Andrew the call lasted 15 seconds and it took place on 14 10 the files stored on the FTP server for this Recording Box extension will have the name MyQuadro Andrew 15 sec 14 10 business wav Attention Make sure Naming Scheme text field contains symbols that your FTP server allows For example symbols lt gt are not allowed by the MS Windows Operation System running servers Retry Count text field indicates the number of retries to access the server in case of networking problems Retry Timeout text field timeout between retries to access the server The Go to Recording Box link moves to the recording box of the corresponding extension s Recording Box where all recorded calls are locally stored The Recording Box is also accessible from Extensions Management table by clicking on the corresponding Recording Box extension QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 53 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Attendant Extension Settings For A
281. ll types PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions SIP calls through a SIP server PSTN calls from global telephone network Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be parsed through Call Routing Table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Main Syaaban liearas Comiaramcea Takapihan internet tplink Hetwatih Extensions Management Edit Entry Park Access List 25 r ad Selir Aad EIn Dilko Soppi M ritip Sota Funk Aceeun Lie R ng p rcesa Ligj amp a png 0 Se Ceri elia Fig Il 88 Extensions Management Edit Entry Park Access List for call park extension Maks System Users Conferences Telepleoery kaant Up nk Network Extensions Management Edit Entry Retrieve Access List 35 Add Cae Delete Select al Wveree Setection Fig Il 89 Extensions Management Edit Entry Retrieve Access List for call park extension Main System Users Comerences Teepa mieniet Uplink Nenaork Retrieve Access Settings Add Entry Cal tne SIF we 1097 App epi oon SIP Clipkincand Address wildcard supported Cem Case opright iti 3003 2000 Epy Teshnetegies Lig AJ rights reseed Fig Il 90 Extensions Management Edit Entry Retrieve Access List for call park extension 46 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Address text field is u
282. ll types PBX local calls to Quadro extensions SIP calls through a SIP server Auto for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number or SIP address will be reached through Routing Callback automatic call to the voice mail author This can be used as notification that the recipient has received the voice mail but has not yet played it e Call To text field requires the destination s phone number depending on the selected call type For Callback call type no destination s phone number is required e The next two fields are used for retransmission of phone notifications The number of times text field indicates the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the notification is specified to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field For Callback call type the first notification is sent to the voice mail author after the first expiration of the interval defined in the Repeat every text field For calls with call type different from Callback the first notification will be sent immediately e Restore default Notification Message restores the default notification message If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled e Upload new Notification Message will show the attached notification file selected by the current extension Please
283. llers with the same handset added number caller address to Conference ID 308 join the corresponding conference at the same time This option may be used to allow users from the same network with the same caller address like ParticipantType Speaker PSTN network to reach the conference Confirmation Type Stare vi Participant Indication CI Allow Duplicated Participation Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 16 New Participants Configuration Page Schedule Main Conference Conference Properties Cepygi quadro Schedule Conference ID 308 Add Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection C Weekly Friday 06 00 C Annually January 25 06 05 The Schedule page is used to configure and manage the conference scheduling rules Mallow Participants to Join 5 mins before Conference Activation so that a conference can be automatically activated on the date and time The Scheduling service may also be configured to send invitation emails to the participants MSend Mail 15 mins before Conference Activation asking them to join the conference or informing about a new conference Send Mail on Behalf of auadroM3zx The Conference Schedule page offers a table that lists all scheduling rules configured for the corresponding conference When a scheduled conference is activated all Jecpyigntccy 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved participants with dial out option ena
284. llows or blocks traffic based on policies services and or IP addresses The firewall has several levels of security policies low medium or high The administrator may add additional service based rules Filtering rules will take effect only if the Firewall has been enabled and are independent from the selected firewall security level NAT Network Address Translation is used to allow Quadro LAN members to connect to the Internet using Quadro s WAN IP address The Quadro NAT also handles forwarding incoming packets from the WAN to the PCs or devices on Quadro s LAN The IDS Intrusion Detection System is a type of firewall but together with deleting dangerous packets or packets containing intrusion attacks IDS generates a log file with information about these dropped packets and the senders responsible for those packets The log can be viewed on the IDS Log page and notifications about them can be sent to the user in various ways such as e mail flashing LED and display notification The Firewall Configuration page offers the following components The Enable IDS checkbox selection enables the Intrusion Detection System The Enable NAT checkbox selection enables Network Address Translation QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 121 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Enable Firewall checkbox selection enables the firewall security service The firewall security level has to be selected otherwise the f
285. lls done in the system This log file will be internally kept in the system until the next time someone used the Logs Collection feature code again The collected logs will be a part of the System Logs when user downloads them next time so it can be reviewed by appropriate support staff This could be used to collect the logs at the exact moment when a problem has happened Fig Il 60 System Logs View System Logs page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 33 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Features This page lists all features that may be activated by a software key characterized by a Feature Description and provided with its Status Mam System Users Conferences Telapliotry Werme Uptine Network e 3 No Key Found the feature is currently not available e Reboot Needed the feature key has been entered and Features Quadro needs to be rebooted Unique 10 06 5 1 28 017 e Activated the feature is now available on the Quadro Upg ade Name Additional Feat es Following features may be activated via the software key Enables Detty support Support for Thid Pasty Call Control e 3pcc Support enables Third Party Call Control feature on ee the Quadro The feature allows the call controlling Fassi Sanaa Fees applications running on a user PC to remotely initiate and a sport aoa eet se mon ve00 handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain i event notifications from the Qu
286. logging as a moderator on the Quadro login page After logging in as a moderator the page Conference Progress is displayed Here you may see the active conferences and the participants From this page you may also access the settings of the conference to operate and perform actions that are available only to the moderator of each conference Conference Menu e Conference Progress Activate Conference Send Notification Mail Recorded Conferences Conference Statistics Conference Properties Menu e General Settings Recording Settings Customization Participants Schedule AGC Settings Conference Menu Main Conference Conference Properties Conference Progress Activate Conference tn Send Notification Mail Conf Recorded Conferences Conference Statistics DeSttigver srsvasciererreemy SSues SIP Address 11307 sip epygi loc 5060 Duration 9 min 27 sec Conference Status Active Terminate Unlocked Participants Add Delete Dial Out Set Speaker SetListener Lecture Mode Selectall Inverse Selection SIP Address Name Participant Type Participant Indication C Andy White 20232 sip epygi com Speaker Yes Active C Greglee 11308 sip epygiloc Speaker Yes Not Active C Jane Doe Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved 11248 sip epygiloc Listener Only Yes Active Fig Il 2 Moderator Settings Dynamo Menu QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Recording Disabled Participant Stat
287. lps to choose the desired greeting file that should be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format Download Greeting File appears only if a file has been previously uploaded The link is used to download the audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Logout This option is used to close the session between the user PC and Quadro and to leave the Quadro Web Management or to enter the management with another login By selecting the Logout button the startup page will be displayed and the user needs to login again QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 134 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator The following PBX Services are accessible at the dial tone characterized by beginning with the key Administrator Login Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator Allows to modify Auto Attendant greeting and menu messages as well as to manage universal extension messages Enabling disabling the Call Routing rules 600 Allows managing the routing entries in the Call Routing table i e to enable disable certain dialing rules by dialing key combinations pre configured on each routing entry By dialing 000 you will be required to dial enabler disabler key to enable or disable the routing rule s correspondingly Since multiple routing rules may have the same enabler disabler key combinations the same key may be
288. ls about Jitter calculations please refer to the RFC1889 Rx Maximum Delay maximum variance absolute value of actual arrival time of the RTP data packet compared to estimated arrival time measured in milliseconds If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then variance for packet i may be expressed as following V i Ri R1 Si S1 Ri Si R1 S1 Rx Maximum Delay max V i 8 RX Delay Increase Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is increased during the call RX Delay Decrease Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is decreased during the call Please Note RTP Statistics is logged only when at least one of the call endpoints is located on the Quadro For example it will not be logged when e calls incoming from or addressed to the IP lines or remote extension e calls from an external user are routed to another external user through Quadro s routing rules QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 15 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus In the first case RTP statistics will be logged if remote extension or IP line user is calling locally to the Quadro s extension or auto attendant The Configure Call Quality Event Notification link leads to the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page where call quality control notification specifics can be config
289. ly Download Call Statistics checkbox enables automatic downloading mechanism of the call statistics Please Note This service only refers to the statistics collected from the moment of enabling this service and forward any previously generated statistics will not be downloaded The Number of Call Records to Download drop down list is used to select the portion size of the call statistics including all types of call statistic i e successful missed and unsuccessful outgoing call statistics in the timing order which will be downloaded to the server or send per email The number selected in this drop down list indicates the number of entries in the single downloaded call statistics file If there are no enough entries in the call statistics table on the Quadro the system will wait until the necessary number of entries will be collected and then will upload the statistics file to the server or send it to the email address Main Sytem Uses Conferences Takapihan Call Statistics Automatically Download weti Lal M 1 Unc tal gn e Stat el Enatie Automatic Derenioading of Call Statistics Mueniber Of Call Records Ta Dowelnad File F mat Tak Odinaed Tai leg Darna Harig 192 1 FOL Serer Port 71 Paih on Semar Satieienheu fime hounit Send Helhod Chownicad How sao Back SL ae se Ln Ciia Tiimit alii LEA AN AGR ahid maere Uik Administrator s Menus Helper Dci SINS ALi iy Doe Fig Il 138 Call Statistics
290. m Uses Conferences Telephony hater mt Liplink Meio k if Derio ht 3252 2 Recording Box Settings Extensions Management Edit Entry This group contains Recording Box settings and has the following ieare al set IFE components Recording Box Settings 80 Ask Password on Local Access checkbox selection enables the BIP Ahane Satins Dlask password on local access password protection for local PBX callers when entering Zl Ask password on nernati access Recording Box comina Store Botinas F Pitay welcome message Maximum recording count 300 Ask Password on Remote Access checkbox selection enables ee duration Emin E the password protection for remote SIP or PSTN callers when Recording Announcement entering Recording Box SE cu Ros E Play announcement when starting recording Lipload new recording annduncemnent message Play Welcome Message checkbox is used to enable disable the welcome message played when entering the Recording Box Maximum recording count drop down list indicates the maximum number of call recordings allowed to be stored in the corresponding extension s Recording Box If the limit is reached Copyrightiic 2008 2000 Erval Technologies Lid All rights vererved some call recordings should be deleted from the Recording Box to Fig Il 101 Extensions Management Edit Entry Recording Box Settings page be able to make more recordings Maximum Recording Duration drop down list is used to select the maximum duration of
291. mation between network devices and is used by network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth On Quadro SNMP agent is running to allow administrators to remotely manage Quadro s network and the device s configuration Remote administration is being performed by means of special SNMP monitoring programs SNMP Manager which can automatically feedback by the certainly configured actions on some events on the Quadro or remotely modify Quadro s settings SNMP Settings page is divided into two pages Global SNMP Settings and SNMP Trap Settings Global SNMP Settings are used to enable the SNMP agent on the Quadro to select the SNMP protocol version for communication with the administrating application and to define the community for administrating application to connect the Quadro Enable SNMP checkbox is used to enable SNMP agent on the Quadro System Location text field requires optional information to describe the network where SNMP management is performed System Contact text field requires optional information about the contact person responsible for the SNMP management in the defined network Field may indicate the point person s name email address phone number or other contact information Enable SNMP v1 2c checkbox is used to enable SNMP v1 2c protocol version for the messaging between Quadro s SNMP agent and the administrating application If this checkbox is not
292. me or alternative alias name The DNS Server Settings page is used to configure DNS server settings on the Quadro and to define a list of aliases for the devices in the Quadro s LAN This page contains the following components Zone field displays the Quadro s host domain name as it is configured in the System Configuration Wizard Time to live TTL text field indicates the time in seconds DNS Server Settings during which the DNS server will keep the resolved names in its cache During this time the same address will be resolved from the cache of the DNS server When this timeout expires the requested address will be resolved newly Mail Exchange MX text field indicates the mail servers hostname When resolving the email address the reference will go to the mail server defined in this field before being sent out to the external network The value in this field will be used in the MX record in the DNS server on the Quadro The table on this page lists aliases for each of the device in the Fig lI 236 DNS Server Settings page Quadro s LAN to be resolves through the DNS server Mam Sysiem Users Conferences Teleptroeny htenet Upline Main System Users Comience nipit Hier iiet Aini DHS Server Settings Add Host IP Address for igs T5 55 Clipboard Add functional link opens the page Add Host where a list of aliased can be defined for the certain device in the Quadro s LAN The page contains the following components
293. ministrator s Menus The SIP Tunneling service is used to build a tunnel between Quardos and to use that tunnel for routing the SIP calls through the remote Quadros When this service is enabled slave Quadros should be registered on the master Quadro with the corresponding username password With the appropriate configuration done on the master Quadro the master device can use the slave Quadros for routing the SIP calls through them and accessing peers located behind the slave Quadro or recognized by it This enables the master Quadro to locate the slave even when the network settings like IP address SIP port and other settings are changed on the slave Quadro When the SIP Tunneling service is enabled virtual tunnels between the master and its slaves are created A possibility to use the created SIP tunnels will be automatically enabled in the Call Routing table Optionally a SIP tunnel can be mutually established on two Quadros allowing to route SIP calls back and forth A Quadro can be at the same time configured both as a slave and as a master to the same remote device i e the slave Quadro can act as a master for the master device it is registered on For example the Quadro1 can act as a slave for the Quadro2 In its turn the Quadro2 can act as a slave for the Quadro1 With this configuration and the corresponding routing rules added in the Call Routing table on both devices the SIP calls will be routed from Quadro1 to Quadro2 and vice ve
294. moderator s password a asswor eecceee e The Show on Public Directory checkbox is selected the Pean details of the selected conference will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Ml Enar Rae Drente Quadro Web Management Besides this the details of the Percentage ofTota Mamoy 4 NS conference will be displayed in the Public Directories on the 2 Save Back Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the conference is reserved or not used Copyright C 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved e The Percentage of System Memory drop down list is used to select the memory space in percents that can be used for storing conference recordings Fig Il 133 Edit Entry General Settings page The Edit Entry SIP Settings and Edit Entry SIP Advanced Settings pages are used to configure the conference s SIP basic registration and advanced settings respectively The descriptions of the settings can be found in the User Extension Settings section Activate is used to activate the selected conferences Terminate is used to stop the selected conferences Delete removes the selected conferences If no records are selected an error message occurs Select all selects all existing conferences Inverse selection inverses the current selection of conferences if no records are selected all records will be checked Mail Default Settings Mail Default Settings page
295. n checkboxes in order to edit or delete them Entering SIP Addresses Correctly Calls over IP are implemented based on Session Initiating Protocol SIP on the Quadro When making a call to a destination that is somewhere on the Internet a SIP address must be provided SIP addresses needs to be specified in one of the following formats display name lt username ipaddress port gt display name lt username ipaddress gt username ipaddress port username ipaddress username For your convenience the following combinations can be used e ipaddress any user from the specified SIP server e username a specified user from any SIP server e any user from any SIP server QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x The display name and the port number are optional parameters in the SIP address If a port is not specified 5060 will be set up as the default one The range of valid ports is between 1024 and 65536 A flexible structure of wildcards is allowed In comparison with a wildcard the character stands for only one unknown digit and the character stands for any number of any digits Please Note Wildcards are available for caller addresses only No wildcard characters are allowed for called party addresses Exceptions are addresses in the Supplementary Addresses table that are used by Outgoing Call Blocking and Hiding Caller Information Settings services To use and alone as non wild
296. n 1 Select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding connections that should to be deleted stopped started from the Connections tables Press Select all to delete stop start all connections 2 Click on the Delete Stop Start button from the table s menu to perform the corresponding operation for the selected VPN connection s 3 If deleting confirm it with pressing on Yes The VPN connection will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the VPN connection in the list click No Dynamic DNS Settings The Dynamic DNS DynDNS is a service that is used to map a dynamic IP address to a host name This service is used if you are connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and PPP DHCP client and want to allow access from the Internet to a device behind the firewall For example if you want to run your own WEB server To enable the DynDNS service on Quadro you first have to choose a DynDNS provider and register at their website QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 120 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Dynamic DNS Settings page provides the following components The Enable Dynamic DNS checkbox selection enables the dynamic DNS service Man System Users Conferences Telephony mrernet Uplink Network The User text field requires the username specified during the Dynamic DNS Settings registration at the DynDNS provider srnie ONG sence is pe The Password text field requires the passw
297. n Type indicates the type of the license available on the Quadro Count indicates the number of the corresponding licenses available on the Quadro In Use indicates the number of used licensed from the total available licenses Extension lists the extensions that are using the corresponding license Links in this column move to the corresponding service configuration Fig Il 29 License Status page page for the extension IP Routing Configuration Routing is used to relay information across the Internet from a source to a destination Along the way at least one intermediate node is typically encountered Routing is different than bridging The main difference between bridging and routing is that bridging operates at the OSI Data Link Layer Level Two Media Access Control Layer and routing operates at OSI Network Layer Level Three Quadro s IP Routing service allows you to route IP packets from one destination to another or to a specified router through Quadro or a Quadro VPN The IP Routing Configuration page is used to make IP Static IP Policy and VPN routes for IP packets routing This page consists of three tables Entries in the tables are color coded according to the state of the route For example yellow indicates disabled routes green indicates successful routes and red indicates routes with an error IP Static Routes are used to forward IP packets from the Network where the Quadro is connected to the specified d
298. n list and Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox have no sense for Auto Attendant with custom scenario configured see Attendant Extension Settings The Description text field allows entering an optional comment Callback Settings The Enable Callback checkbox selection gives the possibility for a specified trusted caller to use the Instant Call Back service see chapter Call Back Services The Callback Call Type drop down list includes possible callback call types PBX PSTN SIP and Auto The Callback Destination text field requires the destination number where Quadro should instantly call back to The value inserted in this field is dependent on the selected callback call type for PBX 2 digit extension is required for SIP the SIP address is requires and for PSTN a PSTN number is required Auto is used for undefined call types destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Call Routing table If this field is left empty the callers address will be implied as a callback destination The Callback Response Delay text field requires the delay in seconds after which the call back will be performed QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 65 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus To Add an Authorized phone to the database Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones D
299. n the caller s phone number which is considered to be automatically detected The Phone Number SIP User Name text field requires the caller s phone number or the SIP username Only numeric and wildcard characters see chapter Entering SIP Addresses Correctly are allowed for this field T are used to define a range or a quantity of numbers For example 2 13 17 ww a c means that the dialed number may be 213 214 215 216 or 217 2ww 2a 2b and 2c to match the specified phone number in the case of 2 3 7 the dialed number may be 23 or 27 to match the specified phone number The 11 15 23 38 eoms terai tainssississ sit A debe ronnne 45 pattern means that the dialed number may be 11 15 23 Fig Il 190 Local AAA Table Add Entry page 38 or 45 to match the pattern Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 102 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Authentication by Login this selection is used to set the authentication based on the username and password inserted by the user upon login The Username text field requires the authentication username Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect Username digits allowed only will appear The Password text field requires the authentication password Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect
300. n this page if available The shared trunks can be edited from this page Any changes applied in this page will be automatically reflected on the ISDN gateway s that share its ISDN trunks The ISDN Trunk Settings page is used to configure the ISDN trunk and their signaling This page offers the following input options The Trunk Settings table lists the available ISDN trunks on the Quadro and their settings trunk name and interface types Main Syetem Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink CETE The Start and Stop functional links are used to start shutdown the selected ISDN trunk s When an ISDN trunk is in a shutdown state ISDN calls cannot be placed or received ISDN Trunk Settings ameng Hargwar dots nol Suppor BOH bantionity disabled M The Restart functional link is used to bring channel s to the Fonowing welual IBON trunks are avaiable initial idle state on both sides When applying one of th ese ziari Stop Realari Copy i Trunks Resiores Defoull Sebtings Select el inverse Selection options any active traffic on the channel s will be terminated e Taunk iTi eS 8 isa Sie man PTE Point To Muni Point The Copy to Trunk s functional link displays a page used to Trunk agiz a212 User PTWE Point To Mut Point choose a trunk to which selected trunk s settings should be Trunk AGITA 30 215 254 5080 User PTE Point To Muti Point copi ed to Cenk say 2 15 5 Se Liser PTHP Point To Mun Foin The Restore Default
301. nables the DHCP services only for the devices listed in the table below With this checkbox selected no DHCP services will be provided to the other devices iP Clgboad Please Note When this checkbox is selected all IP phones configured to use plug and play or auto configuration services see IP Line Settings will keep their IP addresses received from the DHCP server of the Quadro The IP phones that are configured manually should be added to the Special Devices table to keep their IP addressed Fig Il 238 DHCP Settings page for LAN interface IP Address Range defines a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to the Quadro LAN users The IP range must be at least 6 otherwise the error message Address Range too small will prevent it from being saved The error message Address Range too large will appear if the IP range is greater than 254 WINS Server defines a WINS server IP address for the Quadro LAN users DHCP Advanced Seitings link leads to the page where the advanced options of the Quadro s DHCP server can be configured The Special Devices table on this page allows you to set a static IP address binding on the MAC address of the device in the Quadro s LAN When this table is configured the devices with defined hostnames and MAC addresses will always get the same LAN IP address from the DHCP server Otherwise devices not listed in this table will get dynamic LAN IP addresses This table is also displayed in t
302. name is incorrect the default Voice Mail Settings of the extension will be used The Transport Protocol for SIP messages manipulation radio buttons group is available for SIP or IP PSTN destination types only and allows you to select the transport UDP TCP or TLS to transmit the SIP messages through The SIP Privacy manipulation radio buttons group is only available for the SIP destination type and allows you to select the security of the SIP route by means of hiding or replacing depending on the configuration of the SIP server the key headers of the SIP messages used to establish the call e Default Privacy with this selection Quadro specific SIP privacy will not be applied and all privacy will rely on the configuration of the SIP Server e Disable Privacy with this selection SIP call security will not be disabled and all headers of the SIP message will be transparently visible to the destination e Enable Privacy with this selection SIP privacy will be specified for the corresponding route This selection enables a group of checkboxes in order to choose the key headers that are to be fully or partly hidden or replaced The Require Privacy checkbox selection is used to restrict the delivery of the SIP message if any of the selected headers cannot be hidden or replaced depending on the configuration of the SIP server before being sent to the destination For FXO destination types a group of Port ID radio buttons allows you to s
303. nce queue pies Melher galinga E nabs Redirection Call Queue Message Repetition Count 4 The Max Call Queue Appearance text field requires the maximum number of active calls on the line For example if 1 is Call Type P configured in this field and the extension is in use the next GoTo User Setinns Adimas DATITA arica mo incoming call will go to the call queue If 2 is configured in this Go To Line satinga field and extension is in use the next incoming call alert will be Upload naw cal queus welcome message E vnecineveudedc wav iea heard in the background if Call Waiting service is enabled on Paa T Cimedaaueuemao wi iama the corresponding extension and the extension will hold the first Cae C call to answer the second one or they can be joined for a call conference However the next incoming call will again go to the call queue gt Tagil Le A giti ri Fig Il 80 Extensions Management Edit Entry Call Queue Settings page Enable Redirection checkbox is used to enable the call redirection to the other destination after some time spent in the queue This will avoid the caller to wait in the queue for too long This checkbox selection enables the following components Call Queue Message Repetition Count text field requires the number of call queue messages played during the caller is in the queue after which the call in the queue will be automatically redirected to the destination defined below Call Type lists t
304. nctional for example Quadro s date time is not being updated automatically Polling Interval indicates the time interval for the periodical synchronization between the timeserver and Quadro It counts in hours Fig Il 45 Add NTP Server page Attention Time and Date Settings will be reset if Quadro has lost power Mail Settings The System Mail Settings page allows you to send warnings automatically about the board status or problems to the administrator System events that require email notification are selected on the Events page System mail must be enabled and the SMTP server needs to be configured for voice message transmission to the extension user s mailing account QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 26 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Enable enables system mail sending and voice messages transmission to the extension user s mailbox SMTP Host requires the SMTP host IP address or domain name The SMTP host needs to be configured to enable voice message transmission SMTP Port requires the SMTP host port number Mail Sender Address text field requires the source address for the Quadro notification emails The email address defined here should be an existing valid e mail address registered on the selected SMTP server or it should have permission to use that particular SMTP server for e mail transmission Mail Recipient Address text field requires an active e mail address where system emails will
305. nd allows moderator to manage the conference The following read only data is displayed on this page Main Conference Conference Properties Conference Progress Conference ID 308 WELCOME to EPYGI s CONFERENCE Moderator s Menus epygi quadro Refresh in 18 seconds Conference ID the unique ID on the conference Description Discussion of weekly issues Info Text displays the text uploaded in the Info SIP Address 11307 sip epygi oc 5060 File from Customization page In the picture illustration on the right side the Info Text says WELCOME to EPYGI s CONFERENCE Description any descriptive information about the conference optional Duration 9 min 27 sec Unlocked Conference Status Active Terminate Recording Disabled Participants Active All 2 3 Add Delete DialOut SetSpeaker SetListener Lecture Mode Selectall Inverse Selectior SIP Address the SIP address of the conference Name SIP Address Participant Type Participant Indication Participant Status Nested Conference Request to Speak Duration the time the current conference is active C Andy White 20232 sip epygi com Speaker Yes Active No C Greg Lee 11308 sip epygiloc Speaker Yes Not Active Conference Status the conference status active not active or waiting If the conference is active the information whether the conference is locked or not and the recording status recording
306. nd notification will be heard in the third party s call when you dial in e Whisper with this option you may listen to the third party s call and speak to the extension to which you have barged in Only that extension will hear a sound notification when you dial in e Barge in with this option you may listen to the third party s call and speak to all participants in the call All participants of the call will hear a sound notification when you dial in To use either of these options the Barge In service should be enabled and configured on the extension from User Extension Settings to which you wish to barge in Attention Barge In calls are not displayed in Active Calls table on the Administrator s Main Page nor are registered in the Call Statistics Upload Universal Extension Recordings The Upload Universal Extension Recordings are to be defined by the Quadro administrator and will be present instead of the default voice messages for all extensions on the Quadro They will be used when no custom messages have been uploaded or recorded The following system messages can be uploaded from this page Hold Music played to the held user Voice Mail Regular Greeting played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox Voice Mail Out of Office Greeting played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox if the Out of office greeting is enabled Incoming call blocking played when a blocked user calls the e
307. nd other settings related to the voicemail to email and FAX to email sending It offers the following components aT racy j Man Sytem Uses Conmtenences Telephony lobed meet Uplink Helio C P I 5 Cu adh The Recording Codec drop down list contains the existing codecs for voice mail compression Changing the Voice Mail recording codec will directly affect the allocated memory size for users Email Subject for voice field is used to when user enables Send new voice messages via e mail option from his personal Voice Mail Settings In this field you may define a flexible subject for all emails sent from the Quadro and carrying the voice mails Volce Mall Common Settings Recording Cather Greda SA CEL epeech coding afd keds rae Eanail Subject ter voice Voice mail recened from S vel_COSPHAME SivW_USERHAME ijt Hosta Ciadain Username Eupan Duration FAM to E i for mal TIFF Tag image Fie Fome ahs hy Ae AG Cw Tach oon Lig All righs raroa Besides using static text in the subject line you may want to kex use the predefined tags to combine the needed subject Fig Il 196 Voice Mail Recording Codec page e Hostname the hostname of the Quadro e Displayname the caller s display name This value is not displayed for PSTN callers QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 109 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Username the caller s SIP username For PBX caller this is the caller
308. ndication enabled for FXS lines only Ringing indication disabled Zero Out enabled Redirect Call Type PBX Redirect Address 00 FAX Redirection disabled Out of Office disabled Forward rewind duration 3 seconds Greeting message default VM Profiles undefined No entries No entries Display Name undefined User Password Protection disabled both for incoming and outgoing calls User s Name for Extensions Directory default Custom Voice Messages default No entries in the table For Any Callers all services are disabled Call Blocking message files default Intercom Allow Activation on Request No answer timeout 20 sec Call Waiting Service enabled Autoredial Interval 10 sec Autoredial Period 15 min Send Hold Music to remote IP party disabled Hold Music Own Music Music file default Disabled Timeout 30 min Send Message to Caller enabled Disabled Appendix System Default Values 144 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix Moderator s Menus This Appendix explains all menus that can be accessed and configured by conference moderators Applicable if the Conference Server feature is activated on the system Conference Moderator s Main Page Moderator s Menus The Moderator s Main Page can be accessed by clicking on the conference ID link on the Conferences Management page or by
309. ned in the field Password to indicates the password defined in the field SMS Recipient Address from indicates the password defined in the field SMS Sender Address Ytext indicates the SMS text generated by Quadro voice mail notification event notification etc Server text field requires the IP address or the host name of the SMS gateway Port text field requires the port number of the SMS gateway Use Secure HTTP checkbox enables access to SMS server via HTTPS Checkbox selection enables a Secure Port text field that requires the port number for HTTPS traffic Request Method manipulation radio buttons allow to select the HTTP request method used by Quadro the access the SMS gateway POST or GET Send Test SMS is used to send a test SMS to the defined SMS Recipient Address This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page Firmware Update This window allows updating the software of Quadro by installing new firmware image Users registered at Epygi will receive a notice when new firmware is available and will be able to download it from the Epygi Technical Support WEB page Updating new firmware requires a working power supply Quadro is provided with a battery accumulator If the battery is low or simply absent the There is no battery or voltage is low warning is displayed Please Note Installing new firmware will take about 15 minutes During this time Quadro telephony and I
310. nfigured to provide the TFTP server name parameter option 66 to the Quadro The second manipulation buttons group on this page allows you to select the frequency of checking for a new update e Check and notify choose this selection if you only wish to be notified about the new available firmware on the server With this selection on the indicated weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the server The way of notification is configured from the Events page e Check and update choose this selection to check and automatically install the new firmware on the Quadro as it becomes available on the server With Mam System Una Conia amete Teleplaey hvlarrieat Uplink Hatask Automatic Firmware Update Fete Autorii ally F iriran Update Serer Gonfiguraian b Assign manual Windate Method afi oir Kame Passed D ASH Homa CRSP Gel the TFTF server vale from DHCP germer This requires Guadi to Ee configured as DACP client also the DHCP server should be configured to provide the TE TP Serer nant p ririilor oe8dn R Check for updates this selection on the indicated weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the server will automatically download and install it on the Quadro The Check Update Now button is used to manually initiate Check and notify or Check and update actions The action to be
311. ng subnets QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 19 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide IP Policy Routes allow IP packets forwarding to the specified router depending on the source IP address as well as defining the priority for the current routing rule The IP Policy Routes table displays all specified IP policy routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Priority for the route priority Route From is where the subnet routed packets come from and Via IP Address is where the router IP address incoming packets should be routed through Add opens the Add IP Policy Route page to establish a new policy route Enable and Disable are used to activate or to deactivate the selected route s Raise Priority and Lower Priority are used to increase or decrease the priority of the selected policy route s by one At least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear The Add IP Policy Route page offers the following input options Priority requires a numeric value from 1 to 252 to define the priority of the routing rule The lower the number the sooner the routing rule will take effect higher priority From requires the packet source IP address and subnet mask of the specified destination to match with the rule Via IP address
312. ng the device to the internet through the available ISP connection Please Note Automatic Provisioning can only be run from the LAN side of the Quadro i e from the PC connected to the Quadro s LAN After the confirmation the Automatic Provisioning automatically detects and configures the following settings on the Quadro e WAN interface type PPPoE or Ethernet e WAN IP settings e PPP settings e ISP settings e DHCP settings e DNS settings e NAT Traversal settings QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Man System Users Confesences Tebspihmmy Wrote eet pirk Menara ik internet Configuration Wizard WAH IP Gontiguration Administrator s Menus Fig Il 9 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN IP Configuration page Lain Salen hee Cameram Talepi iarna Uplink Metacik Internet Configuration Wizard WAH Interface Configuration Fig Il 10 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN MAC Address Configuration page Man Sytem tse Cenfeiences Teleqaicars nternal Lipni Het werk Automatic Provisioning Sa TRE rS TOE Setcmiary fhapederier LYS Ine 0 215 Ckecking Rage service conmectivicy DUE Fiimaty hanedepder Les Loa 73 10 facondary mageserver 192 166 0 2 5 fe ep prt cum Epai tania lar The DP addresses of your system is changed by WAT Te mtf hot be able 6 wake fhine CALIA BLT type Blocked UD Tee is 4 L IF addteaasport Les baa 73 7377 5000 be Auto prorisionming Kits mou Fig I
313. ngs page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 79 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Bam Sten Uses Conferences Telephon inbes meet Uplink Helwolk epygi The STUN Parameters page enables automatic NAT _ configuration through the STUN server and is used to configure the STUN Simple Traversal of UDP over NAT client on the Quadro This page requires the following data to be inserted The STUN Server text field requires the STUN servers hostname or IP address The STUN Port text field requires the STUN server port number The Secondary STUN Server and Secondary STUN Port text fields respectively require the parameters of the secondary STUN server HAT Traversal Settings tinge SIP Poreneles ATE Poramelers UES ea Le dd Le TL Lic Pinar STUN Serer Slut aigla arr Pinar STM Pork Jary Seconday STUN conn sluni ereplab arm Secondary STUM P rl sary Polling interval lhow Kaop alye intereal 130 serondis HATIP checking inieeal J00 Ser EY Sava mark kepah gly SOS Ce Trisha en hie A reg has regareaed Help The Polling Interval drop down list contains the possible time i Fig Il 151 STUN Parameters page intervals between referrals to the STUN server The Keep alive interval text field provides the options to select the time interval in seconds for keeping NAT mapping alive The value should be in the range of 10 to 300 seconds The NAT IP checking interval text field
314. note that a different notification message can be uploaded in case this service serves as a notification to the extension user to inform about the new voice mail received or if it serves as a notification for the voice mail author to be informed that the message has been received by the Quadro but is not yet played by the extension user The uploaded file needs to be in the PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension and gives a You do not have enough space warning Browse browses for the notification file that must be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format Download Notification Message appears only if a file has been uploaded previously The link is used to download the audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified The ZeroOut voice mail feature allows a caller that has reached the called extension s voice mailbox to accelerate the automatic redirection feature instead of leaving a message in the extension s Voice Mailbox To activate this feature the caller should dial 0 digit see Feature Codes during the voice mail greeting which invites the caller to leave a message The caller will then be automatically transferred to the destination specified
315. nother agent who was longest idle etc If the call is not answered within Common Timeout the system either disconnects or redirects the call e Least Busy During Last Hour the system calls to the first available agent who was least busy during the last hour in average If the agent doesn t answer within Ringing Timeout the system tries to reach the next least busy agent etc If the call is not answered within Common Timeout the system either disconnects or redirects the call e Random Hunting the system calls to the first available agent selected randomly from the list of agents configured with Agents Group If the agent doesn t answer within Ringing Timeout the system tries to reach another agent selected randomly from the list etc If the call is not answered within Common Timeout the system either disconnects or redirects the call QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 49 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Skills the system calls to the first available agent with the highest composite skill s grade in the group If the agent doesn t answer within Ringing Timeout the system tries to reach the next agent with the highest composite skill etc If the call is not answered within Common Timeout the system either disconnects or redirects the call Enable Redirect checkbox is used to enable the call redirection to the other destination after some time spent in the queue This will avoid the calle
316. ns a single checkbox only The Enable Expansion Module checkbox is used to enable the supplementary module attached to the IP phone The Expansion Modules Count drop down list allows you to select how many additional expansion modules will be connected to the IP phone When the module is selected the number of programmable keys on the next page of the wizard is multiplied accordingly Enable Geran module Expanslinimadules chma 1 Previous Cancel Copyright C Sa Caa Teraa r L All righi rard Fig Il 113 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Snom phone QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 62 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide For Aastra 55i and 57i IP phones Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules page contains a number of drop down lists to select the types of the expansion modules and the sequence in which they are connected to the IP phone Administrator s Menus Man System Users Conferences Tehphony fternet Upank Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules Expansion Modules Module 1 SJM Module 550M Module 3 535M palogies LIS a reiemed Fig Il 114 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Aastra phone The next page of the wizard is available for Snom and Aastra phones This page is skipped for QCM Phone Model selection The content of this page depends on the configuration mad
317. ntain the phone number routable through Call Routing table on Quadro The agent with that kind of termination number might be positioned in any of the above mentioned locations Pressing on the Skill Value column of the Agent Management table will lead you to the Agent Skill Levels page where the skill levels for the corresponding agent should be configured We Gu a C Tipiy Agent 107 Skil Lovela The Agent Skill Levels page consists as many drop down lists as Skills created in the Skills page see below For each available Skill you should select the skill level from 0 to 10 with O meaning the absence of that specific pigs HAES nC Management Agent SKE Page skill and 10 meaning the highest level matching to the corresponding agent The Groups page of ACD Management contains a list of ACD Group type extensions filtered from the Extensions Management table This page allows you to configure the ACD Group specific parameters i e a collection of agents included to the group call queue and the call distribution mechanism Any new ACD Group created in this page will automatically be displayed in the Extensions Management table iia fee lees i 89 T ACD Management Add opens the Add Group page where a new ACD Group may be created The Add Group page includes the only ACD Group ID text field which requires the ACD Group number extension The ACD Group ID should not match any existing extension in the Extensions Management table Any
318. nter a routing pattern to the corresponding field Based on the registered PSTN users the caller will be able to reach the destination according to configurations in Call Routing Table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 88 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus By choosing a destination the Quadro administrator virtually assigns a default number that will start ringing when a call is initiated to the Quadro s PSTN number The PSTN Number text field allows you to enter the PSTN number that the current FXO line is attached to The field value is optional and used as an identification parameter for FXO lines The field value can be left empty Alternative AC Termination Mode appears if the local country Germany Israel France etc selected for Quadro has two COs that use different types of AC termination Contact your CO to learn about your AC termination mode Selecting the checkbox may help if the voice quality over FXO is poor or an echo is noticed To modify the FXO Settings 1 Select the FXO line number from the FXO Settings table The FXO Settings FXO will appear where the line settings may be modified 2 Enable the FXO line to receive calls from the PSTN To reject calls from to the PSTN deselect the Enable FXO checkbox 3 If FXO has been enabled select the Call Type from the Allowed Call Type drop down list and the extension from the Route FXO Call to drop down list to route the FXO calls corre
319. nternet access will be disabled The firmware update will cause the loss of the following data e All internally stored voice mails and custom voice messages Please Note If you do not wish to lose your voice data have it downloaded from Configuration Management page prior to starting the Firmware Update e DHCP leases e Transfer statistics e Call statistics Please Note If you consider the Call Statistics entries in the displayed tables to be important it is recommended to download them from the corresponding page prior to starting the Firmware Update Finniware update Fig Il 48 Firmware Update page 1 e All pending events e User specific GUI states The following main processes will be stopped during the firmware update and will be restarted after the installation is completed e Voice Software e Network Time Protocol Daemon e Network Interface Statistic Daemon e Dynamic DNS Daemon The Automatic Firmware Update link leads you to the page where the automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image can be configured QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 28 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Next button will move you to the second page of Firmware Update where the image file should be selected manually Attention Pressing the Next button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your device manually even if you have cancelled the firmware update procedure
320. ntrinsic to extension like extension number SIP user name etc it is characterized also by the collection of agents included into that group call queue and the call distribution mechanism These agent group specific parameters of extension are being configured from ACD Group Settings or ACD Agents Table accessible from ACD Group Extension Settings Call Queue of Agent Group Agent Group receives the calls from customers via means existing currently on Quadro For example it may receive the direct call through ITSP on SIP number DID number assigned to AG receive a call through ACD s IVR on AG s extension number external call through Call Routing table on Quadro etc Arrived call is being added to the end of the AG queue if there are no available online agents to answer the call immediately For connecting to the agents always the call at the top of the queue is being selected The call queue settings are configured from the ACD Group Settings see ACD Group Extension Settings Each agent can have of the following states online offline away busy or DND Do not Disturb for details see ACD Agents Table accessible from ACD Group Extension Seitings If the same agent is logged into different agent groups he she may have different states in different groups except for DND status If the agent has DND state in some group then his state will be the same for all other groups The state of the agent can be updated either by administrator
321. number automatically will be dialed by the system when the participant is configured to be a Dial Out see below or when a corresponding Conference Code is used see Conference Codes Conference ID 308 Participant Name Greg Lee SIP Address Tel number 11308 sip epygi com The participants SIP address should be a combination of username hostaddress port where hostaddress can be an IP address for iii Greg Lee epygi com example 192 168 90 10 or a host name e g sip epygi com The port number is Participant Type Speaker optional for the SIP address If no port is specified 5060 will be used The range of NEE valid ports is between 1024 and 65536 ia Stat E o V Dial Out Please note A direct call will be placed toward a participant s SIP address if the corresponding conference is registered on a different SIP server than the participant M1 Activate On Dial In is registered on or if the participant is not registered on any SIP server Participant Indication The value will be implied as a Routing Number and will be parsed through the Call Nested Conference Routing table if it does not match the SIP URI syntax C Allow Duplicated Participation Email Address requires the email address of the participant Conference related notifications configured from the Schedule page or using the Send Notification Mail Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved option will be sen
322. nvalid is displayed next to the ISDN routing pattern Invalid ISDN patterns will not be allowed The alternating Show Detailed View and Show Brief View buttons are used to display entries in the Call Routing table in detailed and brief views correspondingly The brief view displays the most important settings of the routing rules The detailed view displays all settings of the routing rules as they are configured in the Call Routing Wizard The alternating Hide disabled records and Show all records buttons are used to respectively hide or show disabled records in the Call Routing table The system does not consider the disabled records when parsing the table for the call route If the route has an Authentication or an Authentication amp Accounting selected from the AAA Required checkbox group it will have a link to the Users List in the Call Routing table The Users List page contains a list of authorized users defined from the Local AAA Table and gives the option to enable disable authentication of each user for a particular route Since the Call Routing Table may have multiple entries that could match to same pattern the table will be internally rearranged according to the rules with the following consequences e The pattern matching best to the Best Matching Algorithm will have the higher position in the rearranged list e f multiple patterns equally match to the Best Matching Algorithm the pattern with the lower metric will get the higher posit
323. oals x 2 hoar 48 min 4i gar P nei Mogiitaroi Sahi J4 min 20 gii Md min 49 gee The Memory Status page includes tables with the available User Space information for each extension These tables display the space used by the voice mailbox and uploaded recorded system greetings It shows the free and total space counted in minutes seconds for every extension This page includes the following information Memory Size shows total memory space counted in minutes seconds available on the Quadro and assigned to all extensions iste 100 rero Coneente Mimir Satu The table s links lead the administrator to the extension settings page where User Space may be altered The System Memory row indicates the space occupied by the universal extension recordings Link refers to the Upload Universal Extension Recordings page where universal extension system messages may be uploaded Teen Cappel fe ee a Linni Faber LA AN eg reed Call Statistics shows the current number of calls with recorded _ f Fig Il 25 Memory Status page statistic entries QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 17 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Hardware Status Man Suen ise Ominami Telephony heed iied peach Met esc Quadro Status Hardware Status JET LAM Pihama iar ETH Ehana 10 10 biiga Lirik by gaw ATAN Ethernet nar d titas Lin barrenaren mH Sani 4 Madana tann Earm Mla m m
324. ode is used See Conference Codes Conference ID 308 Participant Name Jane Doe The participants SIP address should be a _ combination of SIP Address Tel number 11248 username hostaddress port where hostaddress can be an IP address for example 192 168 90 10 or a host name e g sip epygi com The port Participant Type Listener Only number is optional for the SIP address If no port is specified 5060 will be nia Wee Stary V used The range of valid ports is between 1024 and 65536 l M Dial Out Please Note A direct call will be placed toward a participant s SIP address if 7 the corresponding conference is registered on a different SIP server than the I Participant Indication participant is registered on or if the participant is not registered on any SIP WW hastedionisrencs server L Allow Duplicated Participation The value will be implied as a Routing Number and will be parsed through 5 Back the Call Routing table if it does not match the SIP URI syntax Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Participant Type list is used to select the type speaker or listener of participant n iheconierernce Fig Il 5 Conference Progress Add Participant Page Confirmation Type list is used to set the password protection for the participant joining the active conference Star selection allows the participant to accept the conference invitation by pressing the button Only pa
325. omatically transferred to the destination specified in this page This selection activates the following fields to be inserted Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types e PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant e SIP calls through a SIP server e PSTN calls to PSTN e Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing The Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where the caller should be automatically forwarded to if activating the ZeroOut feature Upload new call queue welcome message allows updating the active call queue welcome message for the agents group played when a caller joins the agents group call queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Customize Queue Scenario settings are used to define a custom scenario for audio files played in the ACD queue Here you may upload custom audio files an
326. ome or place of utilization connect a Web browser to lt IP address gt 172 30 0 1 is the default IP address The email address of your Quadro Voice Router System Administrator is lt email address gt His phone numbers are lt phone numbers gt SIP Your SIP number an Internet phone number is lt SIP number gt Q sip epygi com This is a number you can give people to reach you The SIP number to reach the Auto Attendant of your local Quadro is lt SIP number gt sip epygi com Your SIP group link to provide you a phone directory of numbers to call is http www epygi com sip grp_view php viewgrp lt groupname gt The email address of your SIP System Administrator is lt email address gt His phone numbers are lt phone numbers gt QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 137 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Administrator Settings Parameter Admin Settings Quadro Hostname Quadro Domain Name LAN IP Address DHCP Server Regional Settings and Preferences Emergency and PSTN codes WAN Interface Protocol WAN Interface Bandwidth WAN IP MAC Address DNS Server IP Routing Configuration Configuration Management Event Settings Time Date Settings Mail Settings SMS Settings Automatic Firmware Update SNMP Settings System Logs Settings Features QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x System Default Value Login name admin Password 19 quadrom
327. on The Automatic Call Distribution is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page Automatic Call Distribution ACD is the contact center solution designed for queuing and automatic distribution of the calls between contact center agents ACD concept and the contact center solution are based on the following building blocks e Agent a call center user reachable via Quadro e Agent Group AG comprises the call queue collection of agents call center users and call distribution mechanism between its agents e Interactive Voice Response system IVR a custom Auto Attendant on Quadro answering the calls from remote callers customers collecting information from callers in the form of DTMF digits and based on that making the routing decision on delivering the call to proper Agent Group Predefined ACD Agent Auto Attendant used for agent login logout and updating the current status of the agent from the phone To monitor ACD processes on the Quadro Epygi provides a Statistics Monitoring and Reporting SMR application running on MS Windows PC SMSR doesn t require the 3PCC license see Features section to be installed on the Quadro It displays the current status and statistics on Agent Groups and Agents builds the statistical reports and sends notifications and alerts to ACD supervisor administrator For more details and requests for this applications contact Epygi sales division www epy
328. on Messages Incoming Blocking Message Listen to Current Incoming Blocking Message 2 Record a Universal Incoming Blocking Message Restore System Default Incoming Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Incoming Blocking Message Outgoing Blocking Message Listen to Current Outgoing Blocking Message 2 Record a Universal Outgoing Blocking Message Restore System Default Outgoing Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Outgoing Blocking Message Administrator s Logout Your Name Listen to Current Name recorded 2 Record a Universal Name Restore System Default Name Stop Recording or Playback Name Message Out of Office Message Listen to Current Out of Office Message Record a Universal Out of Office Message Restore System Default Out of Office Message Stop Recording or Playback Out of Office Message 135 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide 21BAppendix Conference Services for Moderators and Participants Appendix Conference Services for Moderators and Participants This chapter describes the feature codes for the Conference Services that enable the moderator and participants to manage call conferences from the phone Conference Services accessible during the conference Keys Invite Participant To invite a participant dial 1 Participant s SIP address or 1 Routing Number Service is available fo
329. on is enabled you will connect the newly arrived incoming call to the call on hold by pressing Xfer button When this option is disabled and you press the Xfer button you will have an option to choose the call on hold to transfer the newly arrived incoming call to or to dial a new destination manually Message LED for Dialog State Missed Calls when this option is enabled the phone will indicate missed calls and changing dialog states using the message LED Dialtone during Hold when this option is enabled and the call is held the caller gets dial tone Otherwise there will be no dial tone after pressing Hold Do not Disturb this selection allows you to manipulate with the IP phone DND service When the 72 is selected from this list the DND service of the IP Phone and the DND service of the Quadro for the corresponding extension will be activated when enabling the DND service from IP Phone This option is recommended When keyeventF_DND is selected only DND service of the phone will be activated when enabling the DND Record Missed Calls when this option is selected the information about the missed calls will be displayed on the IP Phone Any parameters not listed above or parameters defined in this page for other IP phone models can be found in the users manual of the corresponding IP phone Please Note Save changes before moving among the configuration pages I P Phones Logo The IP Phones Logo page is used to upload a custom
330. on since last reboot Ban Syelem Users Caminiti Telepleny bed ered Uplink Hel aork e Device hostname Quadro device host name Quadro Status General Information e Quadro Operating System Quadro operating system version Depe al butor peat ony phir dkm aapt Decaceestama T0005 O e Application Software Software and file system versions oa ea ae Hate Application Saha e 5031 Release of the Quadro BEE Aien Som Em Laik Us Bod 4 71 2a Language Pack Gapaflal eepafia 16 e Boot Loader Quadro boot loader version e DSP Software Quadro DSP software version and the date of build e Language Pack this field is present only when the Fig Il 13 Quadro Status General Information page custom language pack is uploaded and it indicates the version QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 12 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Network Status The Network Status page includes the following information about Interfaces Interface Name lists the Network interfaces available on the Quadro LAN WAN IPSec and a number of PPPs depending on the number of active PPP connections fia System Users 8 Conlerences Dedleplianey bret etnies Uplink hretvaork IP Address lists the IP addresses corresponding to each network interface Quadro Status Network Status Subnet Mask lists the subnet masks corresponding to each T network interface Network Status Properti
331. on the Ethernet connection The WAN Interface Bandwidth settings allow the specification of the upstream and downstream speeds in kbit s helping to assure the quality of IP calls An IP call looses the voice quality if there is no available bandwidth When approaching the limits of bandwidth capacity another IP call will be declined The bandwidth provided by the ISP has to be specified in the text fields Upstream Speed and Downstream Speed The default entry in both fields is 100000 the maximum bandwidth of a 100 MB Ethernet You may see the required bandwidth in the chapter Needed Bandwidth for IP Calls The Min Data Rate text field requires the amount of upstream bandwidth that ought to remain for data applications even if voice applications use the entire available upstream bandwidth The value selected here needs to be smaller than the upstream bandwidth and is measured in kbit s QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The WAN IP Configuration page is only displayed if Ethernet or PPTP has been selected to be the uplink protocol It offers the following components The Assign automatically via DHCP radio button selection switches to automatic retrieval of the WAN IP address from a DHCP server at the ISP uplink Please Note DHCP referred to here is the one that runs on the provider s side and not the Quadro s personal DHCP server The Assign Manually radio button switches to the manual
332. on with an extension attendant conference will be impossible Capi hh Ch SS 10 Erani Tenons Lod All ghir senera Fig Il 108 Extension Codecs list Select all selects all entries in the table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 57 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Inverse Selection performs an inverse selection of the selected entries Clicking this button when no entry is selected will select all entries Move up moves the selected codec one level up increasing the codec s priority Move down moves the selected codec one level down decreasing the codec s priority Make preferred moves the selected codec to the top of the table setting its priority to the highest Clicking the Make preferred button when a disabled codec is selected will first enable the codec and then move it to the top The following settings are available for user extensions and attendants only Out of Band DTMF Transport enables the DTMF code transmission in parallel with the voice stream Destination received the DTMF code will play it locally if it supports the feature too This helps avoid DTMFs loss in case of heavy traffic The feature is valuable for all codecs but it is especially recommended for low bit rate codecs such as G 729 G 726 16 etc Enable T 38 FAX enables the FAX tone detection and the T 38 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the T 38
333. only the PBX is connected to the ISDN trunk from the Quadro no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from the Quadro In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to manually mode assigning the default value of 0 If needed that value can be changed later in the Advanced Settings Fig l 169 ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings page of ISDN Wizard e PTMP Point to Multi Point In case of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices connected to the same ISDN trunk from CO except the Quadro In case of connection to PBX Network interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices connected to the same ISDN trunk from Quadro except for the PBX In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to automatic mode Please Note Consult with your CO operator or network administrator before configuring the ISDN connection type ISDN Wizard ISOH Settings Trunk Interface Type liger ka Conmmection Type D PTE Point To Poing MP Point To Muli Paini Caparighs 0 2 Caro Tiraha er Lig All righi reared The ISDN Wizard Page 2 content is dependent on the connection type selected on the previous page of ISDN Wizard Ti kn 5 Main System Users Conferences Tekee Wiert Lp Hetercak P T Sl qrad ISDN Wizard MSN Settings Trunk 4 Previous cancer The next page is ISDN Wizar
334. onnected to the conference Nested Conference indicates if the participant acts as a nested conference or not Request to Speak this column is only present for active conferences and indicates whether a listener participant has requested to speak by dialing 9 from the handset see Feature Codes When a listener participant requests to speak a hand up icon appears in this column Clicking on the hand icon in this column will grant the speaker permission to the corresponding participant Participant with the speaker permissions are able to speak to the conference The following functional buttons are present on Conference Progress page to manipulate with the participants in the conference QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 146 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus Add functional button opens the Add Participant page where a new participant can be manually added to the conference The Conference Progress Add Participant page consists of the following components Participant Name requires optional information first name last name nickname etc about the participant Main Conference Conference Properties SIP Address Tel number requires the contact phone number SIP address or Routing Number of the participant This number automatically will be Conference Progress Add Participant dialed by the system when the participant is configured to be a Dial Out see below or when a corresponding Conference C
335. ons are enabled The ZeroOut feature has a higher priority If it is enabled and used the system will forward all incoming calls to attendant to the specified redirect address As a result calls prefixed with O will never reach call routing Attendant Welcome Message this group allows updating the active Auto Attendant welcome message played only once when entering Auto Attendant downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Enable Welcome Message checkbox is used to enable disable the Auto Attendant welcome message the default one or the custom one uploaded from this page or recorded from the handset see Feature Codes being played when callers enter Quadro s Auto Attendant Upload new welcome message indicates the file name used to upload a new welcome message The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new welcome message file The Download Welcome Message and Remove Welcome Message links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Welcome Message link is used to d
336. op down list can be used SS A a a gett i for this setting Dial Flan Settings The Routing Dial Timeout setting will also be applied to all Routing Dial Timeout 4 E se the supported IP phones that are auto configured with the Quadro and provide the possibility of changing this setting through the auto configuration file The modified value of the setting will take effect after rebooting the IP phones Fig Il 197 Dial Plan Settings page 3PCC Settings The 3PCC Settings page is used to adjust the third party call controlling settings 3PCC service on the Quadro allows call controlling applications to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro Man Syeam Une Camerances Tapio hianat Hink This page consists of the following components IPCC Settings The Secure Connection checkbox is used enable a secure Request Timeoutisee 10 encrypted connection between the call controlling application Fesura Hay Notadded and the Quad ro wiih Pot hot Opened Please Note For successful connection this option should be set up in the same way on both sides enabled or disabled on both sides Fig Il 198 3PCC Settings page The Request Timeout text field requires the timeout in seconds during which the Quadro should receive a response to the request from the call controlling application If the response is not received during this timeout Quadro will perform a reque
337. or internal calls caller ID notification in FSK can show up to two lines of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display The first line shows the caller s extension number The second line shows the caller s nickname if indicated in the configuration For external IP calls caller ID notification in FSK can also show up to two lines of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display The first line shows the caller s user name The second line shows the callers nickname if indicated in configuration If the nickname is not available and there is a display name provided by the caller party the second line will display it otherwise the URL in the format username host will be displayed For calls from the PSTN network the entire caller ID message will be shown DTMF Standard The DTMF standard supports caller ID indication only if the phone handset is on hook phone is free and ready to accept calls This standard also has caller ID notification conditions but they are non configurable Caller ID notification in DTMF can show only one line of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display For internal calls it is the caller s extension number For external IP calls it is the caller s user name For calls from the PSTN network caller ID will only display the caller s phone number Please Note DTMF supports only parameters consisting of digits If any letter symbol has been used in the external caller user name DT
338. ord specified during the registration at the DynDNS provider The Max time between updates text field requires entering the period between two updates in hours The values entered in these fields should be greater than 24 otherwise the error message Update interval times smaller than 24 hours are too small will appear Normally whenever you set up a connection to the Internet the DynDNS is updated at least once in the period indicated in this field The Use predefined service radio button leads to the manual configuration of the DynDNS service The selection enables the following optional settings The Service drop down list contains the provider list where the administrator needs to select the one that it has been subscribed to Fig Il 220 Dynamic DNS Settings page The Host text field requires the name of the host on the Internet The TZO Connection Type text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider TZO The DHS Cloak Title text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider DHS The Mail Exchange text field requires the address of the e mail server where the DynDNS service provider will relay your e mails Attention If this service is used ensure that there is port forwarding configured for SMTP port 25 to the internal e mail server The easyDNS Partner text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider easyDNS Selecting the Create Custom HT
339. orded conferences are listed in the Recorded Conferences page only after conference recording termination In case of pause resume the recorded file is not terminated In case of stop start recording starts in new file The table of participants on this page lists all preconfigured participants independent of the conference status as well as new participants joined the conference if still connected to the conference and those participants added from the handset or GUI unless the conference is terminated For the active conference the table also displays participants added manually from GUI or from the handset and those participants that called in to the conference The Conference Progress table contains the following information for each participant Name this information is specific to manually added participants only see below SIP Address indicates the SIP address of the participant Participant Type indicates whether the participant is a speaker or a listener only Participant Indication indicates whether or not a beep indication during the call conference is configured for this participant to be played when he joins or leaves the conference Participant Status this column is only present for active conferences and indicates the state of the participant active for participants currently in the conference not active for participants not in the conference and joining for participants currently joining but not yet c
340. ormation requiring entry in the Extensions Directory Please Note The entries in the Extensions Directory can automatically be deleted if the extensions assigned to the entries are removed from the Extensions Management table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 64 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database page is used to create a list of trusted external phones If they are part of the Quadro Authorized Phones database external SIP or PSTN then users are free to access the Quadro Auto Attendant services without requiring authentication When adding a trusted phone to the list an existing extension has to be chosen The parameters extension number and password as well as SIP and Speed Calling Settings will be used automatically for the trusted caller access of the Quadro Auto Attendant A direct connection to the Call Relay menu can be optionally provided Man Syeem Use Comlarences Teh iamai Uine eK Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database page displays the Authorized Phones Database table where the trusted phones are listed Only SIP and PSTN users can be added to the Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database table displays all trusted callers with their settings For example the call type caller address extension they automatically login with information if they have automatic access to Call Relay Menu of
341. ote When saving changes on this page the system asks for a confirmation to remotely reboot the IP phone It is recommended to reboot the IP phone after configuration changes on this page in order to make the new configuration effective on the IP phone IP Phones Templates The IP Phones Templates is used to create custom templates for the IP Phones The templates contain a set of configuration settings that are uploaded to the IP phone once it is registered on the Quadro With the custom templates the most popular configuration settings may be adjusted accordingly The saved custom templates can be then configured from the Edit IP Line Settings page to be used on the particular IP phone Gen fetes fhe eens 1 IP Phones Templates The IP Phones Templates page consists of a table where the available IP phone templates are listed The systemdefault template in this table indicates the Quadro default template for all IP phones This template cannot be edited or deleted Add opens the Add Entry page where an IP phone template can be created The Add Entry page includes the following text fields Fig Il 159 IP Phones Templates Template Name text field indicates the name of the template This name will be visible in the Edit IP Line a Settings page when defining the template for the IP phone Description text field requires optional information about the template IP Phones Templates Add Entry Edit opens the Edit Entry page where t
342. other extension and if there is no answer from the destination side the call will automatically get back to the extension who initiated the transfer instead of getting into the destination s voice mailbox or being disconnected Allow Call Relay enables the current extension to be used to access the Call Relay service in the Quadro s Auto Attendant It is recommended to define a proper and non empty password when enabling this feature in order to protect the Call Relay service from an unauthenticated access With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc The Percentage of Total Memory drop down list allows you to select the space for the extension s voice mails and uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro When editing an existing extension and decreasing the voice mailbox size the system will check the present amount of voice mails in
343. ou to select the prefix code for accessing the PSTN line in the routing mode Dialing the digits inserted in this text field will provide the PSTN dial tone when dialed from the handset QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus Man Syman Users Cale GHS Tapin Internat Uplink Hebert System Configuration Wizard System Configuration Host Name T uadmMis Dimai Nami ermit LAN IP Goniguraiir IF Address IPellipbiard a Sueriel Mask P Clipboded Fig Il 4 System Configuration Wizard System Configuration page Main System lee Conferences Telephony internat Uplink Network System Configuration Wizard Regional Settings and Preferences Your locale jocationy United Kingdom Timezone GMT Dublin Edieibaegh Lisbon London Choose Syrom Language Onogse DEUR GUI Theme O Espa a apadial English Ley Fl croose Thr on Lowen Previous Capighe Ol Sah Se li iaaii Le Fig Il 5 System Configuration Wizard Main System Users Conferences Teleploery internet Uplink Network System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Code Settings Please enter l your Emergency Codes Separated by Commas and PSTN Access Code mas following fields Regional Settings page Cepygi TOusdro ees Fig Il 6 System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Codes Settings page QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Internet Configur
344. ownload the message file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Welcome Message link is used to restore the default welcome message Recurring Attendant Prompt this group allows updating the active recurring Auto Attendant message played after the Attendant Welcome Message and then periodically repeated while being in the Auto Attendant downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Upload new Recurring Attendant Prompt indicates the file name used to upload a new recurring auto attendant prompt The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new Recurring Attendant Prompt file The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt and Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt link is used to download the Recurring Attendant Prompt file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt
345. p allows updating the active conference welcome message played once a user is connected to the conference downloading it to the PC or removing the custom welcome message The group offers the following components Upload new welcome message indicates the file name used to upload a new welcome message The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding conference and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new welcome message file The Download Welcome Message and Remove Welcome Message links appear Cepygi quadro Main Conference Conference Properties Customization Conference ID 308 Play First in Conference message Welcome Message Upload new Welcome Message D iMediatwelocome wa Browse Hold Music File Upload new Hold Music file D iMediathold way Info File Upload Info file only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Welcome Message link is used to download the message file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Welcome Message link is used to restore the default welcome message DADocsinfo_text tet Browse
346. pear The Edit Entry page consists of two frames In the left frame settings groups are listed Clicking on the corresponding settings group displays their configuration options in the right frame Please Note Save changes before moving among settings groups Hide extensions attached to disabled IP lines functional button is used to hide extensions which are attached to the disabled IP lines When this functional button is pressed it transforms to Show all extensions functional button which is used to show all hidden extensions To enable the lines install a feature key from the Features page Reset SIP Settings functional button is used to reset all SIP settings of the selected extension s to the default values including all settings listed under SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages see below The Upload Universal Extension Recordings link found at the bottom of the page leads to the Upload Universal Extension Recordings page where universal default voice messages for all extensions can be defined The Add Multiple Extensions link leads to the Add Multiple Extensions page where multiple extensions can be added to the Extensions Management table at once User Extension Settings Man Syeien Users Comenances Telp biternet Uplink Hahah k Extensions Management Edit Entry 1 General Settings General Settings 101 This group requires extension s personal information and has SIP Settings the following components SIP Af
347. placed in the end of the routing pattern For example if the routing Pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the Prefix is 909 and Suffix is Oa the final phone number will be 9093450a Destination Type gives you the option to select the destination type The following destination types are available PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions PBX Voicemail calls directly to the voice mailbox of the local PBX extension PBX Intercom local calls to PBX extensions with the request of Intercom service see Manual IIl Extension Users Guide SIP calls through a SIP server SIP_Tunnel calls through a SIP tunnels established see SIP Tunnel Settings IP PSTN calls through the IP PSTN provider to the remove PSTN global telephone network FXO calls to the FXO global telephone network through shared FXO lines this option is only present when there are shared FXO lines available on the Quadro e ISDN calls to the ISDN global telephone network through shared ISDN trunk this option is only present when there are shared ISDN trunks available on the Quadro Metric allows entering a rating for the selected route in a range from 0 to 20 If a value is not inserted into this field 10 will be used as the default If two route entries match a user s dial string the route with the lower metric will be chosen The Description text field requires an optional description of the routing pattern The Filter on Sou
348. ponents Fig Il 98 Extensions Management Edit Entry ACD Agents Table page im ay ea D api b ri li CCIE Agents Table of Group 300 Add Emiry ACD Agent ID text field requires the name of the agent previously created from the Agents table of ACD Management Agent Status drop down list requires the actual status of the agent The following values are available in this list Fig Il 99 Agents Table of Group Add Entry page e Online the agent is logged into agent group and available for receiving the calls from that group e Offline the agent is not logged into the agent group and cannot receive the calls from that group The same agent still can receive the calls from the other groups where he she is online e Away the agent is logged in but temporarily unavailable for a short time by some reason DND Do Not Disturb agent is busy by some other activity not related to conversation on the phone For example agent can be busy by updating the customer s record after the call or entering some data into database Versus to Away status the DND state of the agent changes automatically to Online when the preconfigured DND timeout expires it is now 30 seconds by default Please Note The state of the Agent can also be modified from the handset by calling the predefined Auto Attendant see Attendant Extension Settings and ACD Management Move Up and Move Down buttons are used to move the selected entry one
349. prgir grig inc Enable Session Timer DHE tirer forall h l panods ar Shirirnid meari Link Cepysi Qed lz Meteo k Al aman according in the standard except Regabaton imetut 1 Regshwton failure trout 120 Transaction duration 32 Esgin nieh regul Pogi abai Tir H T 7 i M hD T Eerie Tet ree ini KH AN gtr ridi irid second s second s second s second s bela Fig Il 143 SIP Settings page Enable Session Timer enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The DNS server for SIP radio button group allows you to choose between regular DNS servers configured in the DNS Settings page and specific DNS servers for SIP traffic e Use default is used to apply regular DNS servers for SIP traffic QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 76 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Specific is used to enable SIP specific DNS servers For this selection both primary and secondary SIP DNS servers should be defined in the SIP DNS 1 and SIP DNS 2 text fields At the least a primary DNS server should be inserted The SIP Timers radio button group is used to define the timeouts of the SIP messages retransmission e RFC 3261 will apply standard SIP timers described in the corresponding specification e High availability will apply SIP timers to shorten the call establi
350. r to wait in the queue for too long This checkbox selection enables the following components Call Type lists the available call types e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions e SIP calls through a SIP server e PSTN calls to a global telephone network e Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number a SIP address or a PSTN number will be reached through the Call Routing Table The Redirect Address text field is used to define the address where the call will be redirected It might be within the scope of ACD like the address of another ACD agent or out of scope like the address of some voice mailbox The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here For the Auto call type a routing pattern needs to be defined Enable ZeroOut checkbox enables the ZeroOut feature When this feature is enabled callers that have reached the ACD Group extension may accelerate the automatic redirection instead of holding in the extension s queue To activate this feature caller should dial digit see Feature Codes while in the queue of ACD Group extension The caller will then be aut
351. r ID detection method that is configured for the selected line aala The caller ID detection method is different for various types of phones and can be found in the phone manual The Loopback Settings link takes you to the page where lines Fig Il 154 Line Settings Page can be configured for loopback diagnostics purposes When pressing on the line number under the Available Lines column the Onboard Line Settings page specific for the current line is opened and offers the following input options The Caller ID drop down list contains various standards of Caller ID transmissions It is used to send the calling party s information to the phone attached to the selected line Line Settings Line 1 No Caller ID ao FSK send prior to the first ring FSK send between the first and second ring FSK send both prior to a ring and between the first and second ring e DTMF send prior to the first ring e DTMF send between the first and the second ring e Combined send both DTMF prior to the first ring and FSK between the first and the second rings The Quadro sends the current time date to the called phone Fig Il 155 Line Codec and Caller ID Settings page together with the caller s information A group of Remote Party Disconnect Indication parameters are used to configure the private PBX attached to the Quadro FXS port e The Enable Busy Tone Indication checkbox enables a busy tone transmission to the FXS port w
352. r Moderators only Get the number of participants in the conference Q00 Plays information about the total number of participants in the conference at the certain moment Get the state of recording Q00 Plays the state of conference recording started stopped or paused Lock the conference Locks the conference When conference is locked nobody can dial in any more 660 Service is available for Moderators only Unlock the conference Unlocks the conference Now participants are allowed to dial in to the conference 660 Service is available for Moderators only Dial out to all users with dial out settings enabled Initiates the dial out to all participants currently inactive in the conference but configured to be dialed out also those added manually 600 from the handset by moderator Service is available for Moderators only Dial out to all users participant to the conference Initiates the dial out to all participants currently inactive in the conference 6008 Service is available for Moderators only Start or Resume Conference Recording 600 Service is available for Moderators only Pause Conference Recording QOO Service is available for Moderators only Stop Conference Recording 608 Service is available for Moderators only Request to Speak With this key combination a listener requests to speak and a notification hand up icon is displayed in the Conference Progress table The moderator can then s
353. r the call is Internal or External and whether it is a PSTN call PBX call or IP call Call Start Time shows the call start date and time Call Duration shows the current call duration RX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the incoming packets TX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the outgoing packets If RX and TX codecs are the same only one Codec field will be displayed For IP Line Status the following dynamical parameters appear on this page Username shows the IP phone s client name registered on the Quadro Last Registered shows the date and time the corresponding IP phone has been last registered on the Quadro Expires In shows when the last registration of the IP phone will expire Binding IP Address shows the IP address of the IP phone within the Quadro s LAN network The list of supplementary services provides the following additional status information for each telephone line Enabled or Disabled For Incoming and Outgoing Call Blocking Speed Calling Hiding Caller Info Voice Mailbox and Group List services the number of Entries will be displayed in the corresponding service table For Voice Mail Service the voice mailbox configuration mode is displayed here This allows administrator to view the status and to be notified about services running on Quadro for every line The services are designed as links that guide the administrator to the corresponding service page of the selected user QuadroM8L M
354. r the recording will start automatically as soon as the call is established or whether it will be activated manually by pressing the button on the phone during the call Fig Il 202 Call Recording Settings Add Entry page Maximum Recording Duration drop down list is used to select the maximum duration when the call between the defined caller and called parties will be recorded When the call recording duration expires it will be silently stopped while the call will stay active Recording To drop down list is for selecting the Recording Box extension previously created and configured from Extensions Management to be used for storing the recordings Description text field should contain some descriptive text related to recording rule Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to activate and deactivate the selected call recording rule s At least one rule should be selected in order to use these functions otherwise the following error message will appear No record s selected QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 112 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Internet Uplink Menu Mie tyvien bnin Tanit me pt Internet Uplink GuadroM J2x Management ketiwi Cale Fig Il 203 Internet Uplink menu in Dynamo theme Fig Il 204 Internet Uplink menu in Plain theme PPP PPTP Settings The PPP PPTP Settings page is used to establish a connection over the DSL link or any ot
355. rate Progress tone on IP checkbox selection will generate the progress tone to IP When Generate Progress Tone to PSTN PBX checkbox is selected Quadro generates ring tones to callers during ISDN call dialing This feature is mainly applicable to 2 stage dialing mode Enable CLIR Service checkbox selection enables Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR service which displays the incoming caller ID only if Presentation Indication is allowed on the remote side Otherwise if CLIR service is disabled caller ID will be unconditionally displayed When the Alternative Disconnection Mode checkbox is not selected Quadro will disconnect the call as soon as the disconnect message has been received from the peer When the checkbox is selected Quadro s user may hear a busy tone when peer has been disconnected The B1 Channel and B2 Channel checkboxes enables disables timeslots for voice transfer Disabling the timeslot will prevent both incoming and outgoing calls Clicking on the ISDN Stats link will open the ISDN Status page that displays ISDN traffic statistics on the corresponding ISDN trunk The ISDN Stats link is displayed for every active trunk on the board and refers to the page where ISDN trunk and traffic statistics can be viewed QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 92 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The ISDN Trunk Status page provides the following information about the selected trunk state IS
356. rator s Menus RTP Streaming Channels The RTP Streaming Channels page is used to configure channels where the broadcast RTP streams are transmitted These channels may be then configured to be used as hold music see Manual Ill Extension User s Guide or any other type of music played to the caller Men Geter there 0n ne ss Tegs RTP Streaming Channets The RTP Streaming Channels page consists of a table where RTP channels are listed Add opens the Add Entry page where a new RTP channel can be added Fig Il 199 RTP Streaming Channel page The Add Entry page includes the following text fields ian le le l eid idin od rie palma The RTP Channel Name text field requires the name or the number of the RTP channel RTP Streaming Channels Add Entry The Port Number text field requires the broadcasting RTP port number The Description text field requires optional information Fig Il 200 RTP Streaming Channel Add Entry page related to the RTP streaming channel Call Recording Settings The Call Recording service is optional on the Quadro and is activated from Features page by inserting a feature key The Call Recording is used to record PBX SIP or PSTN calls on the Quadro and store the recorded calls either in the local Recording Box or upload them to the remote server From Call Recording Settings page the call recording can be configured to be started automatically once the call starts or to be started m
357. rce Modify Caller ID checkbox selection allows limiting the functionality of the current route to be used by the defined caller s only If this checkbox is enabled source caller information Source Number Pattern Source Type Source Host etc will be required later in the Call Routing Wizard This option is enabled by default The Set Date Time Period s checkbox selection allows you to define a validity period s for current routing patterns to take place and to define pattern date time rules When this checkbox is enabled the Call Routing Wizard Page 5 will be displayed Set Tracing Debug Options on This Rule checkbox is used to switch events notification on the certain execution results of the corresponding routing rule When this checkbox is enabled the Call Routing Wizard Page 6 will be displayed Require Authorization for Enabling Disabling checkbox is used to enable administrator s password authentication when enabler disabler keys are configured for the routing rule The service can be used locally from the handset see Feature Codes in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide or remotely from Auto Attendant see Auto Attendant Services in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide When this checkbox is selected administrator s password will be requested to enable disable the certain routing rule s If the administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even
358. rded Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel establishment Fig Il 181 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry page The Master device IP text field requires the IP address of the master device The Master device port text field requires the SIP port number of the master device The Registration State field displays information whether the slave device is registered on the master or not The Registration Date Time field displays the time and the date of last registration on the master s device Call Routing The Call Routing service simplifies the calling procedure for Quadro users i e different types of calls internal SIP PSTN or IP PSTN can be placed in the same way SIP registration is not needed for extensions to make routing calls The Call Routing page offers the following components Mann System Users Conferences Telephony _ntermel Uplink Network e When the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing Call Routing checkbox is disabled for all incoming SIP calls Quadro will a Ge Gul iced amet first search the incoming SIP address in the Extensions si i Management table If found the incoming SIP call will ring ocalanTable o on the corresponding extension If not found Quadro will look for a matching routing rule in Call Routing table penea When the Route all Incoming SIP calls to Call Routing 9 ittvam
359. re IP lines Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox is used to setup the SIP phones connected to the Quadro via Plug and Play automatic configuration service To use this service this checkbox needs to be selected The SIP phone should be reset then After a clean boot up of the SIP phone Quadro will detect the SIP phone and all its characteristics generate the automatic configuration file and will upload it to the SIP phone The SIP phone will be then configured on the first available IP line of the Quadro and will become completely functional Please Note The Plug and Play service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below This service will not work in case the SIP phone is already manually configured or if it is not reset after enabling the Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox Enable Firmware Version Control checkbox is used to control the firmware version running on the SIP Phone attached to the Quadro This service also allows you to have the new firmware automatically downloaded and installed on your SIP Phone in case your SIP phone was running an old firmware upon connecting to the Quadro or when the Quadro s firmware has been updated and the compatibility was changed to the higher firmware version of the SIP phone Every new firmware of Quadro is compatible to a certain firmware version of each supported SIP phone If you are running older firmware on your SIP phone this service will automatically download and install the newer
360. re all VPN IPSec PPTP and L2TP connections can be viewed and edited Transfer Statistics link to the Transfer Statistics page Vey Man System Uses Conferences Telephony Ideanet Uplink Nebenak E Hy ul Transfer Statistics The Transfer Statistics page shows a user defined statistics table with the transmit receive value criteria interface type and time period It contains the following components kiraday LAN Time range of statistic table the drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram charts that are to be built Interface the drop down list offer the values e WAN Wide Area Network WAN events only e LAN Local Area Network LAN events only E i g E Er A A Fi E ii When Show also as readable values checkbox is selected an additional table with statistics values will be displayed on Fig Il 15 Transfer Statistics page the next page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 13 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The area Receive Values provides the following Receive Bytes number of received bytes Receive Packets number of received Ethernet packets Receive Errors number of received packets containing errors Receive Drop Errors number of received packets that have been discarded Receive Overrun Errors number of received overrun errors tha
361. responding record s in the Recording Box table that should to be deleted Click on Select all if all records should to be deleted 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the deletion with Yes The selected recordings will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the recordings in the inbox select No Receptionist Management The receptionist feature on the Quadro offers a variety of services to manipulate with multiple calls to keep the calls in the queue with the perspective to be answered by the receptionist and finally to be forwarded to the corresponding destination if needed The following services are available to the receptionist Call Queue Extension Status Call Interception Voicemail Transfer Multi Company Receptionist Call Queue This feature allows keeping multiple incoming calls in the queue when being on the line and to answer calls in the order they have been received The usage of this service is not limited to receptionist only and can also be used by the extension user if configured correspondingly The configuration of the Call Queue feature is done from the Extensions Management Edit Entry page where the length of the call queue and the call queue appearance is defined When the Call Queue service is enabled the second arriving call to the receptionist extension user will be either set into the queue if call queue appearance is 1 or will be ringing in the background of the active call if call waiting is ena
362. rieved from the IP pool and the procedure will be repeated If this checkbox is not selected the Quadro will provide an IP address immediately when requested The following functional buttons are available for managing DHCP options Add opens a page Add Entry page where a new DHCP server option can be defined The Add Entry page contains a group of manipulation radio buttons to select between the predefined DHCP server options or to define your own DHCP server option Predefined this selection allows you to select from the predefined DHCP server options The Option Name drop down list contains the most common DHCP server options The Option Value text field requires the value for the selected option The type and format of the value inserted in this field is dependent on the option selected from the Option Name drop down list e Custom this selection allows you to define a new DHCP server options The following parameters are required to be inserted for a new option Administrator s Menus Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Ep gl quadrom DHCP Advanced Settings Info DHCP Server is nor started correctly Add Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection E Gateways 172 30 0 1 E Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 E Domain name servers 172 30 0 1 o NBT name servers 0 0 0 0 Fi NTP servers 172 30 0 1 O Domain name epygi config loc C Overload tftp server name 172 30 0 1
363. right C 2003 2009 Epys 255 255 o i Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 245 VLAN Settings Add Entry page Main System Users Corderences Tetephosry kernet Updierk Metwosk Register Your Device In Technical Support Center Fig Il 246 Device Registration page Don t remind me more hides the registration notification forever QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 131 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Additional Feature Administrator s Additional Features Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking The Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking pages offer extended features for the administrator to activate incoming outgoing call blocking services for certain callers The users cannot change this information Mai Webi piii Yo Esteem Mipplemehitay Senatas Caller ID Based Services for SIP 1920287 sip epygl com For more information on the Call Blocking Settings pages see the Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking chapters of the Extensions Users Guide Manual Ill viging Caller in oermaton lena Service pigming CHi pierking The Call Blocking pages accessed from the Caller ID Based Cangen Cat Blocking Services table by clicking on the corresponding address gives Pisi the administrator the option to enable blocking services which irnia could not be disabled by the users MamEsanaia aia UnloaaNew Blocking Massaga re maaaring wa CTE ber
364. ring Rules Gat Bath Hal The Advanced Firewall Settings link refers to the page where Quadro s privacy can be configured Fig Il 221 Firewall and NAT Settings page The View Filter Rules link opens the Filtering Rules page j ie Advanced Firewall Settings Advanced Firewall Settings are used to deny Ping and Portscanning operations addressed towards the device With these features enabled Quadro will answer with inscrutable messages to the Ping and Portscanning operations Please Note Operations are available only when the firewall is enabled from the Firewall and NAT page Kam Symen Wee Cie ences leepra Hier eet Link Network This page offers the following components Advanced Firewall Configuration The Ping Stealth checkbox selection prohibits a Ping for changes here arees a restart of tne real wich nighn take afew sont operation toward Quadro from its WAN H The Fool Portscanner checkbox selection prohibits Quadro sme Bak portscanning from its WAN As a reply to a Portscanning essmimeramrar ter tusni sa ail suas tesem operation network unreachable or host unreachable feedback messages will be sent Fig Il 222 Advanced Firewall Settings page Filtering Rules The Filtering Rules page allows you to configure the filters for incoming and outgoing traffic To prevent inaccurate configuration only one rule per service is allowed The user may use IP groups to include several IP ad
365. rity Pressing the button will open the page where a row number should be specified together with the position the selected entry is to be placed before or after the defined row Local AAA Table The Local AAA Table page allows you to manage local authentication and the authorization database Callers dialing the routes which have an AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting option enabled will pass the authorization on the Local AAA Table by using a phone number or username password depending on the corresponding entry configuration on this page The caller passes authorization automatically if the detected phone number of the caller dialing a route has the AAA option enabled and is registered in the Local AAA Table If the caller ID service is Bate Serene ene n E a Coen disabled or the caller s phone number is not registered the caller is asked to enter a registration user name and password Call Routing Local AAA Table The Add functional button opens the Call Routing Local AAA ae pman inn Table Add Entry page where a new local AAA record can be created The Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry page offers a group of manipulation radio buttons to select the type of authorization and the following other parameters Fig Il 189 Local AAA Table page Mam System Users Conletonces Tehepleotry Pt crreet Upank e Authentication by Caller ID this selection is used to set the authentication based o
366. rm page appears when administrating an unregistered Quadro and it has been created for customer support purposes The page requires customer registration at the Epygi Technical Support Center It provides several links offering the following registration options Register now leads to the Epygi Technical Support System Registration page and requires customers information to submit the Quadro registration form Remind me later hides the registration notification in the Quadro through System Configuration Wizard or Internet Configuration Wizard until the next administrating activities Administrator s Menus Cecpysi Network 7 QuadroM32x 52 Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink DHCP Settings for the VLAN Interface Enable DHCP Server Activate Edit Vian ID IP Address Range WINS Server E 1 10 10 100 6 10 10 100 254 10 10 100 5 oO 7 10 50 10 200 10 50 10 254 10 50 10 199 VLAN Copyright C 2003 2009 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Settings Fig Il 243 DHCP Settings page for VLAN interface hie Syiir Wena i VLAN Settings Fig Il 244 VLAN Settings Ccpygi QuadroM32x 52 Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network VLAN Settings Add Entry M Enable Interface Type vlan ID Bo no 0 4094 Priority IP Address 16 lsa f IP Clipboard _IP Clipboard SubnetMask 255 Copy
367. rofile name can be used to create profiles for different extensions This is useful if the profiles have a similar purpose but differ in certain user specific settings such as voice mail greeting Zero Out destination number new voice mail notification options and so on Creating multiple profiles with the same name gives a wide flexibility to have different voice mail settings activated depending on which extension is called Please Note If an extension does not have a profile specified in a call routing rule or the specified profile name is incorrect the default Voice Mail Settings of the extension will be used The Voice Mail Profiles page contains a table where all Voice Mail Profiles for the corresponding extension are listed The the following functional buttons are available Add opens the Add Entry page where a new Profile Name should be defined Edit opens the Edit Entry page where Voice Mail Profile settings should be defined The Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page is used configure the profile specific voice mail settings This page contains the following components Maximum Mail Message Duration lists the possible values for maximum mail duration counted in minutes during which a voice mail will be recorded The Unlimited selection allows voice message to be recorded as long as the user s space could hold Send new voice message via email is an option to send new voice mail files via e mail to the defined recipien
368. rsa The SIP Tunnel Settings page is used to enable the Quadro as a slave or master device for SIP tunneling The page consists of the following components The Enable Tunnels to Slave Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a master device and allows you to configure the SIP tunnels to the slave Quadros When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Slave Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Slave Devices moves you to the page where a list of slave devices needs to be defined The Tunnels to Slave Devices page consists of a table where slave devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new slave device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The SIP Tunnel Name text field requires the tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel name with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quadro however this is not mandatory The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel_ The Password text field requires the authentication password Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel establishment
369. rticipants connected to the conference with the moderator password will be provided with permissions to manipulate the conference A group of checkboxes on this page allow configuration of participant specific settings e When the Dial Out checkbox is selected the participant will be automatically dialed out when the conference is activated e Participant Indication enables the beep indication during the conference when this participant joins or leaves the conference e Nested Conference must be selected if the participant is a Conference itself and enables the correct behavior of conference termination e Allow Duplicated Participation checkbox allows multiple participants with the selected Caller ID calling address to join the corresponding conference This is applicable when different participants are using the same shared number to place a call Dial Out functional button is used call one or more inactive participant s inviting them to join the conference Delete removes the selected participants from the conference Set Speaker functional button is used to grant selected participants a speaker s permissions A participant with speaker permissions is able to speak to the conference Set Listener functional button is used to grant selected participants a listener s permissions A participant with listener permissions is not able to speak to the conference and is only a listener Lecture Mode functional button is used to grant selected particip
370. s Edit Entry Extension 11 Len Mail message Jurata min 4 F Send MEA WEISS ME GES OES Va e mai Fl Enable ZereQut E mail ditas Minia Redimdcsi ipe PEN Repeat avery 5 min Rodig adanee ices 10 bres riers Voit Mail On Sand IF Send new wice message oliin va SMS Mites cumber 0907757171 Repeat every 1 min Man 1 bres E Fend new vce message nobtiicaions wa phone cal Callie SIF w ATN i bni eT Canta 2302 sip eprgicomn Repeatevery 1 min Mare 1 limes estore dataun Mothcation leks 356 Upload new Noticahon Message Cimedianonficaion wd Breese lt lt Less Nodfication opaons Restore detaun greeting fie Upibad miw greeting ie Cmecaignestingway Bews Sant Bax Dipig 5 ae Epai Tyyli Li All gh ved Fig Il 251 Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page Attention The e mail can only handle up to 3 minutes long voice mails If the voice mail is longer than 3 minutes it will be truncated and only the first 3 minutes of it will be sent to the indicated e mail address However in the e mail body the recipient will receive the information that the attached voice mail is truncated and the total length of the voice mail Please note that the voice mails longer than 3 minutes will not be removed from the voice mailbox once they are sent per e mail even if the Remove Voice Mail on send checkbox is selected This gives you a possibility to listen to the ending of the voice mail directly from your voice mailbox from t
371. s For example 2 15 60 23 32 or 2 15 60 23 132 are not valid patterns To valid pattern will be to 2 15 22 33 60 The same as above with the exception that character ranges can include single digit character elements only Example The pattern is 2 1 5 a c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 215 225 235 245 255 2a5 2b5 2c5 Precedes a control symbol and to indicate that it is used as an ordinary character not a wildcard Example The pattern is 1 1 3 Numbers matching the pattern are 1 1 1 2 1 3 Please Note Patterns cannot be prefixed with the symbol The system considers the patterns starting with as feature codes and does not parse them through the Call Routing table Used to indicate the full SIP address example 20233 sip epygi com This pattern is mainly used to call back users registered on the SIP server different from the one where the called party is registered Please Note Patterns containing symbol will not be parsed among those that do not have symbol in the Call Routing Table When calling from local extensions the calling number for local extension is sipnumber ip address of Quadro e g 20233 192 168 35 25 only the sipnumber part of the pattern will be parsed among other entries with symbol in the Call Routing Table QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 104 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Best Matching Algorithm All calls throug
372. s They provide information on successful unsuccessful and missed incoming and outgoing calls on the first three tables the statistics settings on the fourth page and the statistics automatic download configuration on the fifth page Call statistics allows the collecting of call events on the Quadro with their parameters and to search them by various criteria The Statistics Settings page offers the following input options The Enable Call Reporting checkbox enables Call Statistics reporting The selected number of statistics entries will be displayed in the Call Statistics tables The Maximal Number of Displayed Call Records drop down lists are used to select the number of Successful Missed and Unsuccessful Outgoing statistics entries to be displayed in the corresponding Call Statistics tables If the record numbers Cepygi exceed the numbers specified in these drop down lists the Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network ee oldest record will be removed Call Statistics Statistics Settings The Download All Call Statistics link is used to download whole displayed statistics in a file that can be viewed with a simple text editor This type of call statistics file is more easy to oe read and can be aligned ina spreadsheet Maximal Number Of Successful Call Records 1000 Successful Calls Missed Calls Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls Statistics Settings Automatically Download Enable Call Reporting Maximal Number O
373. s and decrypts 192 bit blocks of data cr e Ca e AES 256 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block Copyright C 2003 2010 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved cipher which encrypts and decrypts 256 bit blocks of data Fig Il 210 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties The area Authentication offers the following parameters to be selected e SHA Secure Hash Algorithm is a strong digest algorithm proposed by the US NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology agency as a standard digest algorithm and is used in the Digital Signature standard FIPS number 186 from NIST SHA is an improved variant of MD4 producing a 160 bit hash SHA and MD5 are the message digest algorithms available in IPSEC e MD5 Message Digest is a hash algorithm that makes a checksum over the messages The checksum is sent with the data and enables the receiver to notice whether the data has been altered The Diffie Hellman parameter is used to determine the length of the base prime numbers used during the key exchange process The cryptographic strength of any key derived depends in part on the strength of the Diffie Hellman group which is based upon the prime numbers The higher is the group bit rate the better is encryption If mismatched groups are specified on each peer negotiation fails The third page of the IPSec Connection wizard Automatic Keying is used to setup a type of password Shared Secret or the RSA
374. s page shows the current status of each of the FXS and IP lines or shared FXO ISDN lines including details of the attached extension Since only one line of information can be displayed at a time the Line IP Line and FXO ISDN Trunk functional buttons are used to navigate through the information regarding other lines The Lines Status table displayed for FXS and IP lines includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters only appear when an event takes place on the extension QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 14 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Static Parameters Extension shows the extension number of the selected telephone line Display Name shows the corresponding name Phone State may have the value On Hook or Off Hook For IP Line Status this field may additionally have Not Configured and Temporary Offline values Number of Active Calls shows the number of calls that are currently present on the phone Dynamic Parameters Call State shows the current state of the extension in voice mail in call waiting busy call out ring in etc Caller Party appears when a call is received and indicates the caller extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Called Party appears when a call is placed and indicates the destination extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Call Type shows whethe
375. sages only when Uplead Language Pack embedded memory storage is used ey re iene ee e Call statistics only when embedded memory storage is used e Pending events only when embedded memory storage is used e Transfer statistics Please Note Only one custom Language Pack can be uploaded at the time Uploading a Language Pack will remove the existing one if applicable and will reboot the Quadro Fig Il 63 Upload Language Pack page The Current Language Pack field displays read only information about the custom language pack uploaded When no custom language pack is uploaded the field indicates unknown QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 34 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Below there is a Language Pack File to Upload text field that displays the selected image filename The Browse button is used to browse the custom language pack to be uploaded The Remove Current Language Pack link is only seen when a custom language pack is uploaded and is used to remove it from the system The Custom languages for IP phones link is only seen when a custom language pack is uploaded and is used to move to the Update Languages for IP Phones page where a custom language pack may me uploaded to the IP phone Pressing Save will start uploading the custom language pack to the board Attention Pressing the Save button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your
376. sconnected from the conference The page consists of the following components Selecting the New Participant Allowed to Join checkbox will allow new users to connect the conference by simply dialing in no previous registration in Participants table is needed If this checkbox is selected the following settings should be provided Max New Participant Count text field requires the maximum number of new users allowed to connect to the conference Leave this field empty to allow unlimited number of new users connecting the conference New Participant Type drop down list is used to select the state Speaker or listener only of the new participants connected to the conference New Participant Confirmation Type drop down list is used to select whether the conference is password protected for the new users or not Selecting the New Participant Can Activate Conference checkbox will allow new users to activate the conference Selecting the New Participant Indication checkbox will enable a beep indication during the active conference when a new user joins or leaves the conference Handset Added Participants Configuration Main Conference Cc p y 8 l quadro Conference Properties New Participants Configuration Conference ID 308 New Participant Allowed To Join Max New Participant Count 30 New Participant Type Speaker vi New Participant Confirmation Type None v New Participant Can Activate The Conference
377. se an error message appears Please Note By saving the settings on the Change Extension Length page all existing extensions will lose the custom voice messages and voice mails in the voice mailbox The device will be rebooted You will not be automatically redirected to the login page so you need to access it manually again when reboot ends After the reboot the Change Extension Length page will disappear and the Extensions Management page will be displayed The Change Extension Length page will not appear again unless the default configuration settings are restored on the device Two types of user extensions active and inactive can be created on the Quadro Active extensions are those that are attached to a line can place and receive calls and use available telephony services Inactive extensions are those that are not attached to the line They can use some available telephony services but they cannot place and receive calls Instead inactive extensions have a voice mailbox available to store the messages from callers QuadroM8L M26x has two available lines and up to two active extensions can be established For QuadroM26x 24 additional FXS lines may be added using the TELCO port Attendant extensions are dedicated to the IVR system on the Quadro These extensions are used by callers to reach Quadro s users and use the remote access and call relay services It is possible to create Auto Attendants with the custom scenarios By default Quadro
378. se keys firmware and language pack are not being transferred from the master to backup Quadro therefore so make sure both Quadros are configured identically in the redundant network before enabling redundancy mechanism When you login to the device which runs in a backup mode only Redundancy Settings are available All other GUI configuration settings are non editable and automatically synchronized with the master device s configuration To ensure the interaction between the master and slave devices corresponding configuration should be done in the Redundancy Settings on both devices QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enable Redundancy checkbox is used to enable the a E A R redundancy functionality on the Quadro Active Device Mode drop down list is only present on backup REEN ADAS device and is used to adjust the behavior of the backup device during unavailability of master device When Active is selected backup device will become master once the original master ici device became unavailable When Passive is selected backup Virtual Sunnet Mak 8 i o Ji rinbo device stops its synchronization with the master device and will iG Tea eee not take over the control even when the original master got failed unless Swap Master Device button is pressed on the master iiig Cnc Niece via Quadro The Passive mode is used for firmware update or aaa eS language pack updates on master device when a reboot is requir
379. sed for authentication authorization and accounting to differentiate to secure and to account for the users The RADIUS Server provides the option for a caller from through Quadro to pass authentication and to be able to dial a specific number When a RADIUS client is enabled on the Quadro and according to the configuration of AAA Required option see Call Routing table the RADIUS server will be used to authenticate user and or to account for the call This can be accomplished by automatic detection of the caller s number or a customized login prompt where the caller is expected to enter a username and password Transactions between the client and the RADIUS server are authenticated through the use of a shared Secret Key which is never sent over the network In addition user passwords are encrypted when sent between the client and RADIUS server to eliminate the possibility of a party viewing an unsecured network where they could determine a user s password If no response from the RADIUS Server is returned after the Receive Timeout expires the request is resent numerous times as defined in the Retry Count list The client can also forward requests to an alternate server s if the primary server is down or unreachable An alternate server can be used after a number of failed tries to the primary server Once the RADIUS server receives the request it determines if the sending client is valid A request from a client that the RADIUS server does not re
380. sed to define the address to be included in the Retrieve Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The wildcard is supported in this field Wildcard is available for this field Paging Group Extension Settings Paging Group amp Access List The Paging Group service is used to page a group of extensions by forcing extensions to go off hook and opening one way communication The service is particularly used for announcements addressed to a group of extensions Service allows to page multiple extensions by dialing the Paging Group extension Please Note The Paging Group service requires called extensions to use one of the following SIP or analog phones which are able to automatically go off hook e snom 190 e Aastra 67311 e snom 200 e Aastra 480e analog phone e snom 220 e Grandstream BT200 e snom 300 e Grandstream GXP2000 e snom 320 e Polycom SoundPoint IP 300SIP e snom 360 e Polycom SoundPoint IP 330SIP e snom 370 e Polycom SoundPoint IP 331SIP e snom 820 e Polycom SoundPoint IP 335SIP e snom 870 e Polycom SoundPoint IP 450SIP e SNOM MeetingPoint e Polycom SoundPoint IP 501SIP e Aastra 480i e Polycom SoundPoint IP 550SIP e Aa
381. selected SNMP v1 will be implied SNMP v1 v2c Read Only Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read only management like gathering information events statistics etc about Quadro s Field may contain some kind of password which should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management Enable SNMP v1 2c Read Write Access checkbox additionally enables a read write access on the Quadro for the SNMP monitoring application With this checkbox enabled administrator will be able to remotely configure the Quadro via SNMP administrating program SNMP v1 v2c Read Write Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read write management like gathering information events statistics etc about Quadro s and remotely changing Quadro s configuration Field may contain some kind of password which should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management Han Seba ieee Conferences febephiry herme Uplink Hawak Global SNMP Settings Gok SA Sans SMP Trap Setings Quadra hintwork System Contact atimingsein epg oom Enab SPaMP wl de BMMP Yi ivc Ronan Oniy Community pubi El Enable SPP vi tc Roadie Access d Vike Comimuynite privalo Fig Il 54 Global SNMP Settings page The Service Restart button restarts the SNMP
382. selection the extension user will be unable to reach their Voice Mail Settings but will be able to access their Voice Mailbox and manage the existing voice mails Use Internal Voice Mail enables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension and defines the Quadro s internal storage as a location for the Voice Mails This selection also allows you to manipulate with the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard used by the extension s user to setup personal settings the password the voice mail greeting message and the user s name for Extensions Directory from the handset By default the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is enabled when the Quadro s is in the factory reset state It can be manually enabled from this page by pressing the Activate button When the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is activated the extension s user is prompted to insert personal settings as he she enters his her Voice Mailbox for the first time Unless the required information is not inserted the button is changed to Deactivate and the Configuration Wizard Status becomes Activated Use Deactivate button to stop Voice Mail Configuration Wizard When the user inserted the required information the Configuration Wizard Status on this page is changed to Passed and a Reactivate button appears Using Reactivate button you might re enable the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard so the user will be again prompted about his her personal settings next time entering his her Voice
383. shment registration confirmation and registration failure procedures This selection provides more firmness to the SIP connection but increases the network traffic on the Quadro e Custom allows manually defining the Registration Timeout Registration Failure Timeout Transaction Duration and Session refresh timeout SIP timers in seconds Host aliases for SIP link leads to the page where Quadro s external aliases are listed Generate And Install New CA Root Certificate link leads to the page where new CA root certificate may be defined generated and installed Download Current CA Root Certificate link is used to download the actual CA root certificate in a crt format Host aliases for SIP Mam Seton eos Tekpe Wier teed Uplink Network Host aliases for SIP ie The od mae configured in Dynamic ONE Seine is aulimnalicalty added W ihre fal This page is used to create a list of Quadro s hostnames register fd Eas Daite Select all hemet Selection on remote DNS servers This list will be used to identify SIP packets received from remote servers where Quadro is registered with different names The Host aliases for SIP page consists Of a table where fp psccsousi ceva rarsnnienan u ainsunte arena Quadro s aliases are listed Add opens the Add Entry page i A Fig Il 144 Host aliases for SIP page where a new alias name for Quadro should be defined Generate And Install New CA Root Certificate Ban Syelem Users Talsphoin hisini
384. sion Settings Call Queue Extension Settings Voice Mailbox Extension Settings Codecs for QuadroM8L Extension Settings Codecs for QuadroM26x Attendant 00 Settings General Attendant 00 Settings Attendant Scenario Attendant 00 Settings SIP QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x System Default Value Call Queue disabled Internal Voice Mail for all extensions Configuration wizard activated Shared Mailbox undefined For extensions 101 and 102 Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a G726 32 G726 16 G726 24 G726 40 enabled iLBC G 722 G 722 1 H 263 and H 264 disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled SRTP Policy Make unsecure calls accept anything For extensions 103 198 Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a enabled G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 iLBC G 722 G 722 1 H 263 and H 264 disabled Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled SRTP Policy Make unsecure calls accept anything For extensions 101 126 Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a G726 32 G726 16 G726 24 G726 40 enabled iLBC G 722 G 722 1 H 263 and H 264 disa
385. spondingly 4 Insert a PSTN number in the same named text field to identify the FXO line 5 Enable Alternative AC Termination Mode if this is a requirement of your CO 6 Press Save to submit the FXO line settings ISDN Settings The Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is distinguished by digital telephony and data transport services offered by regional telephone carriers ISDN involves the digitization of the telephone network which permits voice data text graphics music video and other source material to be transmitted over existing telephone wires The ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI service offers two B channels voice transfer and one D channel signaling data transfer The BRI B channel service operates at 64 kbit s and is meant to carry user data The BRI D channel service operates at 16 kbit s and is meant to carry control and signaling information although it can support user data transmission under certain circumstances The ISDN service allows Quadro act as a user or as a network If connected to a private PBX the Quadro should be configured in the network mode If an ISDN trunk from the CO Central Office is connected to the Quadro it should be configured as a user Quadro supports the MSN Multiple Subscriber Number service i e it can be subscribed to multiple numbers from the CO and two simultaneous calls can take place at a time The QuadroM8L M26x has no own ISDN trunks only shared ISDN trunks are displayed i
386. ss has been activated Lease End date and time when the leased IP address has been or will be deactivated Fig Il 240 DHCP Leases page for LAN interface Binding State indicates the state of the DHCP lease Hostname hostname provided by the host itself QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 129 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide DHCP Advanced Settings The DHCP Advanced Settings page is used to modify the advanced options of the DHCP server on the Quadro This page contains a table where a list of default DHCP server options is already defined More options can be added from this page as well as settings of the existing options can be modified All options in the table on this page are then sent to the DHCP clients e The Authoritative checkbox is used to enable disable authoritative mode on the Quadro DHCP server Disabling the checkbox is recommended if several DHCP servers are used on the network and the Quadro should provide network parameters to IP phones only e The Ping Check checkbox enables checking the availability of an IP address on the network before providing it to a client If this checkbox is selected the Quadro will first ping an IP address retrieved from the IP pool and wait for a reply If no a reply is received within a timeout specified in the Ping timeout text field by default 1 sec the retrieved IP address will be provided to the client If otherwise a new IP address will be ret
387. st dependent default action For example if the call controlling application is configured to handle incoming calls on the Quadro Once the incoming call occurs Quadro is trying to transfer the call to the call controlling application If the call controlling application does not response within the mentioned timeout Quadro will answer the call or perform an action configured for unanswered incoming calls This setting is dependent on the network conditions therefore consult with your network administrator before changing the default value The read only Feature Key text field indicates whether the feature key for the 3PCC Support is installed on the system The system will not accept connections from 3PCC applications if no key is found The 3PCC support is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page The read only WAN Port text field indicates whether there is a filtering rule specified for the Call Control Access If a third party call control application connects to the Quadro from the WAN interface a filtering rule for the corresponding host should be created on the Call Control Access page to allow the application a remote access Creating a filtering rule is not required if the firewall is not setup on the Quadro The field shows Opened if there is at least one enabled filtering rule for the Call Control Access QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 110 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administ
388. st router its IP address will be returned in its acknowledgement The second frame delivers the IP address of the second router and so on and so forth The results of Traceroute are displayed on the lower area of the page Ping Target requires the destination IP address or host name for the ping request If Use ICMP checkbox is selected an ICMP request will be send to the ping destination MS Windows standard Otherwise if checkbox is not selected a UDP request will be send Linux standard Hotworking Tools The Ping button starts pinging the specified ping target Traceroute Target is used to enter the IP address or host name of the destination to be trace routed The Traceroute button is used to process the router triggering to check the Internet connection In the field below these the output of the Ping or Traceroute procedure is shown Fig Il 53 Networking Tools page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 30 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus To Check the Internet connection 1 Specify the destination address for the ICMP request in the Ping Target text field 2 Press the Ping button to process the ICMP request 3 Specify the destination address to trace the route 4 Press the Traceroute button to process the router triggering SNMP Settings The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management infor
389. st upsae nate a vais A seontemenrat checkbox is enabled for all incoming SIP calls Quadro will authentication options l directly look for a matching routing rule in Call Routing prvi AAO Be table and will ignore the possible matches in the Fig Il 182 Call Routing page Extensions Management table Attention Regardless of whether the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing checkbox is selected or not SIP calls from external callers will or may go to the Call Routing table so any unprotected routing rule can be misused That is why it is strongly recommended to secure the rules in the Call Routing table by setting the filtering or authentication options The Call Routing Table link leads to the Call Routing table where routing patterns may be manually defined The Local AAA Table link leads to the page where local AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting database can be managed The Global Speed Dial Directory link leads to the page where global speed dialing rules may be uploaded in a file QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 96 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network Call Routing Table Show Detailed View Hide disabled records Enable Disable Add Edit Duplicate Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Move Up Move Down Move To Destination Number Pattern P Failover Local Source Number Pattern Source e ee iD Ste Patt
390. stablishment The manipulation radio buttons selection on this page allows you to choose whether the new connection will be a client or a server For the Client radio button selection no further details need to be provided For the Server radio button selection the following information needs to be provided For PPTP connection the PPTP Server text field requires an IP address or a host name of the PPTP server For L2TP connection the L2TP Server text fields require an IP address of the L2TP server The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are only present if the Connection Type selected on the previous page is PPTP They are used to select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables the Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected Administrator s Menus DVO Ram Sten Uses Conherences Tekapo inber ret Uplink Hetwok P I Sl Tig cies a PPTPILZTP Connection Wizard Add PTF L2TP Connection Connection Name GuadrerConnacton Connection Type FETE w cane Capyrigh 0 2 a Poa Tiraka er Lig All righi reared Fig Il 215 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 Main Saute Users Conferences Telephony iernat Uplink Hebercek epyzi Tous deat PPTP LZTP Connection Wizard PPTP Cannection Prop erties Guadroconnection Peer Marne quadredt Paccejrd asa amp chen PPTP Benar a2 168 35 171
391. started recording paused and recording stopped is also displayed herein C Jane Doe Copyright C 2003 2008 Epys 11248 sip epygiloc Listener Only Active i Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 4 Conference Progress Page The following buttons are available on this page to manage the active conference Activate available for an inactive conference only and used to activate the conference Terminate available for an active conference only and used to terminate the active conference Lock available for an active conference only and used to lock the conference When a conference is locked no users can connect to it Unlock available for an active conference only and used to unlock the conference Start Resume available for an active conference only and used to start the recording of the conference or to resume the recording if it was paused Pause available for an active conference only and used to pause the recording of the conference Stop available for an active conference only and used to stop the recording of the conference Please Note Pausing and Resuming the conference recording can be used to edit the recorded conference audio file When pause resume operations are used conference is recorded in a single file leaving out the conversation during which conference recording was paused When using stop start operations new files are created each time conference recording is started All rec
392. stination mobile number for a test SMS Bond ial Shes swe Back SMS Gateway manipulation radio buttons allow to selected between pre defined Clickatell SMS gateway and the custom defined SMS gateways Copyright 0 FOCA Epa gi Teche gee Loj AN righir rene rae Fig Il 47 SMS Settings page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 27 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Clickatell this selection allows to use a pre defined SMS gateway Selection enables the API ID text field which indicates a Clicatell specific parameter obtained from the server and should match on both sides e Custom this selection allows to use a custom SMS gateway Selection requires following parameters to be inserted Resource text field requires the HTTP resource name on the SMS gateway for example http sms cgi Parameters text field requires the parameters to be submitted to the resource address The value of this field represents a string with tokens separated by percent symbols inside Each token indicates a value of the certain field on this page The value is dependent on the SMS gateway requirements For example user uUsername amp password password amp to Vto V amp from V fromV amp text Vtext The tokens are the strings that have the following dependencies from the field in this page Yusername indicates the username defined in the field Username Ypassword indicates the password defi
393. stra 480iCT e Polycom SoundPoint IP 601SIP e Aastra 9112i e Polycom SoundPoint IP 650SIP e Aastra 9133i e Polycom SoundStation IP 6000 e Aastra 9143i 33i e Polycom VVX 1500 e 6 Aastra 9480i 35i e Linksys SPA921 e Aastra 9480iCT e Linksys SPA922 e Aastra 67511 e Linksys SPA941 e Aastra 67531 e Linksys SPA942 e Aastra 6755i e Yealink T20 e Aastra 6757i e Yealink T22 e Aastra 6757iCT e Yealink T26 e Aastra 6730i e Yealink T28 The Paging Group list is used to define the extensions that will be paged They will automatically go off hook when the paging call comes in The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are explicitly allowed forbidden to activate the call paging using the corresponding extension When calling to the Paging Group extension the call will be forwarded to the extensions listed in the Paging Group table The phones of the called extensions will automatically go off hook the phone speaker automatically becomes activated and the caller will be able to make his announcement Since the paging call opens one way communication the called extensions will not be able to give an answer to the caller To terminate the paging call caller should simply hang up Attention Call paging will not work if the called extension is in call When caller not listed in the Access List calls the Paging Group extension password authorization using the password of the Paging Group e
394. strator s Menus Enable automatic PPP restart at checkbox is used to select the time when the PPP connection will automatically be restarted The checkbox selection enables LCP echo failures text field that indicates the number of the LCP echo failure packets received before the PPP connection will be considered as dead and will be restarted Disable CCP Compression Control Protocol negotiation this option should only be selected if the peer system is not working properly For example if it is not accepting the requests from the PPPD Point to Point Daemon for CCP negotiation Disable magic number negotiation with this option PPPD cannot detect a looped back line This option should only be a li GIN a N TENET MO selected if the peer is not working properly Advanced PPP Settings Disable protocol field compression negotiation in both the receive and the transmit direction with this option no protocol field compression will take place Disable Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression in both the transmit and the receive direction with this option no negotiation of TCP IP header compression will take place and the header will always be sent uncompressed Disable the connection ID compression option in Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression with this option PPPD will not compress the connection ID byte from Van Jacobson and will not ask the peer to do so Disable the IPXCP and IPX protocols this opt
395. stribution type is something else then AG will distribute the calls according to that distribution type don t taking into account the skill grades of the agents In case if the call is received on agent group bypassing ACD s IVR and the skills based call distribution is selected for that agent group the agent group will consider the full set of skills when making decision on which agent to make a call first In other words since there is no required set of skills received from IVR then the agent group will consider the full set of skills summing up all skill grades of agent To simplest way to build the VoXML script for IVR is using the text of the Epygi s sample VoXML script modify that and customize for your application The IVR voice prompts should be recorded and uploaded as usual The ACD Management page consists of 3 sub pages Skills Agents and Groups ACD Management fie PH sad hh LE Diis taal 78 i i Tm Tama Tach Tapert trnetstie p Be oreda parce Fine The Skills page contains a list of all available skills and their descriptions The skills defined in this page are then used in the agent management see above to assign the skill level to the agents i ates Mee E rene ACD Management Add Skill Fig Il 122 ACD Management Skills page Add opens the Add Skill page where a new skill may be defined The Add Skill page contains the Skill text field to define the skill name and an optional Description field
396. sub system on the Quadro Restarting the SNMP sub system is recommended if it does not respond to a SNMP manager s requests SNMP Trap Settings are used to define the traphosts that should be informed when certain events occur on the Quadro For the listed traphosts to be informed about the events on the Quadro Send SNMP Trap action should be configured for the corresponding event s from the Events page SNMP Trap Settings page contains a list of all configured traphosts with the referring information QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Man Syam Uses Confenences Telephony bienne Liplinhi Network SNMP Trap Settings SAA nay Seta Fig Il 55 SNMP Trap Settings page 31 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Add functional button is used to add a new traphost to the table and opens Add SNMP Traphost page where the new traphost might be defined Page consists of the following components Traphost text field requires an IP address or the host name of Man System Users Conferences Telepheey internet Uplink Network the traphost Administrating application s host address should be inserted here Add SNMP Traphost Community text field requires community description public i 192 104428 private etc for the administrating application to accept the notifications about the certain events on the Quadro Field may contain some kind of password which should be the same both on Quadro and on the a
397. t automatically to this address This field is not available on this page when it is reached from the Conference Progress page Fig Il 13 Participants Add Entry Page Participant Type list is used to select the type Speaker or listener of the participant in the conference Confirmation Type list is used to set the password protection for the participant joining the active conference Star selection allows the participant to accept the conference invitation by pressing the button Only participants connected to the conference with the moderator password will be provided with the permissions to manipulate the conference Please note Confirmation Type should be selected to none when the Participant Type is listener A group of checkboxes on this page allow configuration of participant specific settings e When the Dial Out checkbox is selected the participant will be automatically dialed out when the conference is activated e Activate On Dial In automatically activates the conference when this participant joins the conference call This checkbox is not available on this page when it is reached from the Conference Progress page QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 151 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Moderator s Menus e Participant Indication enables the beep indication during the conference when this participant joins or leaves the conference e Nested Conference should be selected if the participant is a Con
398. t number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the accounting messages UserName quadrorad Bang Aitouring massages W Both Gtit and Slop message Fig Il 195 Radius Client Settings page 2 Authentication Settings The Enable common login for all users in time of by Phone authentication checkbox enables custom settings for the callers who passed an authorization by phone on the Quadro This checkbox enables Username and Password text fields to insert the custom settings that will stand instead of the source caller s settings when being delivered to the RADIUS server The Authentication on Destination RADIUS Server parameters group is used to insert a Username and a Password followed by the password confirmation to pass authentication on the RADIUS Server of the destination Quadro If these fields are left empty the original authentication settings that users enter for authentication will be used 3 Accounting Settings The Username field is dedicated for accounting services only It is used to insert an identification username for accounting purposes When no username is specified in this field the source username will be used for accounting The Send Accounting messages manipulation radio buttons group is used to select sending both Start and Stop accounting messages or only Stop accounting message Voice Mail Common Settings The Voice Mail Recording Codec page is used to configure the codec for the Voice Mail recording a
399. t occur when the receive buffer is not large enough to hold all incoming packets This error usually appears due to a slow receiving system Receive MultiCast Packets number of received broadcast packets The area Transmit Values provides the following Transmit Bytes number of transmitted bytes Transmit Packets number of transmitted Ethernet packets Transmit Errors number of transmitted packets containing errors Transmit Drop Errors number of transmitted packets that have been discarded Transmit Carrier Errors number of transmit carrier errors that occur due to a defective or lost connection on the Ethernet link Transmit Collisions number of transfer errors that occurred during a simultaneous packet transmission from both sides Administrator s Menus Mom System linen Conferences Telephony Baar teen A glir Horak li i li i li da ala ls ArT ls el AET A ET da Aa AET AET AET alos dias l Fig Il 16 Transfer Statistics Diagram Chart To see the Transfer Statistics Diagram Charts select the desired criteria and click Save to generate the corresponding chart and the table showing the transfer statistics values if enabled The letters M millions and K thousands used in the legend of the displayed diagrams show the total number of specified criteria The Reset Statistics button is used to reset the chart and the table if enabled Lines Status The Quadro Status Lines Statu
400. tart all Connections restarts all active IPSec connections The State of these IPSec connections will turn into Connected or Activated if the restart procedure has been successfully completed The first IPSec Connection Wizard page Add IPSec Connection has the Connection Name text field that requires a new mandatory IPSec connection name If the text field is not filled in the error message otherwise an error will occur Error Incorrect connection name will appear Please Note The input in the Connection Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and IPSec connection cannot be created The Peer type drop down list is used to choose the remote machine type for the IPSec Connection to be established If the list does not include the required type of machine choose Other The VPN Network Topology drop down list allows you to select the location of the peers participating to the VPN connection The following options are present in the list Man System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Nelwoik epysi Tous desk IPSec Connection Wizard Add IPSec Connection Connection Name Paar typa VPM Metwiek Topology Guadi Peer e Quadro lt gt Peer direct connection between Quadro and a peer e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet e Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet throug
401. te FTP server The Recording Box is used to locally store the recorded calls The Recording Box can be accessible online from Web Management or from handset by calling the corresponding Recording Box extension With both options the user can play and delete the recorded calls located in the Recording Box When accessing the Recording Box through the handset all recording box functionality settings such as enabling the welcome message adjusting the maximal call recording duration recording box access security etc are configurable from Recording Box Extension Settings page Instructions on accessing and navigating within the Recording Box via the phone handset are described in the Feature Codes Please Note When playing a new call recording via a phone handset or with the use of the Play button in this page will deprive the New state of the recorded call Mae api lee ine fein thal ex ond gains CETE Recording Box 0 heme Cee Weekes Hiei Shee Gin ua ie Cass reas PEEN morera EE Lee 7 bier 7 ian a epee SA ise bist Denko Se Ts heeled foe pak gt a ia iiH Darbas e H ee ewe Ki ET eo ha phe ea e Ha She eee HE i rnn J rna E e t A is pepara o TIE ETET wmo THRG a BELTE Pa Bagh hemiin MHD yp ppp aan me LLLA eR ENET Tirkama Fpa mfy O Vaa sp yy ma De ee p p a T Pa 4 0 egy a ini k ee ee ea ET TEAT eg The Recording Box can
402. te Voice Mail server When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing O the call will be redirected to the remote voice mail server Fig Il 81 Extensions Management Edit Entry Voice Mailbox Settings page For each of these selections it is required to enter the SIP URI of the Voice Mail Server where voice mails of the corresponding extension will be collected Attention By choosing the Use External Voice Mail option some internal voice mailbox services may become unavailable Instead the services of the external voice mail server will become available to the user Please consult with the external voice mail server administrator before enabling this option The Transport Protocol for SIP messages radio buttons allow the transport protocol UDP or TCP for transmission of SIP messages to be selected QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Administrator s Menus 43 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide 7 Licensing Mam System Users Conferences Telephony Saetnet Upled Netwoth This page is only available if the corresponding licensing is enabled from the Features page Extensions Management Edit Entry This group allows you to configure the extension to be used by a License Settings 11 the Quadro Communication Manager QCM soft phone ne application Enable OCM Quadro Communk ation Managen Beense The page contains Enable QCM Quadro Communication Manager license checkbox which allows you to set the
403. tei Enable move it up or down etc oO G7 11a PCM mhie coding standard 0 kHz eae rae 0 bia 64 Kis da pare Enabled The table entries in bold type indicate codecs enabled for the ot alii anaiena aib selected extension attendant conference The enabled isla tle aama easke codecs participate in codec negotiation at the call setup The col kkaa leaden aeto aani order of the enabled codecs is very important Each codec in a a ahea the table has a higher priority than the codecs below it and a ee ad aaea lower priority than the codecs above it A codec placed at the top of the table is used as the preferred codec When establishing a call the system will try this codec first If the remote party does not support the preferred codec the following codecs will be tried out strictly in the order given in the Codecs table e Please Note Pay attention when configuring Auto Attendant E Gnabte Paes Through Fax Codecs as they are used by virtual extensions for redirecting the incoming calls DTI 40 audi coding af 48 64 kbi data rale 16 kee tampia rele 3 72201 AO da3 coding A 24 32 KOS eS role 16 KAS Sore rate E uf of Band TMF Transpor Secure ATP Settgs Enable Disable enables or disables the selected codec BRTF Poke lake ineecure calla Accaplenihing Disabled codecs do not participate in codec negotiation i e Gee cae o they will never be used to for call setup At least one codec must be enabled otherwise voice communicati
404. ten to the hold music unless moderator will join the conference Leave Active checkbox will keep conference active even if all participants have left it Recording Settings The settings on this page are addressed to the conference recording configuration enabling conference recording defining the recording memory allocation internal or external storage etc QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 149 Moderator s Menus QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The Recording Settings page offers the following components Main The Enable Recording checkbox enables an option to be used for active conferences to perform the online recordings With this checkbox selected a group of radio buttons is activated to select the storage for the recorded conference audio files Conference Moderator s Menus Cepysi quadro Conference Properties Recording Settings Conference ID 308 e Use Internal Storage switches the location used to store the recorded conference audio files to the system internal memory Max Recording Time requires the maximum duration in minutes of one recording to be done If the conference recording has been paused and resumed again the Max Recording Time value will indicate the actual recorded time Leave this field empty not to limit the duration of the conference recording e Use External Storage switches the location used to store the recorded conference audio files to an external destination
405. the Auto Attendant etc Fig Il 120 Authorized Phones Database Each record in the table has an assigned checkbox The checkbox is used to edit or delete the corresponding record The No records selected error message occurs if the user activates the edit or delete button with no records being selected The error message One record should be selected appears if the user tries to edit more than one record The heading of each column in the table has a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The Add functional button refers to the Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page where new trusted users may be entered Main System Users Conferences Debepplcry imienne Uplink Heba The Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page offers two groups of input options Authorized Phones Database Add Entry Caller Settings Caller Settings The Call Type drop down list includes possible incoming call Call Type CallerAddress 70755851P Argi tom 3iF Clipboard types PSTN SIP or Auto In SIP the caller connects bwildeard suppan Quadro through a SIP server and PSTN means the caller is a ernest PSTN user Auto is used for undefined call types and the elakare der ad Rolar Mey destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP vee reenter address or PSTN number will be reached thro
406. the SIP server The SIP Port may only contain digit values otherwise an error message SIP Port is incorrect will appear If the SIP server port is not specified Quadro will access the SIP server via the default 5060 port Registration on SIP Server checkbox enables the SIP server registration option on the newly created extensions Extension Codecs To establish an IP voice communication call participants have to use the same codec When establishing a communication line this codec is negotiated If the caller does not find an appropriate codec the communication does not take place To allow communication with all IP callers it is helpful to support as many codecs as possible In this case all codecs that the system offers should be enabled in the Codecs table On the other hand some codecs require quite a high transfer rate of up to 64 kBit s If you definitely do not want to use these codecs make sure they are disabled in the Codecs table Mam System Uses Conferences Telephony Ibenet Link Nelyoak Extension 101 Codecs i i Enables Selecta iniii Sthectieon Bhise i Mi Doim Mii poth eil The Codecs table lists the voice and video codecs supported HOE State by the Quadro Each table entry is assigned a checkbox that O GTi PCM aaie coding standard 0 KHz sample rate 0 bits 64 khta data rates pretana Enabled is used to manipulate the entry for example to disable to C729 CS ACELP speech coding at 8 khitis ra
407. the handset by the moderator during the active conference can be configured Once a handset added participant connects the conference he will automatically be added to the Conference Progress table on this page and remain oO id 20232 sip epygicom Speaker No Star No No Andy White epygi com there unless the conference is terminated Handset Added Participants Confiquration Registered Participants Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Participant Confirmation Nested Indication Type Conference Name SIP Address Duplication Mail Address Participant n a ial O ige Dial Out Trigger Greg Lae 11308 Speaker No Star No Greg Lee epygi com The table on this page lists all preconfigured participants Jane ieni E i i Fi Doe 11248 sip epygi loc Only No Star Jane Doe epygi com allows to add new participants and to modify the settings of the exiting ones Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 12 Participants Page Add opens an Add Entry page where new participants can be added to the F conference The following parameters are needed to configure participant settings Main Conference Conference Properties Ce py I quadro Participant Name requires optional information first name last name nickname etc about the participant Participants Add Entry SIP Address Tel number requires the contact phone number SIP address or Routing Number of the participant This
408. the mailbox of the extension If the memory required for these voice mails exceeds the size entered the system will suggest either to remove all voice messages from the extension s voice mailbox or to select a larger size so that the existing voice messages can be stored in the mailbox The Enable Ringing Simulation checkbox is available on virtual extensions only and enables extra ring tones played to the caller before the voice mail of the called virtual extension gets activated If this checkbox is not enabled the voice mailbox will get activated immediately the call arrives The ring tones will be played during the timeout specified in the Ringing Simulation Timeout text field The Allow other users to Barge In to this extension checkbox is used to enable the Barge In Service on the extension and to define the access list The Edit Barge In Access List link moves to the Barge In Access List where extensions that are allowed to barge in to the current extension should be defined and the corresponding permissions should be configured QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 39 The Barge In Access List is only available when the Barge In service is enabled from the Featu res page Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network From this page a list of extensions that are capable to barge in Barge In Access List of Extension 101 the current extension calls and the appropriate permissions can Add Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Sele
409. the other groups Clicking on the Group name will display an IP Pool Group Configuration page with the Members list for the current group QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Min Synem Users Conferences Telepi erna Lipi Hareak IP Pool Configuration Fig Il 227 IP Pool Configuration page Man system Users Conferences Teleplentey IP Pool Configuration Add Group Fig Il 228 IP Pool configuration Add Group page 125 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide The IP Pool Group Configuration page displays a list of all the added member IP addresses for the selected group It offers the following components Current Group provides read only information about the current group name the members are listed for Add opens the Add Member page where a new member may be added Edit opens the Edit Members page where the service parameters can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add Member page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear The Add Members page provides the following radio buttons IPaddress requires the member IP address that is to be added to the group IP Subnet requires the subnet specified by the IP address and the Maskbits See above for more information about Maskbits URL Address requires the member hostname to be added to the group The User defined Group includes previously a
410. there System Uptime Current System Time and Last Time Cleared last time ISDN statistics has been cleared are displayed at the bottom of the page To reset the statistics counters press the Clear button QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 93 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus External PSTN Gateways The External PSTN Gateways page allows Quadro to use the PSTN lines FXO lines and or ISDN trunks on other Quadros This provides the option to call not only through local PSTN lines but also through available shared FXO or ISDN lines in the network of Quadros When the sharing mode is enabled and one Quadro is configured to use the shared PSTN lines of another Quadro the corresponding routing patterns will automatically be created in the Call Routing Tables see Call Routing on both Quadros This will allow PSTN call routing between the two Quadros epyzi Pia de Las Man Syste User Conferences Teleqlinany helen rrei Uplink Nelwnk External PSTH Gateways Line PSTN ines of me other device The Use PSTN lines of the other device checkbox is used to enable Quadro to use the shared PSTN lines on a remote sae Gack Haa device This selection requires you to configure the Authorization Parameters Use the same named link to access the Authorization Parameters table The Authorization Parameters page is used to create accounts for the remote Quadros allowing them to connect the Quadro and
411. time range of custom avaianie Periods the pattern validation should be defined Any time selected in this Sa aa eat E a field will be considered corresponding to the Quadro s Time Date Settings The Custom selection provides the option to manually define the validity period s Use the following format to insert pattern date time rule s Fig Il 187 Call Routing Wizard page 5 Month Month Month Day Day Day hh mm hh mm Ge ee ee ee ee Administrator s Menus QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 101 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Call Routing Wizard Page 6 appears if the Set Tracing Debug Options on This Rule checkbox was previously enabled on Page 1 of the Local Call Routing Wizard It will require information about the tracing debug options This page offers result options of the corresponding routing rule execution when the notification event will be printed in the Events page D In Case of Successful Call a notification event is printed when the successful call was established with the routing rule e In Case of Failover a notification event is printed when the call ends up on one of the failover reasons selected on the Page 2 of the Local Call Routing Wizard e In Case if Call Failed to Establish a notification 6 J event is printed when the call executed with the routing rule failed Fig Il 188 Call Rout
412. tings page contains only one Route Incoming Call to drop down list Selecting the Use Default outgoing Caller ID allows you to overwrite the source caller information with the one specified in the Default outgoing Caller ID field when placing outgoing calls toward the CO The Default outgoing Caller ID field requires the caller ID for the outgoing calls from the Quadro through the ISDN trunk That number should be registered at the CO and can be one of the MSNs provided by the CO If this checkbox is enabled but no value is defined in the Default outgoing Caller ID empty caller information will be sent to the Administrator s Guide Main System Users Conferences ISON Wizard Routing Settings Trak 1 HAH Humber a ThT09T 2970 EELE F07 297012 29701 29701 r TaTO 207019 297020 sa 0241 I87023 207074 297014 297111 ia TATI Use Default oulgoing Caller ID D r uh cuigding Cale S020 PH antranced Settings Previous Capri giri e HA HA E iDapt ibabad Ai Al rig CO If this checkbox is disabled the source caller information will be forwarded to the CO Talaphony Route incoming Call te Routing weth inbound de siinehan nuniber intarmaa pain Heiwork Administrator s Menus Fig Il 171 ISDN Wizard Routing Settings Select the Advanced Settings checkbox if you wish to adjust trunk s L2 and L3 Settings manually otherwise leave this checkbox unselected to use the syst
413. tions from the Quadro Fig Il 223 Filtering Rules page SIP Access is to allow or deny the SIP access to or from the particular SIP servers SIP hosts or a group of them The SIP Access filtering rule may prevent or allow incoming or outgoing SIP calls to or from specified SIP server s or host s When Blocked IP List is used traffic from specific hosts may be blocked no matter what services are opened in the other filters NO traffic will be allowed to the specified hosts The Blocked IP List service has a higher priority if the same host is also listed in the Allowed IP List table Allowed IP List allows trusted hosts to reach your network and vice versa It is an exception to other rules and only all services may be allowed for a single host Restricted IPSec Generally hosts in a VPN are allowed to have access to any service i e no traffic will be blocked They are treated as if they were part of the Quadro LAN However this service can be manually denied here The Filtering Rules page provides several links Each link opens its specific parameters on the same page Only Change Policy see chapter Firewall and NAT Manage user Defined Services see chapter Service Pool and Manage IP Pool Groups see chapter IP_Pool lead to separate pages The Filtering Rules page also includes the currently selected firewall security Policy level and its description The table displayed on the bottom of this page shows the filters selected
414. to be uploaded and updated into the system The configuration files to be uploaded should be in the txt format otherwise a system error occurs Configuration file upload progress will be displayed in the area below During legible configuration file upload Quadro s functionality failures may occur Events The Events page has two tables All system events that have occurred will be displayed in one table and event settings will be displayed in the other The System Events page may be accessed through the Events link from the main menu It lists information about system events that have occurred on Quadro When a new event takes place a record is added to the System Event table For failure events priority 2 and 3 see below the warning Please check your pending events will appear at the bottom of all management pages The system events and the warning message are visible only for the administrator The warning link which leads directly to the System Events page will disappear from the management pages if the administrator has marked all new events as read QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x Internet connection status static IP Please check your pending events Copyright C 2005 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 40 Event Warning on the Main Menu page 23 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Taia Pabam in ae rack Man System Uses Conferences T
415. to increase Quadro device availability using second Quadro as a backup unit This requires two units running the same firmware version and connected to each other through Ethernet or LAN ports depending on the device model The idea of redundancy is to ensure uninterrupted functionality of the Quadro The Redundancy Settings should be configured on both Quadros One of the Quadros is configured as a master the second one as a backup unit Please Note To setup a redundant network you should first startup the master device with all attached IP phones and other devices make sure it works normally and then startup the backup device If the master device becomes unavailable which can be caused by power loss reboot or network malconfiguration the second Quadro becomes automatically available and starts to run as a master device Depending on the configuration the second Quadro can remain master or go to the backup mode once the first device becomes available again Attention During failover procedure all active calls will be disconnected and the system will be out of service during 2 5 minutes depending on the number of IP phones connected to the system which is needed for running the applications and rebooting the phones If there are IP phones in the network that are not auto configured by Quadro IP phones not supported by Epygi or IP phones with the changed login name and password you will need to reboot them manually After failover the licen
416. to those which have no authorization enabled QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 98 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enabler Key and Disabler Key text fields request digit combination which should be dialed from the handset or Auto Attendant to enable or disable the certain routing rules in the Call Routing Table You can set the same Enabler Disabler Key for multiple routing rules the same key may be used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one this will allow managing several routing rules with the single key The second page of the Call Routing Wizard offers different Call Routing Wizard components depending on the Destination Type selected on the previous page Rauti CHI beting 2d Entry Use Extension Settings drop down list is applicable to SIP and IP PSTN destination types and allows you to select the extension also Auto Attendant on behalf of the call that will be placed The SIP settings of the selected extension will be used as the caller information If an entry is not selected from this list the original caller information will be kept When Keep original DID checkbox is selected the called destination will receive the Original caller s information and not the information of the extension selected from the Use Extension Settings list When the checkbox Add Remote Party ID is selected the Remote Party ID parameter is being delivered to the destination
417. tocols to be selected Port Range requires a port range for the defined service To Add a new Service Administrator s Menus Hain Syin iari Coie aces Tejar iarl Hk Heteoik Service Pool Configuration Add emita Nan GameZone Pre tucal TEF Port Ranga Hir Mex 3550 Fig Il 226 Service Pool Page to add a new Service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link on the Filtering Rules page 2 Click on the Add button on the Service Pool Configuration page A page where a new Service may be added will appear in the browser window Define a service name in the Service Name text field i al a To add a service with these parameters click on Save To Delete a Service Select the protocol type for the service from the Protocol drop down list Enter the port range in the Port Range text fields or leave one of them empty to define a particular port for the service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link The Service Pool Configuration page appears with the table of services if any 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding services that should be deleted from the Service Pool table Press Select all if all services should be deleted 3 Click on the Delete button on the Service Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel by clicking on No I P Pool The Manage IP Pool Groups link opens the IP Pool Configuration page The IP Pool table is the list of all
418. trusion Detection System intrusion alert only the first possible intrusion in each 10 minute period will initiate an event This helps to avoid flooding the System Events table and flooding the user with various intrusion alerts that result from each possible Denial of Service attack When these events are displayed in the System Events table the user can receive detailed information about the intrusions through a link to the IDS log list If Quadro cannot receive an IP address from the DHCP or PPP servers or cannot register an extension on the SIP or Routing servers or cannot reach an NIP server it raises only one event for the entire period the action has failed but will continue to try When the required action is successful Quadro raises an appropriate message To Assign an Action to the Event 1 Select the checkbox of one or more events to assign an action to them 2 Press the Edit button The Edit Event Settings page appears 3 Select an action type from the Action radio buttons to notify the administrator about the event 4 Press the Save button to submit the changes or use Back to abort the selected action Time Date Settings The Time and Date Settings page provides information about the current system time and date The settings may be updated through the international time and date servers Time is used to set the local time hour minute Date is used to set the date month day year Enable Simple Network Time Protoco
419. ts Criterion 3 The more matching digits outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 2 The total number of question marks inside and outside the braces brackets The more question marks a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of question marks outside braces brackets Criterion 5 The more question marks outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 4 a The number of square brackets Criterion 6 l l n The more brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority nae The number of braces Criterion 7 _ The more braces a pattern contains the higher its priority _ The number of asterisks Criterion 8 PS The fewer asterisks a pattern contains the higher its priority Ener The value of the metric Criterion 9 l l S The lower the metric of a pattern is the higher its priority ae The position in the routing table Criterion 10 7 l l l l o The higher the position of a pattern in the routing table is the higher its priority Example The user has dialed 1231 and the following matching patterns have been found The list of patterns 123 11 15 3 2271 123 1 3 1 3 100 150 asd
420. ts Mails will be automatically converted to the PCMU CCITT u law 8 kHz 8 bit Mono wave format before being attached to the e mail Checkbox activates the following input options e Email Address requires the mailing address s of the person s that should to receive the newly arrived voice mails on their email accounts Use a space or a comma to separate the mailing addresses in the text field e The next two fields are used for retransmission of voice mails via email Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the voice mail will be delivered via email to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the voice mail is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field e Remove Voice Mail on send removes the voice mail from the user mailbox after sending it to the email recipient s Main Woke Mail Your Extension Supp enary Sereices Voice Mail Profiles Extension 11 Ac EJI Daotobe Broth Marmy Di VMS fer Home L VMS for Ooy VS for Wingert alls Back Fig Il 249 Voice Mail Profiles page Te trea Main Voice Mai Your Extension Ps Gl andra Td SUPpIATan Lary Serdines Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry Extension 11 Profile Hame YMS fer Oefice Fig Il 250 Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry page Main Voice liad Tour Extension SURI Lary Senices Voice Mail Profile
421. ts reasonable attorneys fees and all other costs and expenses incurred in connection with settling or resolving such dispute If you have any questions about this Agreement please write to Epygi at 6900 North Dallas Parkway Suite 850 Plano Texas 75024 or call Epygi at 972 692 1166 QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 156
422. ttendant extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings Attendant Scenario SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages The SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions described above The General Settings and Attendant Scenario pages are described below 1 General Settings for attendant extension This group requires AA extension information and has the following components Mam System Users Conferences Telephony lifes met Uplink Network Display Name is an optional parameter used to define the Auto Attendant s description Usually the display name appears on Extensions Management Edit Entry the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice saan mail is sent ae See a Display Narmne With the Enable FAX Forwarding checkbox enabled the system moves the incoming FAX to the selected extension if a FAX tone is detected on the Auto Attendant eecertage n The Extension to forward drop down list is used to choose the extension where the incoming FAX addressed to the Quadro s Sme Heip Auto Attendant will be forwarded The list contains only those l extensions that have FAX support enabled FAX support can be enabled from the Extension Codecs page Ain Ls Fig Il 103 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for Auto Attendant page Please Note FAX forwarding is applicable only for incoming calls from P
423. tual extension The phone becomes no more assigned to your extension and is now available for other users to login and use it FXO Settings The FXO Settings are used to configure the FXO support that allows Quadro to connect to other PBXs or analog telephone lines The QuadroM8L M26x has 8 FXO lines The shared lines are also displayed in this page and can be edited here Any changes applied in this page will be automatically reflected on the FXO gateway s that share its FXO lines The FXO Settings allows you to limit incoming or outgoing calls for the selected FXO line if required Depending on configuration of the FXO gateways multiple shared FXO ports from one or more FXO gateways may be available on the QuadroM IP PBXs thus giving you the option to use them simultaneously The administrator may assign a default recipient for each FXO line where calls from the Central Office PSTN will be routed The assigned recipients become the Quadro default users If the Quadro Auto Attendant has been selected as a default user a caller from the PSTN needs to go through the attendant menu to reach the desired extension If the FXO service is disabled the Allowed Call Type Route Incoming Call to and PSTN number columns are set to N A Clicking on the FXO line number will open the FXO Settings FXO page where the FXO line settings may be modified The FXO Settings FXO page consists of the following components Main Sten Uses
424. ublic phone e At the certain moment requires the moment hour and minute when the extension will automatically log out from the public phone QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus 5 Call Queue Settings This group is used to configure the Call Queue service that allows multiple incoming calls to be kept in the queue when being on the line and enables the calls to be answered in the order they have been received This feature can be also used within Receptionist Management see below for more details The Enable checkbox activates the Call Queue functionality on the extension The Call Queue Size text field requires the length of the call queue This is the maximum number of calls that will be accepted into the queue and kept on hold while the extension user is on a Call If a maximum number of calls are already held in the call queue the next incoming call will be routed to the Man yaten Waser Conferences Talapia Wierm plink Hanwork extension s Voice Mail if enabled or will be disconnected Extensions Management Edit Entry Please Note By configuring Call Queue size Call Forwarding if Call Queue Settings 11 Busy and Voice Mail telephony services will not take effect on mn lense the corresponding extension until the call queue is not filled amsema COUN BCE These telephony services will affect only the calls out of the call Max Call Queue Appeara
425. ue oer BSR RC ei i Extension 11 Send Meotage lo Callor Party Preqect this entry Co Restore Dolau Bietking Message File Along with the components seen by the user an additional Protect this entry checkbox is available in the Call Blocking Add Entry pages for administrator access only With this eseas nna tecminae Lsi a nishte wanes checkbox selected the user will be unable to deactivate the blocking services configured by the administrator Gam Back Fig Il 247 Blocking Page for the Administrator Voice Mail Profiles When the administrator accesses the Voice Mail Settings of Main Voice Mail Your Extension Supplementary Services an extension there is an additional Voice Mail Profiles link present that leads to the page where custom voice mail Voice Mail Settings profiles and their settings can be defined This link is hidden for the extension user s access The Voice Mail Profiles page is used to define and configure custom voice mail profiles E ask password before granting local access to mall b r Voice Ma Indication Lame inekeation Extension 11 Madmum mail message duration minp s Aak pa sswiid belon ganting moh dgis b mail Beta fe Erane Zeru The Voice Mail Profile is a group of most common Voice Mail aatia Settings which can be saved under a specific name This ai Redirectcalltyoe PEK allows you to have several versions of Voice Mail Settings amass a E 7 Ll Send mails caa
426. ugh Routing Calach Serings The Caller Address text field requires the callers SIP calmack Call Type address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly or PSTN number to be added to the trusted phones list The PSTN number length depends on the area code and phone Calibark Response Delay 60 number The wildcard is supported in this field If the caller address already exists in the Authorized Phones Database the error message The record already exists appears when selecting the Save button RE Sec ea bate Gam Fig Il 121 Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page The Login Extension drop down list provides all existing extensions on the Quadro When calling the Quadro Auto Attendant a trusted user will automatically be logged in as the selected extension i e the extension number and its password will be automatically submitted by the Quadro system The trusted user will directly access the Quadro Auto Attendant services The SIP settings of the login extension will be used when making IP calls The Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox enables direct access for the trusted user to the Quadro Auto Attendant Call Relay menu If the checkbox is not selected a trusted caller will be directed to the Auto Attendant s main menu but will still be able to reach Remote Access Voice Mailbox of the specified extension and Call Relay services see Feature Codes with no authentication Please Note Login Extension drop dow
427. ull information is seen in the tool tip about conference specific voice Codecs Conference codec s can be accessed and modified by clicking on the link of the corresponding conference s Codecs The Link moves to the Conference Codecs page Clicking on the corresponding conference ID will move to the Moderator s page where call general settings can be configured The page Conference consists of the following functional buttons Add opens the Add Entry page where a new conference can be created The page consists of the Conference ID text field that requires a un IQ ue D for th e cal co nfe rence Main System Users Conferences Telephony Internet Uplink Network p y 8 l Please Note The length of the Conference ID is limited to the quadrom extension length configured from Extensions Management The Conferences Management Add Entry Conference ID cannot start with the digit 0 which is a reserved character The Conference IDs can be used in Auto Attendant to reach a Conference ID 11308 conference on the system To join a conference using its ID dial J cepyiant cy 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Lid All rights reserved the Conference ID when in Auto Attendant Fig Il 132 Conferences Management page To add a conference specify the Conference ID and click on Save This will open the Edit Entry page see below Edit opens the Edit Entry page where the settings of a newly created conference might be
428. umber on the mapped host for the SIP TLS traffic over NAT The RTP Parameters page is used to choose between the STUN and Manual NAT traversal connection for the RIP traffic and to define the RTP RTCP ports for the connection over NAT Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of connection over NAT Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of Mapped settings for the RTP UDP traffic over NAT STUN settings are configured on the STUN Parameters page see below Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the RTP RTCP port ranges for the RTP traffic over NAT aT yi T Man Sten Uses Conferences Telephony Trebor meet Uplink Helwioik p F Hl Tia dines ae e The Mapped Host text fields require the Mapped Host for pe AATA eer RTP traffic over NAT e Mapped RTP RTCP Port Range e Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed General Sefinge SIP Paramelers ATP Padme EMN Panmeie MAT Eochieion Table Line Manual MAT Traversal Bape Hisi 152 i15 Mapped ATRIA Cr Pon Ranga Mier BOBS e Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed Mar B075 Please Note RTP RTCP Mapped Port ranges should De fjiemrammmosmoarstteinnsaies tie 48 waht reams greater than or equal to the RTP RTCP port ranges defined on Fig Il 150 RTP Parameters page the RTP Setti
429. ured From the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page you may configure event notification policy when the call quality is lower than the allowed level This page consists of a Notify checkbox which enables the call quality monitoring mechanism for the corresponding event notifications and a Call Quality less than drop down list where the least satisfactory call quality should be selected When a call with the quality less than the level selected here is registered on the Quadro an event notification will appear When the Notify checkbox is disabled no Call Quality events will occur on the Quadro Please Note The ways of notification for the Call Quality events should be configured from the Events page tain Sem Uke Comeran Tepi aber ren ipini Metmnalik Configure Call Quality Event Notification Bl omy whan Cal Guhar litt hin aeraedianl we Raet al Back Fig Il 141 Configure Call Quality Event Notification page The Configure System Events link leads to the Events page where the methods of notification for each system event can be configured FAX Statistics The FAX statistics page is accessed from the Call Statistics page by clicking on the FAX link in the Details column for the calls that contain T 38 FAX transmission The FAX statistics page provides information about received and transmitted packets lost bad and duplicated packets This statistics refers only to the T 38 FAX transmission
430. us Main Conference Conference Properties Conference Progress Conference ID 308 Description Discussion of weekly issues SIP Address 11307 sip epygi loc 5060 Duration 9 min 27 sec Conference Status Terminate Active Unlocked Recording Disabled Participants Add Delete DialOut SetSpeaker SetListener Lecture Mode Selectall Inverse Selection Name SIP Address Participant Type Participant Indication Participant Status C Andy White 20232 sip epygi com Speaker Yes Active C Greg Lee 11308 sip epygiloc Speaker Yes Not Active C Jane Doe 11248 sip epygiloc Listener Only Yes Active Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Ccpysi quadro Refresh in 1 seconds Conference Conference ID 308 e Feature Codes e Conference o Conference Progress o Activate Conference o Send Notification Mail o Recorded Conferences o Conference Statistics Conference Properties Help Logout Active All 2 3 Nested Conference Request to Speak No No No Home Logout Cepysi quadro Refresh in 18 seconds Active All 2 3 Nested Conference Request to Speak No No No Fig Il 1 QuadroCS Moderator s page quadro Cepygi Fig Il 3 Moderator s Settings Tree Menu 145 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Conference Progress The Conference Progress page displays information about the conference including the list of participants a
431. used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one dialing the certain key will affect all pre configured routing rules If the routing record has an authorization enabled on the enabler disabler key administrator s password will be required to be inserted QOO after the key Once the administrator s password is dialed system plays a confirmation about the accepted configuration and the state of the certain routing rule s is getting modified lf administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even to those which have no authorization enabled Administrator Login menu has the following sub menus and the management keys Auto Attendant Greeting Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to Current AA Greeting Record a New AA Greeting Restore Default AA Greeting Stop Recording or Playback Auto Attendant Menu Message Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to AA Menu Message Record a New AA Menu Message Restore Default AA Menu Message Stop Recording or Playback QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 6 86 Administrator s Login Greeting Message Listen to Current Greeting Message 2 Record a Universal Greeting Message Restore System Default Greeting Message Stop Recording or Playback Greeting Message Universal Extensi
432. used to obtain a new WAN IP address in case e g the Quadro moves to another network The functional button Establish Your Internet Connection Now respectively Terminate Your Internet Connection Now occurs on the Quadro Management page if PPPoE is used as WAN interface protocol The link Please Check Your Pending Events will be displayed on the administrator Main Menu page if new system events exist The link leads to the Events page that can be also accessed from the System menu The list of Users currently logged into the system is seen in the lower right corner of the Administrator s Main Menu Information about IP address user accessed Quadro GUI from the username user is logged in and the time until the next automatically logout is provided herein The current version of the Quadro s firmware and of its boot loader is also available here The idle session timeout is set to 20 minutes If no action is performed during that time user will be automatically moved to the Login page and will be requested to login again The link Refresh in occurs in the upper right corner beside the field displaying the number of seconds until the next refresh and is used to perform a manual reload of the page If a page with a Refresh counter is left opened the session time out counter will be updated periodically and the logout timeout will never expire QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 5 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Recurrent Buttons
433. voice subsystem The Regional Settings and Preferences page has two drop down lists to select the Location country and a corresponding Timezone Quadro will support Daylight Savings DST correction if it is available for the selected time zone This page also has a manipulation radio button group to choose e System Language selection is available only when the custom Language Pack has been uploaded and it is used to enable custom language for system voice messages or returning back to the default language English e GUI Theme selection used to select the GUI theme style of the web based configuration pages The Choose Theme on Login checkbox indicates whether the GUI theme selection radio buttons should be displayed on the Quadro Login page Selecting the checkbox will allow users to choose the GUI theme before logging into the Quadro Leaving the checkbox unselected will require the administrator to run the System Configuration Wizard to change the theme The Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings are used to configure the emergency dial plan The Emergency Codes text field requires the PSTN numbers of the emergency or lifeline services Multiple emergency codes separated by commas can be inserted in this field For each emergency code a routing pattern will be generated in the Call Routing Table which will allow faster and easier calls to emergency destinations The PSTN Access Code drop down list allows y
434. witch the particular listener either to speaker or lecture mode With a speaker permission granted listener can Q00 speak to the conference along with other participants With a lecturer permission granted listener can speak to the conference having all other participants muted in the conference This service is available for listener participants only Cancel the Request to Speak With this key combination listener cancels his request to speak and a notification hand up icon disappears from the Conference Q00 Progress table This service is available for listener participants only Mute Unmute HH With this key combination any participants in the conference may mute and unmute themselves during the conference Please Note You may accelerate dial out by a pound sign at the end of your dialed number Call Codes available in the Auto Attendant For external IP calls addressed to the Auto Attendant following key combination is available to access and manipulate within Auto Attendant services Incoming Call to Auto Attendant Key Combination Conferences Menu used to access conferences Conference ID should be dialed here already in QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 136 QuadroM8L M26x Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page This welcome page may be helpful if administrators want to inform their extension users about individual data they need to use the ext
435. wly logged entries in various ways mail display notification and Flashing LEDs depending on the settings in the Event Settings page To make an IDS log reporting table IDS needs to be enabled on the Firewall and NAT page The IDS Logs table is a list of new or read IDS entries and descriptions referring to them The table provides a status row that has the value New if the entry is still unread or it is empty if the entry has already been read IDS Logs Ce VO Man Systam Users Conferences Telephony Helen net Up nik Net moth Cp TOuwsduMe Petty n OO poora Makalat Read Delete Log mart Al as meaa Mane au D9 ogge entes ae Teao ano Ia New ee Coi removes the New status from the Status row of the IDS entries table jeRedy2 ont eee acces Delete Log is used to delete all entries from the IDS table A detailed log of the selected entry can be seen by clicking on the Description link of the corresponding entry in the IDS Entries table Man Sytem Users Comerences Telephony hiterevet Uperik Netavih IDS Logs WEB CGI phf accets Further informaton under hitewieve mite argitgt hiegevename egOname CVE 1999 0067 hip Iwww securitfocus contest 73 The IDS Logs detailed page has a following preview The Issue Detailed Log table is a detailed list of new and read IDS entries The table contains a Status row that has the value New if poo sso ec es bes ab venue mans the entry is still unread or that is empty if the entry has alread
436. work Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask corresponding to the specified IP address To Configure the NAT Exclusion Table Copyright Dare Dee irii lagii Mam Syaem Users Coiiaences ojej kerhet Lyle Hew NAT Traversal Settings i SIF Pararelers ATE Poramelers STM Parameters eral Def Senare eS AT i Baki Laa Daie Select oll fet ge Selection fie whens a Ibh oo i 10 oo Bak Fig Il 152 NAT Exclusion Table page Main Syuan the Conferences Talapioy fanerivet tink datimi hi NAT Traversal Settings NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry RTF Faama SIUH Parmeter MAT Eschalon Tabis IF id a 199 exh i L _iF iipboani Subnet Mask IP Clipbecrd Fig Il 153 NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry page 1 Press the Add button on the NAT Exclusion Table page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window 2 Specify an IP Address and its Subnet Mask in the corresponding text fields 3 Press Save on the Add Entry page to add the selected IP range to the NAT Exclusion Table list To Delete an IP Range from the NAT Exclusion Table 1 Select the checkboxes of the corresponding IP range s that should to be deleted from the NAT Exclusion Table Press Select all if all IP ranges should to be deleted 2 Press the Delete button on the NAT Exclusion Table page 3 Confirm the deletion by pressing Yes The IP range will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the IP ran
437. xtension Outgoing call blocking played when the extension dials a blocked destination Call Queue Welcome Message played when a caller joins the extension s call queue Call Queue Message played when a caller is being held in the queue The Upload Universal Extension Recordings page consists of a table where the universal voice messages are listed An Upload functional link is present for each voice message recording that is not uploaded in the table and it is used to upload the custom system message When a message is uploaded the Upload functional link is replaced by Download Uriel nates ituala Reining and Remove functional links respectively These are used to a download to the PC and to remove the uploaded system message iio leis C fiip The Memory Allocation group includes a drop down list used to specify the Percentage of System Memory for the universal extension recordings The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro Fig Il 109 Upload Universal Extension Recordings page Please Note Changing the Percentage of System Memory on this page will stop any recordings of universal extension voice messages from the handset QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 59 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Recording Box Recorded calls on the Quadro can either be stored locally in the Recording Box or be uploaded to the remo
438. xtension will be required to start the call paging When a denied user tries to call the Paging Group extension Party does not accept your call message will be played to the caller When caller dials the Paging Group extension with empty Paging Group table Number dialed temporarily unavailable message will be played to the caller For Paging Group extensions Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings while General Settings page has a different content QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 47 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide 1 General Settings for paging group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Passwor
439. y been Fig 232 IDS issue detailed preview read l l QuadroM8L M26x SW Version 5 2 x 127 QuadroM8L M26x Manual II Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Network Menu arnet Uplink a nternet Uplink C epygi Min oii Ihaia C amia ee L ad dt iA Ve Getrag fir fein Quadro 72x Management Active Calls CE Fig Il 233 Network menu in Dynamo theme Fig Il 234 Network menu in Plain theme DNS Settings The DNS Settings page provides the option of setting up a name server for the Quadro It offers the following components kam fen Uea Con H ences Teepe ony inten et Uplink Meta ik The Nameserver Assignment radio buttons are as follows DNS Settings e The Dynamically by provider selection automatically configures the assignment of the name server address from the provider party e Fixed Nameserver address is a manually selected name server The Nameserver text field requires the IP address of an external name server The Alternative Nameserver text field requires the IP address of the Secondary name server TNE creerea massi tsstasisaisn Lsi an nau nerd Alternative Nameserver is used if the main name server Fig Il 235 DNS Settings page cannot be accessed DNS Server Settings The DNS Server on the Quadro provides the services to the hosts in the Quadro s LAN With this service Quadro returns the correct IP address to the requested domain name so that any device in the LAN can be accessed by its hostna
440. yer supported by your Operatinig System 27 Feb 2008 11 44 38 9 sec The column headings of the Recorded Conferences table are organized as links By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column Upon sorting ascending or descending arrows will Copyright C 2007 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved appear next to the column heading Each row in the table of Recorded Fig Il 6 Recorded Conference Conferences can be selected by the checkbox for deletion To Play a Conference 1 Click on the speaker sign of the corresponding recorded conference 2 Depending on you browser settings the wav file will be played directly or an application will ask you to save the wav file locally to the PC If you need to save the file please specify the path then run the media file from the specified location To Delete a Recorded Conference 1 Select the checkbox of the corresponding record s in the Recorded Conferences table that will be deleted Click on Select all if all records should be deleted 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the deletion clicking Yes The selected conference then will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the conference on the QuadroCS select No Conference Statistics The Conference Statistics page displays the call statistics on conference calls only For more information on the Conference Statistics page see the chapter on the Call Statistics QuadroM8L M26x

QuadroM8L/M26x Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents